SlideShare a Scribd company logo
Physics Laboratory Manual
            for
Engineering Undergraduates




               Dr. P. K. Giri
            Department of Physics
   Indian Institute of Technology Guwahati




   A project completed under the Curriculum
Development Cell, Quality Improvement Program
 (Q.I.P), IIT Guwahati, sponsored by A.I.C.T.E.,
                     India.



                  July 2005
CONTENTS

Instructions for Laboratory                                          ……….3
Bibliography                                                         ……….4
Experiment 1: Error Analysis and Graph Drawing                       ………..5
Experiment 2: Coupled Pendulum                                       ……….15
Experiment 3: Study of Small Oscillation using a bar Pendulum        ……….22
Experiment 4: Rotational Inertia of a Rigid Body                     ……….26
Experiment 5: Velocity of Sound (Appendix: CRO)                      ……….29
Experiment 6: Radiation from a black body: Stefan-Boltzmann Law ……….39
Experiment 7: Melting point of a solid                               ………42
Experiment 8: Measurement of e/m by Thomson’s Bar magnet method ……...45
Experiment 9: Measurement of e/m by Helical Coil method              ……….54
Experiment 10: Charging and discharging of a capacitor               ……….62
Experiment 11: Self inductance and resistance of a coil              ……….70
Experiment 12: Resonance in LCR circuit                              ……….72
Experiment 13: Hysteresis Loop for a ferromagnetic material (M-B curve) ….81
Experiment 14: Electromagnetic induction                             ………...88
Experiment 15: Electrical resistivity of semiconductors              ………..96
Experiment 16: Planck’s constant                                     ………..100
Experiment 17: Magnetic field along the axis of a coil (Biot-Savart Law) …….107
Experiment 18: Study of Hall effect (Lorentz Force)                  ……….110
Experiment 19: I-V Characteristic of a Solar Cell                    ……….114
Experiment 20: Air wedge: Interference of light                      ……….123
Experiment 21: Newton’s Ring                                         ……….125
Experiment 22: Diffraction at a single and double slit (Appendix : Lasers) …..131
Experiment 23: Diffraction Grating                                   ………..144
Experiment 24: Speed of light in glass                               ………..153
Experiment 25: Polarization of light                                 ………..157




                                          2
Instructions for Laboratory



•   The objective of the laboratory is learning. The experiments are designed to
    illustrate phenomena in different areas of Physics and to expose you to measuring
    instruments. Conduct the experiments with interest and an attitude of learning.
•   You need to come well prepared for the experiment
•   Work quietly and carefully (the whole purpose of experimentation is to make
    reliable measurements!) and equally share the work with your partners.
•   Be honest in recording and representing your data. Never make up readings or
    doctor them to get a better fit for a graph. If a particular reading appears wrong
    repeat the measurement carefully. In any event all the data recorded in the tables
    have to be faithfully displayed on the graph.
•   All presentations of data, tables and graphs calculations should be neatly and
    carefully done.

•   Bring necessary graph papers for each of experiment. Learn to optimize on usage
    of graph papers. For example, in Experiment 16 (Planck's constant) you do not
    need three separate sheets to represent the graphs of lnIph vs. T-1 for the three
    different filters. All the three graphs can be accommodated on a single graph
    sheet.

•   Graphs should be neatly drawn with pencil. Always label graphs and the axes and
    display units.

•   If you finish early, spend the remaining time to complete the calculations and
    drawing graphs. Come equipped with calculator, scales, pencils etc.

• Do not fiddle idly with apparatus. Handle instruments with care. Report any
    breakage to the Instructor. Return all the equipment you have signed out for the
    purpose of your experiment.




                                          3
Bibliography


Here is a short list of references to books which may be useful for further reading in
Physics or instrumentation relevant to the experiments. Also included are some references
to books of general interest with regard to science and experimentation.

I      "Fundamentals of Physics", 6th Ed., D. Halliday, R. Resnick and J. Walker, John
        Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, 2001.
2.    "Physics", M. Alonso and E.J. Finn, Addison Wesley, .1992.
3.     "The Feynman Lectures in Physics (Vols. 1, 11 and 111)", R.P. Feynman, R.B.
       Leighton and M.Sands, Addison Wesley, 1963.
4.    "Fundamentals of Optics", 4th Ed., F.A. Jenkins and H.E. White, McGraw-Hill Book
        Co., 1981.
5.    "Optics", A Ghatak, Tata-McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1992
6.    "Vibration and Waves", A.P. French, Arnold-Heinemann, New Delhi, 1972.
7.    "Students Reference Manual for Electronic Instrumentation Laboratories",
        S.E. Wolf and R.F.M. Smith, PHI, 1990.
8.     "Basic Electronic Instrument Handbook", C.F. Coombs, McGraw-Hill Book Co.,
        1972.
9.     "Laboratory Experiments in College Physics", C.H. Bernard and C.D. Epp, John
        Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, 1995.
10. "Practical Physics", G.L. Squires, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 1985.
11.  "Great Experiments in Physics", M.H. Shamos, Holt, Rinehart and Winston Inc.,
      1959.
12. "Experiments in Modern Physics", A.C. Melissinos, Academic Press, N.Y., 1966.
13. "Reliable Knowledge", J.Ziman, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge,
     1978.
14. "Introductory Readings in the Philosophy of Science", Edited by E.D. Klenke,
       R. Hollinger, A.D. Kline, Prometheous Books, Buffalo, New York, 1988.




                                             4
Experiment 1


                       Error Analysis and Graph Drawing


I.    Introduction:
1.1   It is impossible to do an experimental measurement with perfect accuracy. There is
      always an uncertainty associated with any measured quantity in an experiment even
      in the most carefully done experiment and despite using the most sophisticated
      instruments. This uncertainty in the measured value is known as the error in that
      particular measured quantity. There is no way by which one can measure a quantity
      with one hundred percent accuracy. In presenting experimental results it is very
      important to objectively estimate the error in the measured result. Such an exercise
      is very basic to experimental science. The importance of characterizing the
      accuracy and reliability of an experimental result is difficult to understate when we
      keep in mind that it is experimental evidence that validate scientific theories.
      Likewise, reliability and accuracy of measurements are also deeply relevant to
      Engineering.


      The complete science of error analysis involves the theory of statistics (see Ref.
      1,2) and is too involved to present here. This short presentation is intended to
      introduce the student to some basic aspects of error analysis and graph drawing,
      which it is expected that the student will then put into practice when presenting
      his/her results of the coming experiments.


I.2   When a measurement of a physical quantity is repeated, the results of the various
      measurements will, in general, spread over a range of values. This spread in the
      measured results is due to the errors in the experiment. Errors are generally
      classified into two types: systematic (or determinate) errors and random (or
      indeterminate) errors. A systematic error is an error, which is constant throughout a
      set of readings. Systematic errors lead to a clustering of the measured values
      around a value displaced from the "true" value of the quantity. Random errors on
      the other hand, can be both positive or negative and lead to a dispersion of the
      measurements around a mean value. For example, in a time period measurement,
      errors in starting and stopping the clock will lead to random errors, while a defect

                                             5
in the working of the clock will lead to systematic error. A striking example of
      systematic error is the measurement of the value of the electric charge of the
      electron 'e' by Millikan by his Oil Drop method. Millikan underestimated the
      viscosity of air, leading to a lower value for his result


                             e = (1.591 ± .002) x 10-19 C ------------------------------------- (1)
      Compare this with a more modem and accurate value (Cohen and Taylor 1973,
      Ref. 3)
                                   e = (1.602 189 ± 0.000 005) x 10-19C. ---------------------- (2)
      Systematic errors need to be carefully uncovered for the particular experimental set-
      up and eliminated by correcting the results of the measurements.


I.3   Random errors are handled using statistical analysis. Assume that a large number (N)
      of measurements are taken of a quantity Q giving values Q1, Q2, Q3…QN. Let Q be
      the mean value of these measurements
                                          N
                             Q=    1
                                   N             Qi            i=1       ---------------------------------- (3)
                                          i =1

      and let 'd' be the deviation in the measurements
                                    N
                        d=     1
                               N          (Qi − Q ) 2       ----------------------------------------------- (4)
                                   i =1


      The result of the measurement is quoted (assuming systematic errors have been
      eliminated) as
                        Q =Q±d                                --------------------------------------------- (5)
      The error Q in the quantity is then taken to be the deviation d. (This is called the
      standard error in Q)
      In a single measurement of a physical quantity, the error can be estimated as the least
      count (or its fraction) of the instrument being used.
      As an example, the result of a measurement of the radius of curvature R, of a plano-
      convex could be quoted as
                                   R = 140 ± 0.2 cm.                         ------------------------------ (6)
      This means that we expect that the value of R being in the range 139.8 to 140.2 cm.
      Note however, that this does not mean that the “true” value of R necessarily lies in
      this range, only that there is a possibility that it will do so.




                                                        6
The error in measurement can also be quoted as a percent error
                 ∆Q       d
                    ×100 = ×100                                ----------------------------------------- (7)
                  Q       Q
      For example, the percentage error in R is 0.143 %.

I.4   Combination of errors:

      Many times the value of a measured quantity may depend on other intermediate
      measured quantities. For example we could have a quantity Q which is a function F
      of a number of independent intermediate variables say x, y and z i.e.,

                                  Q = F(x,y,z)---------------------------------------------------(8)
      If the indeterminate errors related to x, y, z are ∆x, ∆y and ∆z respectively, then the
      error in Q can be calculated as
        ∆Q = (∂F / ∂x ) ∆x + (∂F / ∂y )∆y + (∂F / ∂z )∆z = a∆x + b∆y + c∆z ------------ (9)
      An important characteristic of errors is that the total error in a function, due to
      different variables is always additive. Therefore, more accurately, the error                      Q is
      calculated as
                         ∂F      ∂F      ∂F
                ∆Q=         ∆x +    ∆y +    ∆ z = a ∆ x + b ∆ y + c ∆ z -------------- (10)
                         ∂x      ∂y      ∂z
                                                = QA + QB + QC

      As an example, consider the quantity            Q= x + y .
      If the error in x (i.e., ∆x ) is negative and that in y (i.e., ∆y ) is positive, the total error
      in the quantity x+y will be ∆x + ∆y not ∆x + ∆y , which means combination of
      errors always lowers the quality of the experimental data.
      In fact, using statistical analysis (where the. error is defined as the root mean square
      deviation from the mean) the correct expression for the error in Q can be shown to
      be ∆Q = ( ∆x ) 2 + ( ∆y ) 2 .
      In general we have the rule that (following statistical analysis) if Q is a function of
      x, y, z,…., then
                  ( ∆Q ) 2 = (∆Q x ) 2 + (∆ Q y ) 2 + (∆Q z ) ) 2 ............. -------------------------- (11)

                          ∂Q               ∂Q             ∂Q
       where, ∆Q x = (       )∆x ; ∆Q y = ( )∆y ; ∆Q z = ( )∆z                            etc.
                          ∂x               ∂y             ∂z
      The following table summarizes the results for combining errors for some standard
      functions. Try to derive some of these results.




                                                     7
S.No              Function                                       Error in Q or Fractional error Q/Q

1.            Q=x+y                                              ∆Q = ( ∆ x ) 2 + ( ∆y ) 2

2.            Q=x–y                                              ∆Q = ( ∆ x ) 2 + ( ∆y ) 2
3.            Q                                              =                                            xy
                     2            2            2                        2            2
               ∆Q          ∆x           ∆y            ∆Q         ∆x           ∆y
                         =            +                  =                  +
               Q            x            y            Q           x            y

4.            Q                                            =                                              x/y
                     2            2            2                        2            2
               ∆Q            ∆x           ∆y          ∆Q         ∆x             ∆y
                         =            +                  =                  +
               Q              x            y          Q           x              y

                                                                 ∆Q    ∆x
5.            Q = xn                                                =n
                                                                 Q      x
                                                                        ∆x
6.            Q = ln x                                           ∆Q =
                                                                         x
                                                                 ∆Q
7.            Q = ex                                                =∆x
                                                                 Q


II.    Drawing of best fit straight line graph:


       To draw the best fit straight line graph through a set of scattered experimental data
       points we will follow a standard statistical method, known as least squares fit
       method.
       Let us consider a set of N experimental data points (x1,y1), (x2,y2), …….(xN,yN). It
       is well known that a straight-line graph is described by the equation
                                                   y = mx + C.        ----------------------------------------
       (12)
       We ask the question: how are the slope 'm' and the y-intercept 'c' to be determined
       such that a straight line best approximates the curve passing through the data points?
       Let Si = yi - mixi - c be the deviation of any experimental point P (xi, yi), from the



                                                       8
best fit line. Then, the gradient 'm' and the intercept 'c' of the best fit straight line has
     to be found such that the quantity
                         S = ( yi − m x i − c )2
                                 i

     is a minimum . We require
                 ∂S                                                 ∂S
                    =−2         x i ( y i − m x i − c) = 0 and         =− 2      ( y i − m x i − c) = 0 ,
                 ∂m                                                 ∂c

     which give,
               m     x i2 + c        xi =    x i yi       and     m    x i + Nc =     yi .

                                                                                                1
     The second equation can be written as as y = m x + c , where y =                                  y i and
                                                                                                N
           1
      x=        xi    showing that the best fit straight line passes through the centroid
           N
      ( x , y ) of the points (xi , yi ) .The requires values of m and c can be calculated from
     the above two equations to be
                            ( x i − x ) yi
                     m=                        and        c = y − m x ----------------------------------(13)
                            ( xi − x )2

     The best-fit straight line can be drawn by calculating m and c from above. A
     graphical method of obtaining the best fit line is to rotate a transparent ruler about
     the centroid so that it passes through the clusters of points at the top right and at the
     bottom left. This line will give the maximum error in m, ( m)1, on one side. Do the
     same to find out the maximum error in m, ( m)2 on the other side. Now bisect the
     angle between these two lines and that will be the best-fit line through the
     experimental data.

     What are the errors in the gradient and intercept due to errors in the experimental
     data points? The estimates of the standard errors in the slope and intercept are
                 1     Si2                     1 x2          Si2
       (∆m) 2 ≈              and     (∆c) 2 ≈     +              ,
                 D N−2                         N D N−2

     where D =       ( x i − x ) 2 and Si is the deviation ,Si = yi – m xi – c .

II.1. Presentation of error associated with experimental data in a graph.
     Let us consider a function, y = f(x), where x is an independent parameter which in
     the hand of the experimentalist during performing the experiments and y is the
     experimental data which is having a value depending upon the x and the instruments.
     Let the error associated with x be ±Ax and that for y be ±Ay. One can represent ±Ax


                                                      9
and ±Ay with the experimental data point P(x,y) on the graph paper. To do that, first
     plot P(x,y) on the graph paper, then draw a vertical line parallel to y axis about the
     point P(x,y) of length 2Ay. So upper half of the line represents the error +Ay and the
     lower half represents -Ay error. To present ±Ax, draw horizontal lines at the two
     ends of the vertical line of length 2Ax each. The whole presentation is now giving
     the errors associated with the experimental point P(x,y).




     Figure 1 is an example of experimental data of
     resonance absorption of      – ray experiment
     (Mössbauer      spectroscopy)     with        error
     associated with each experimental data. The
     solid lines give the fitted curve through the
     experimental data. Note that the error in the
     variable along horizontal axis is not shown.

                                                                     Fig 1
II.2 Use of graphs in experimental physics:


     In practical physics, the graph of the experimental data is most important in
     improving the understanding of the experimental results. Moreover from the graphs
     one can calculate unknowns related to the experiments and one can compare the
     experimental data with the theoretical curve when they are presented on same graph.
     There are different types of graph papers available in market. So, one should choose
     the appropriate type of graph paper to present their experimental results in the best
     way depending upon the values of the experimental data and the theoretical
     expression of the functions. To understand all those some of the assignments are
     given below in addition to those we discussed before.




                                              10
III. Exercises and Viva Questions
1.   What is the general classification of errors? Give an example of each. How are they
     taken care of?
                                                                      Radius of curvature(cm)
2.   What is the meaning of standard error? Calculate the
     standard error for the hypothetical data given in the                 130.121
                                                                           130.126
     adjacent table. Express the quantity as in eq(5) i.e.                 130.139
     R =R ±d                                                               130.148
                                                                           130.155
3.   What is the percentage error in Millikan’s experiment of              130.162
     the charge of the electron: e = (1.591± 0.002) x 10-19 C?             130.162
                                                                           130.169
4.   What is the error in the volume of a cube V=L3 if the
     error in L is 0.01m? If L is measured as L= 2 ± 0.01,
     express the value of V in a similar manner.
5.   A small steel ball-bearing rests on top of a horizontal table. The radius (R) of the ball
     is measured using a micrometer screw gauge (with vernier least count 0.05 mm) to
     be 2.15 mm. The height of the table is found using an ordinary meter scale to be 90
     cm. What is the height of the center of the steel ball from the floor (include the
     error)?.
6.   Let Q = x - y, where x= 100 ± 2 and y = 96 ± 2 .Calculate Q (express the result with
     the error included)
7.   Consider the quantity Q = x / y. If x = 50 ± 1 and y = 3 ± 0.2. Calculate Q (express
     the result with the error included)
8.   In an experiment involving diffraction of sodium light using a diffraction grating, the
     double lines are unresolved at first order and a single spectral line is seen at an angle
     of 130. If the least count of the vernier of the telescope is 1/, what will be the error in
     the calculated value of the grating constant d? (Principal maxima of a grating occurs
     at angles   such that d sin     = m . The wavelength separation between the sodium
                             0
     double slit lines is 6 A )
9    Consider an experiment to measure the gravitational acceleration ‘g’ by measuring
     the time period of a simple pendulum. What are the possible sources of systematic
     error in this experiment?
10. “If there are always errors in any measurement then there is nothing like the ‘true’
     value of any measured quantity “. Comment on this statement. In what sense then do
     you understand the values of ‘physical constants’ to be constants?




                                              11
References:
1.   “Practical physics”, G.L.Squires, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 1985.
2.   “Laboratory Experiments in College Physics”, C.H.Bernard and C.D. Epp, John-
     Wiley and Sons, Inc, New York, 1995.
3.   Cohen, E.R and Taylor, B.N, J. Phys. and Chem. Reference data ,vol 2, page
     663,1973




                                          12
Experiment 1

                            Error Analysis and Graph Drawing

Assignments:

1.      Experimental data (in arbitrary units) of some experiment is given below :

x     -10     4      10      16      20     35     40        32    40     45     53      60     65    70      80    85

y     -17     -20    -30     -17     -35    -2     -19       -3    -4     10     11      24     20    30      37    47

x     100     115    120     122     129    133    140       141   150    151    154     157    160   170     172   183

y     50      80     77      79      80     83     80        100   90     113    102     110    100   106     101   200

(a)     Assuming 10% of error in Y values, plot the data on preferred graph paper showing
        the errors in terms of error bars.

(b)     Calculate the slope and intercept of the best fit graph .Draw the best fit graph on the
        above graph.

2.      The expression of refractive index of a prism id given by the following relation:
                 A+D
             sin
                   2
            =                . Assuming the error of A and D as A and D, express the error of
              sin(A / 2)
           . Here ‘A’ is the angle of the prism and ‘D’ is the angle of deviation.

3.      The relation between two independent variables X and Y is given as the empirical
        expression Y = a X + b X3 .The experimental data for X and Y are given below :

X : 0.130           0.192    0.232        0.263    0.299      0.326      0.376   0.392        0.416   0.454
0.471 Y : 0.280             0.405    0.504        0.593      0.685       0.749   0.922        0.986   1.049
1.192        1.256 X : 0.492 0.533 0.541

Y : 1.332 1.51              1.531

        Rearrange the equation to plot the graph in simpler form. (Hint: Plot Y/X vs X2).
        (Why?) .Then find out the constants ‘a’ and ‘b’ from the graph .Try to co-relate the



                                                        13
expression with some practical experiment in physics and give your comments about
     the constants.

4.   Expression of some function is given by, Y=a X b, where ‘a’, ‘b’ are unknown .Use
     the following experimental data to find out the constants by plotting an appropriate
     graph of Y vs. X. Try to co-relate                    the above expression with some practical
     experiment in physics and give your comments about the constants.

X : 465     599          688          720         878        922      1025     1220    1311     1410
     1509

Y : 2589    7106      12132      15680        25090        40616     60142    117626 168086   222876
     287091




5.   The ionic conductivity of (C) of a crystal is given as a function of temperature (T) by
     the equation, C = C0 exp (+ E/kT) where k is Boltzmann constant. (T is in Kelvin
     and C is in CX107 cgs unit)

T     : 746        805         825          853     875       885      915      952   965     990

CX107 : 1.82       2.90        5.85     8.40        19.1      32.7     66.1     120   245     418

     Plot the experimental data on suitable graph paper and find out the value of C0 and
     E.




(Four graph papers required).




                                                        14
Experiment 2

                               Coupled Pendulum
Apparatus:
Two compound pendulums, coupling spring, convergent lens, filament bulb on stand,
screen on stand, stop clock.

Purpose of experiment:
To study normal modes of oscillation of two coupled pendulums and to measure the
normal mode frequencies.

Basic Methodology:
Two identical compound pendulums are coupled by means of spring .Normal mode
oscillations are excited and their frequencies are measured.

I.    Introduction:
I.1   The reason why the study of simple harmonic motion is important is the very general
      manner in which such a motion arises when we want the response of a system to
      small deviation from the equilibrium configuration .This happens for a wide variety
      of systems in Physics and Engineering.
      The response of a system to small deformations can usually be described in terms of
      individual oscillators making up the system. However, the oscillators will not have
      independent motion but are generally coupled to that of other oscillators. Think for
      example of vibrations in a solid. A solid can be thought of as being composed of a
      lattice of atoms connected to each other by springs. The motion of each individual
      atom is coupled to that of its neighboring atoms.
      The description of a system of coupled oscillators can be done in terms of its
      normal modes. In a coupled system the individual oscillators may have different
      natural frequencies. A normal mode motion of the system however will be one in
      which all the individual oscillators oscillate with the same frequency (called the
      normal mode frequency) and with definite phase relations between the individual
      motions. If a system has n degrees of freedom (i.e. has n coupled oscillators) then
      there will be n normal modes of the system. A general disturbance of the system can
      be described in terms of a superposition of normal mode vibrations. If a single
      oscillator is excited, then eventually the energy gets transferred to all the modes.


I.2   In this experiment we will study some of the above features in the simple case of
      two coupled compound pendulums. The system studied in the experiment consists
      of two identical rigid pendulums, A and B. A linear spring couples the oscillations
      of the two pendulums. A schematic diagram of the system is given in Figure 1.
      The motion of the two pendulums A and B can be modeled by the following
      coupled differential equations ( A and B are the angular displacements of A and B,
      and I being their moments of inertia)




                                            15
Fig 1


The equations of motion of the two physical pendulums are easily obtained. Let A
and B be the angular displacement, and xA and xB the linear displacements of the
two pendulums respectively .The compression of spring will be
               l
( x A − x B ) = .where l is the distance between the point of suspension and the point
               L
where the spring is attached and L is the length of the pendulum. The equation for
pendulum A thus will be
            d2 A                                            l
          I       = − m g LC M sin   A   − k ( x A − xB )     l cos   A   ------------------------
             dt 2                                           L
(1)
where the first term on the right hand side is the restoring torque due to gravity (LCM
being the distance between the point of suspension and the position of the center of
mass of pendulum A) while the second term that due to the spring force .Assuming
the mass attached to the pendulum A to be sufficiently heavy we can equate LCM
and L. We also consider small displacements A, so that sin A          A and cos A 1.
Substituting A = xA / L and using the above approximations, we obtain the
following equation of motion for linear displacement xA:
          d 2 xA    mgL                      l2
                 =−     x A − k ( x A − xB )                ----------------------------------------
           dt 2      I                        I
(2)
Like wise the equation for is
          d 2 xB    mgL                     l2
                 =−     xB − k ( x A − xB )                 ----------------------------------------
           dt 2      I                       I
(3)


                                         16
Equations (2) & (3) are coupled, i.e. the equation for xA involves xB and vice –
      versa. Without the coupling, i.e. in the absence of the spring, xA and xB would be
      independent oscillations with the natural frequency 0 = (m g L ) / I .


I.3   It is easy to find uncoupled equations describing the normal modes of the system.
      Define the variables
                            x1 = xA + xB              ; x2 = xA - xB ----------------------------------------(4)
      Adding and subtracting eqs(2) and (3) we obtain equations for the variables x1 and
      x2 as
                        d 2 x1    mgL
                            2
                               =−     x1                        ---------------------------------------------------- (5)
                         dt        I

                        d 2 x2    mgL        k l2
                               =−     x2 − 2      x 2 --------------------------------------------- (6)
                         dt 2      I          I
      Note that the equations for x1 and x2 are uncoupled .The variables x1 and x2 describe
      independent oscillations and are the two normal modes of the system .The general
      solution to these equations will be
      x1 (t ) = A1 cos(          1   t+   1   )       ;         x1 (t ) = A2 cos(      2   t+   2   ) ---------------------- (7)
      (A1, A2 being the amplitudes of the two modes and 1 and 2 arbitrary phases).The
      corresponding natural frequencies are the normal mode frequencies:

                                                          2k l2                     2k l2
       1=      0             ;            2=
                                                  2
                                                  0   +         =          0   1+                ------------------------- (8)
                                                           I                        mgL

                             mgL
      where         0   =        is the natural frequency of each uncoupled pendulum.
                              I
      It is instructive that to visualize the motion of the coupled system in these normal
      modes. If we excite only the first normal mode, i.e. x1(T) 0, but x2(t) = 0 at all
      times, the individual motions of pendulums A and B will be

      x A (t ) =
                   1
                     (x1 (t ) + x 2 (t ) ) = A1 cos ( 1t + ) = x B (t ) = 1 (x1 (t ) − x 2 (t ) ) ------------------ (9)
                   2                         2                            2
      Note that in this mode xA = xB .This describes a motion in which both pendulums
      move in phase with the same displacement and frequency                                        1.


      On other hand if the second mode id excited, i.e. x1(t) = 0 for all times and x2(t)                                           0
      the individual motions are


      x A (t ) =
                   1
                     (x1 (t ) + x2 (t ) ) = A1 cos(         2   t+     2   ) = − x B (t ) = −
                                                                                                1
                                                                                                  (x1 (t ) − x 2 ( t ) ) --------
                   2                        2                                                   2
      (10)




                                                                  17
In this mode the displacements of the pendulums are always opposite (x1(t) = - x2 (t)
     ). Their motions have the same amplitude and frequency (=                                            2)   but with a relative
     phase difference of            . Figure 2 shows the motions in the normal modes.




I.4. A general motion of the coupled pendulums will be be a superposition of the motions
     of the two normal modes:
                    1
       x A (t ) =     [A1 cos (         1   t+   1   ) + A2 cos(           2   t+   2   )]
                    2
                    1
       x B (t ) =     [A1 cos(      1   t+       1   ) − A2 cos(           2   t+   2   )] --------------------------------- (11)
                    2
     For a given initial condition the unknown constants (two amplitudes and two
     phases) can be solved. Consider the case where the pendulum A is lifted to a
     displacement A at t = 0 and released from rest while B remains at its equilibrium
     position at t = 0. The constants can be solved (see Exercise 4) to give the
     subsequent motions of the pendulums to be
                                −                             +
       x A (t ) = A cos     2           1
                                            t cos         2       1
                                                                       t
                                2                             2

                                −                            +
       x B (t ) = A sin     2           1
                                            t sin        2        1
                                                                      t                 ----------------------------------- (12)
                                2                            2
     The motions of the pendulums A and B exhibit a typical beat phenomenon. The
     motion can be understood as oscillations with a time period 4 / ( 2 + 1) and a
     sinusoid ally varying amplitude A(t) with the amplitude becoming zero with a period
     of 4 / ( 2- 1). As an example, Figure 3(a),3(b) show plots of x(t)=sin(2 t)sin(50 t)
     and x(t)=cos(2 t)cos(50 t) vs. t respectively.




                                                                      18
II.   Setup and Procedure:
1.    Uncouple the pendulums. Set small oscillations of both pendulums individually.
      Note the time for 20 oscillations and hence obtain the average time period for free
      oscillations of the pendulums and the natural frequency 0.
2.    Couple the pendulums by hooking the spring at some position to the vertical rods of
      the pendulums. Ensure that the spring is horizontal and is neither extended nor
      hanging loose to begin with.
3.    Switch on the bulb and observe the spot at the centre of the screen.
4.    Excite the first normal mode by displacing both pendulums by the same amount in
      the same direction. Release both pendulums from rest. The spot on the screen should
      oscillate in the horizontal direction.
5.    Note down the time for 20 oscillations and hence infer the time period T, and
      frequency 1 of the first normal mode.
6.    With the spring at the same position excite the second normal mode of oscillation by
      displacing both pendulums in the opposite directions by the same amount and then
      releasing them from rest.
7.    The spot on the screen should oscillate in the vertical direction. Note down the time
      for 20 oscillations and hence infer the time period T2 and frequency 2 .
8.    Repeat these measurements for the spring hooked at 3 more positions on the vertical
      rods of the pendulums.
      (Part
      B)
9.    For any one position of the spring (already chosen in Part A), now displace any one
      pendulum by a small amount and (with the other pendulum at its equilibrium
      position) release it from rest. Observe the subsequent motion of the pendulums. Try
      to qualitatively correlate the motion with the graph shown in Fig. 3. Measure the
      time period T of individual oscillations of the pendulum A and also the time period
        T between the times when A comes to a total stop. Repeat these measurements
      three times for accuracy. Infer the time periods T1, and T2 of the normal modes from
      T and T and compare with earlier results.

      (Note: Your measurements will be more accurate only if you choose t somewhat
      smaller than the total length L, i.e. choose a position of the coupling spring which
      is intermediate in position).



                                            19
III.   Exercises and Viva Questions

       1.   What are normal modes of a system? How many normal modes will a system
            posses?
       2.   Infer the normal mode frequencies for the coupled pendulum by directly
            considering the motion in the two modes as shown in fig 2.
       3.   Qualitatively explain why the first normal mode frequency is independent of
            the position of the spring while the second normal mode frequency increases
            with l, the distance of the spring from the point of support.
       4.   For the cases where pendulum A is lifted and released from rest derive
            unknown constants A1, A2 , 1 , 2 in equation (11) to obtain the solution
            equation (12).
       5.   Explain the effect of damping on the motion. Redraw figure 3 qualitatively if
            damping is present.
       6.   List all the approximations made in the theory of the double pendulum treated
            in the theory as against the actual apparatus used and estimate the error
            introduced. Also, consider possible sources of random errors while conducting
            the experiment.
       7.   Explain why the spot on the screen moves the way it does, i.e. horizontally
            when the 1st normal mode is excited and vertically when the 2nd normal mode
            is excited.
       8.   Describe and explain the motion of the spot on the screen when only pendulum
            is displaced.
       9.   In part B, derive the expressions for the normal modes 1 and 2 from the T
            and T .What is the reason that the procedure asks you to choose a value of l
            small compared to L for better accuracy?
       10. Give some more examples of coupled oscillations from Physics or Engineering
           systems.
References
       1.   “Vibrations and Waves”, A.P .French, Arnold-Heinemann, New Delhi, 1972.
       2.   “The elements of Physics”, I.S.Grant and W.R.Phillips ,Oxford University
            Press, Oxford




                                            20
Coupled Pendulums
                                     Observations and Results

Position of                     Mode 1                                                                           Mode 2
spring from
pivot
               Time(sec)       Period T1              Angular                            Time(sec)              Period T2        Angular
l (cm)                                                frequency                                                                  frequency
               (for      20      (sec)                                                   (for      20            (sec)
               oscillations)                           1 (sec
                                                                     -1
                                                                          )              oscillations)                               2 (sec
                                                                                                                                              -1
                                                                                                                                                   )




                               Table of Observations for Part B
Position of spring l = __________________ cm (Note that this has to be one of the values
                                                                              Chosen in PART A)
         Time period    Time             Average                    Average                  Angular                     Angular
S.No     between        period                                                               frequency                   frequency
         successive     between            T                                 T
         oscillations   successive       (sec)                       (sec)                                      1 1                     1 1
                                                                                                         =2      −              =2       +
                        stops                                                                        1
                                                                                                                T ∆T
                                                                                                                            2
                                                                                                                                        T ∆T
         T (sec)
                           T (sec)
1

2

3

Calculations and Graph
                                              2            2                         2           2
1.     On the same graph paper plot       1       /    0        and              2       /   0       vs. l2 .
                                                           2             2
2.     Obtain the slope of the graph of                1        /    0           vs. l2 and hence obtain the spring
       constant k of the coupling spring
Slope = 2 k / (mgL) = _____________________
Spring constant k = _______________________dynes / cm
Conclusions:


(One graph paper required).

                                                               21
Experiment 3

                 Study of Small Oscillations using a Bar Pendulum

Apparatus:
A bar pendulum with holes for hanging, Wall support for hanging, stop clock, meter scale,
knife edge for measuring the center of mass of the bar.

Purpose of experiment:

To measure the acceleration due to gravity (g) by small oscillations of a bar pendulum.

Theory

The period of oscillations T of a body constrained to rotate about a horizontal
axis for small amplitudes is given by the expression
                      1
               I 2
   T = 2π                                                                   (1)
             mgd
where m is mass of the body , d is the distance between center of mass (CM) and the axis
of rotation and I is the moment of inertia ( MI) about the axis of rotation given by (from
parallel axis theorem)
 I = I 0 + md 2                                                             (2)
where, Io is the moment of inertia about parallel axis through center of mass .
If k is the radius of gyration ( i.e. I 0= mk2 ). Then from eqs (1) and (2)

         4π 2 2
T 2d =
          g
             (k + d 2 )                        (3)


By recording the period of oscillations T as a
function d we can determine the values of
gravitational acceleration g as well as moment of
inertia Io of the body . The plot of T Vs d , shows
a minimum time period at d= K ,given by
                  1
            2k    2
Tmin   = 2π                            (4)
             g


Experimental Set-Up

In this experiment the rigid body consists of a
rectangular mild steel bar with a series of holes
drilled at regular interval to facilitate the suspension at various points along its length (see
Fig.1). The steel bar can be made to rest on screw type knife-edge fixed on the wall to
ensure the oscillations in a vertical plane freely. The oscillations can be monitored
accurately using a telescope. The radius of gyration for this bar is


                                               22
l 2 + b2
k2 =                                                                      (5)
        12
where l & b are the length & breath of the bar respectively.

Experimental Procedure:

1. Determine the center of mass (CM) by balancing the bar on a knife-edge.
Measurement of d is made from this point to the point of suspension for each hole.

2. Suspend the bar by means of knife-edge.

3. Focus the telescope on to the marker marked on the pendulum. There should not be
any parallax between the image of the marker and the cross wire in the eyepiece of the
telescope.

4. Measure the time for 10 to 20 oscillations for different d (only on one side of CM).
Repeat each observation several times.

Plot T Vs d. Calculate k and g from this graph.

Plot T2d Vs d2. Using linear regression technique fit the data and determines k and g from
it.

Estimate maximum possible error in g.




                                             23
Experiment 3

                                             Bar Pendulum

                                  Observations and Results
Least count of the measuring scale used = ………………….
Least count of the stop watch used = ………………….

Table I

S. No.     Distance from   No.          of    Time period      Time period (T)     T2d   d2
           CM of axis      oscillations       for          n   for 1 oscillation
           (d) in cm       (n)                oscillations     (Tn/n)
                                              (Tn)
1 (i)
   (ii)
   (iii)
2 (i)
   (ii)
  (iii)
3


4


5


6


7


8


9




Calculation:

Tmin from the graph =….at d=……

At Tmin , d=k=…


                                                     24
2k
Tmin=2π       , so, g =…….
            g

From the plot of T2d vs. d2 , find the slope and intercept from linear regression.

From the Slope (4π2/g) , g can be calculated and from the intercept [(4π2/g)k2], k can be
calculated.

                                                   1/ 2
                                        l 2 + b2
k can be calculated using the formula               and compared with the value derived
                                           12
from the graph. Why are the two k values different?


Results:

‘g’ value from T vs. d plot is ……
‘g’ value from T2d vs. d2 plot is …….
Average value of ‘g’ = …..


(Two graph papers required).

References:
1. Haliday, Resnick and Walker, “Fundamentals of Physics”, 6th Ed. (John Wiley,
   Singapore, 2001), Chap. 16.




                                             25
Experiment No. 4

                        Rotational Inertia of a Rigid Body

Apparatus

Torsional pendulum, support for hanging the pendulum, regular circular body, irregular
body, stop clock.


Objective:

To measure the rotational inertia of an object by dynamic method.


Theory

The equation of motion for small undamped rotational oscillations is

    d 2θ
I        + Cθ = 0                       (1)
    dt 2


Where I is the rotational inertia of the body about the chosen axis, is the angular
displacement and C is the restoring (controlling) torque per unit angular displacement.
This controlling torque is provided by the elastic rigidity of the wire with which the rigid
                                                                                   π r4
body is suspended. For a wire of radius r, length l and rigidity modulus G, C = G
                                                                                    2l
(2)


Equation (1) represents a simple harmonic motion with angular frequency ω given by


        C
ω=
        I


And time period of oscillations


            I
T = 2π                                  (3)
            C


 In this experiment the time period ( TO ) of the bare
oscillating system is measured first and then with a
regular body added to it. Since the rational inertia of
regular body can be calculated from its dimensions and


                                              26
mass, we could use equation (3) in the two cases as follows :


For the bare system


           I0
T0 = 2π                                 (4)
           C


 Where I0 is the moment of inertia of the bare system. With the regular body added, the
time period would become


           I0 + K
T1 = 2π                                    (5)
              C


Where K is the rotational inertia of the regular body.


One can solve equations (4) and (5) to get I0 and C using the two measured time periods
T0 and Tl


If the given irregular body replaces the regular body then equation (5) gets modified to


            I0 + X
 TX = 2π                                                                           (6)
               C


Where X is the rotational inertia of the irregular rigid body . Since I and C are known, X
can be calculated from equation (6).


Experimental Procedure


1. First ensure that the plate of the oscillating system is horizontal. You may have to
adjust the leveling ring for this purpose.


2. Measure the frequency of oscillations of the system by timing about 30 oscillations
or so. You may repeat the measurements a number of times to get a good mean value for
the time period T0. Formulae used are applicable only for small oscillations.


3.    Place the regular body at the center of the plate and measure the frequency of
     oscillations again, by timing the number of oscillations as before for measuring the
     time period Tl.



                                              27
4.    Replace the regular body by the given object (irregular body) and measure the time
      period of oscillation Tx..


                                     Observation Table


 S.       System          Number of        Time for 30      Time         Average
 NO                       oscillations     oscillations     Period       Time period
                                           (sec)            (sec)

                                                                         (sec)


 1.       Bare system     (Repeat                                        T0 =
                          several times)


 2.       With            (Repeat                                        T1=
          Reg.body        Several times)


 3.       With Irreg.     (Repeat                                        TX=
          body            Several times)




Reference: Haliday, Resnick and Walker, “Fundamentals of Physics”, 6th Ed. (John Wiley,
Singapore, 2001), Chap. 11.




                                              28
Experiment 5
                                           Velocity of sound

Apparatus:
Audio frequency generator, speaker, microphone, Cathode Ray Oscilloscope (CRO),
meter scale, large board (or wall), Thermometer (0-1000C)

Purpose of experiment:
i)    To determine the Velocity of Sound
ii)   To understand the operation of a CRO
Basic methodology:
Sound waves produced by an audio frequency generator are made to reflect off a large
reflecting board forming standing waves. A microphone connected to a CRO serves to
measure the amplitude of the sound. The wavelength of sound waves is obtained from the
positions of the nodes.


I.    Introduction:
I.1. Standing waves are produced when two progressive sinusoidal waves of the same
     amplitude and wavelength interfere with each other. Consider two traveling waves
     traveling along the positive and negative x directions respectively
                                    y1 ( x , t ) = A sin ( kx − ω t )            ------------------------- (1)
                                   y 2 ( x , t ) = A sin (kx + ω t )                ------------------------- (2)
      where A is the amplitude of the waves, k = 2                        is the wave number and = 2 f
      is the angular frequency. The quantity y(x,t) is the displacement of the medium at
      the point x and time t. When the two waves are made to interfere then by the
      principle of superposition, the net displacement is the sum of the individual
      displacements. Thus,
                      y( x , t ) = y1 ( x , t ) + y 2 ( x , t ) = A sin (kx − ω t ) + A sin(kx + ω t )
                          y( x , t ) = (2 A sin kx ) cos ω t            --------------------------------- (3)
      The resulting displacement, eq(3) , represents a wave of frequency , and an
      amplitude, 2Asin kx , which varies with the position x. The amplitude is zero for
      values of kx that gives sin kx = 0 . These values are
                                   kx = n for n =0,1,2,3…………
      Now k =2        / . Therefore,
                                 nπ
                            x=      , n = 0,1,2,3.........                       ----------------------- (4)
                                  2
      represents the positions of zero amplitude .These points are called nodes .Note that
                                               λ
      adjacent nodes are separated by              , half   of a wavelength.
                                               2



                                                        29
The amplitude of the standing wave has a maximum value of 2A, which occurs for
      values of ‘kx’ that give sin kx = 0 . These values are

                                   1
                          kx = (n + )π , n = 0,1,2,3..........         ------------------------ (5)
                                   2

      The positions of maximum amplitude are called antinodes of the standing wave.The
                                   λ
      antinodes are separated by      and are located half way between pairs of nodes. Now,
                                   2
      a sound wave is a longitudinal wave representing displacement of particles in the
      medium and the resulting pressure variations. Traveling sound waves can also be
      taken to be represented by eqs. (1) and (2) with y(x,t) denoting the longitudinal
      displacements of air particles. The velocity of the sound wave will be given by

                              v=       /k=f                 ---------------------------------- (6)
      In this experiment standing waves of sound are formed in air. The distance between
      successive nodes or antinodes is /2. By measuring the distance between the nodes,
      the wavelength can be determined and hence the velocity v of sound (knowing the
      frequency f). The apparatus of the experiment includes a cathode ray oscilloscope
      (CRO). One of the aims of the experiments is to provide a familiarity with the use of
      a CRO. The main features and controls of a CRO are described in the appendix to
      this experiment.

II.   Setup and Procedure

      Fig 1 shows the basic setup of the apparatus.




      PART A
      Connect the audio frequency generator to the loudspeaker (L) and adjust the controls
      of the generator so that the speaker produces a sound signal in the frequency range I
      - 10 kHz. Place the loud speaker facing a large board B (or a wall) at a distance of
      about one meter.
      Connect the small microphone (M) mounted on the bench. Connect the signal from
      the microphone to the y-channel of the CRT.
      Select a proper scale for the horizontal time base to observe a stationary sinusoidal
      trace on the screen of the CRT. Adjust the vertical and horizontal positions so that
      the trace is symmetrically positioned on the screen. Observe that the amplitude of

                                                30
the trace changes as the position of the microphone is varied along the bench.
     Measure the period of signal by reading the number of horizontal divisions
     separating the minima of the signal on the CRO screen. From the chosen scale for
     the time base determine the time interval between successive minima of the trace
     and hence calculate the frequency of the signal and compare with the frequency
     generated by the audio generator.
     Next place the microphone close to the wall and move it away from the wall. Note
     down the positions of the nodes, i.e. where the amplitude of signal on the CRT
     screen becomes minimum. Note down the positions of at least five successive
     nodes. Repeat this measurement for three different frequencies.
     PART A
     Set the Trigger source for the oscilloscope to external Trigger. Connect the output of
     the speaker to the X input of the scope.
     Observe the Lissajous pattern produced on the screen. Move the microphone along
     the bench and observe different Lissajous patterns. Sketch the observed patterns for
     the cases when the phase difference between X and Y signal are 00, 900, 1800, 2700.
     (Note: due to small amplitude of the signals the observed pattern may be small in
     size. Also due to attenuation of the reflected signals there can be distortion of the
     pattern).
     Select (say) the straight-line pattern for O' or 180' phase difference. Starting from
     the position nearest to the loudspeaker move the microphone outwards towards the
     wall and note the positions of where the selected pattern repeats. The distance
     between two successive such positions corresponds to the wavelength of the sound
     wave.
     Precautions:
     1.         The microphone should be moved along the axis of the loudspeaker.
     2.         It is advisable to measure the position of nodes rather than antinodes
     3.         To lower error in the velocity determination the position of the nodes should be
                accurately determined.
     4.         The intensity of the CRO spot / pattern should be set LOW especially when the
                spot is stationary to avoid damage to the fluorescent screen
     5.          Learn the functions of the various control knobs of the CRO before operating
          the
                CRO.
III. Exercises and Viva Questions:
     1.         What is a traveling wave? Write down equations representing waves traveling
                along +ve and -ve x directions.
     2.         What is a standing wave? Explain by superposing appropriate traveling waves.
     3.         What are nodes and antinodes? Draw a rough diagram depicting the standing
                wave formed in the experiment. Is the point at the reflection board a node or
                an antinode?
     4.         On what factors does the velocity of sound depend? What is the effect of
                temperature, pressure and humidity on the velocity of sound?

                                                 31
5.     What are Lissajous figures? Explain by construction how Lissajous patterns are
            produced when two perpendicular oscillations of phase differences O0, 900,
            1800, 2700 are superposed.
     6.      List the different sub-systems of a CRO and explain their operation and
             function.
     7.      Explain how a CRO can be used for voltage, frequency and phase
             measurements? How can a CRO be used for current measurement?
     8.      A periodic signal of 400Hz is to be displayed so that 4 complete cycles appear
             on the oscilloscope screen, which has 10 horizontal divisions. To what settings
             should the Trigger source and sweep Time / div be set to allow this pattern to
             be displayed?
     9.      Explain what triggering, internal and external triggering mean.
     10. List the possible sources of error in this experiment and quantitatively estimate


     References:

1.        “Fundamentals of Physics”, D.Halliday, R.Resnick and J.Walker,
          6th edition, John-Wiley & sons, New York.
2.   “Physics”, M.Alonso and E.J.Finn, Addison-Wiley, 1942.




                                              32
Appendix: Cathode Ray Oscilloscope (CRO)

A cathode ray oscilloscope (CRO) is a convenient and versatile instrument to display and
measure analog electrical signals. The basic unit of a CRO is a cathode ray tube (CRT).
The CRO displays the signal as a voltage variation versus time graph on the CRT screen.
By properly interpreting the characteristics of the display the CRT can also be used to
indicate current, time, frequency and phase difference.
The basic subsystems of CRO are:
     1.   Display subsystem (CRT,)
     2.   Vertical deflection subsystem
     3.   Horizontal deflection subsystem
     4.   Power Supplies
     5.   Calibration circuits
Fig.1 shows a schematic diagram block diagram of how the subsystems are interconnected
to produce the observed signal.




                                       Fig. 1
The Signal is sensed at its source by the oscilloscope probe. The signal voltage is then
transmitted to the oscilloscope along a coaxial cable and fed to the vertical display
subsystem. After suitable amplification, the input signal is applied to the vertical
deflection plates of the CRT. This causes the electrons emitted by the electron gun in the
CRT to deflect vertically in proportion to the amplitude of input voltage.
There is a simultaneous deflection of the electron produced by the horizontal deflection
subsystem. The amplified input signal is also fed to the horizontal deflection subsystem.
In order to produce a Y-t display a voltage that causes the horizontal position of the beam
to be proportional to time must be applied to the


                                            33
horizontal deflection plates. The horizontal voltage called the sweep waveform is
generally of a saw tooth form. Fig. 3 shows has the time variation of the input signal is
displayed with help of the sweep waveform.
The synchronization of the input signal with the sweep wave form is carried out by the
time base circuitry. A triggering signal (which could be the input signal or an external
signal) is fed to a pulse generator. The emitted pulses are fed to a sweep generator, which
produces a series of sweep waveforms.
Controls on the CRO front panel:
A. General
Intensity: Controls the intensity of the spot on the screen by controlling the number of
electrons allowed to pass to the screen
Focus: Controls the focusing of the electron beam.
X Shift / Y Shift: Changes the deflection voltages by a constant amount to shift the signal
vertically or horizontally.
B. Vertical Deflections Subsystem
 Vertical sensitivity: Amplifier for the vertical deflection subsystem calibrated in ten-ns of
sensitivity. The input voltage can be determined from the deflection of the signal. For eg.,
if the vertical sensitivity is set at 50 mV/div and the vertical deflection is 4 div, then the
input voltage is 50 x 4 = 200 mV.
Var (Vldir): Vernier control for continuous vertical sensitivity.




                                             34
C.    Horizontal Deflection Subsystem
Sweep Time (Time/dir):
Controls the sweep time for the spot to move horizontally across one division of the screen
when the triggered sweep mode is used.
Var (Time/div):
Vernier control for continuous change of sweep time.
Trigger:
Selects the source of the trigger signal, which produces the sweep waveform.
Internal Trigger:
The output of the vertical amplifier is used to trigger the sweep waveform.
External Trigger:
An external signal must be applied to the X inputs to trigger the sweep waveform.
Sweep Magnifier:
Decreases the time per division of the sweep waveform.
Trigger Level:
Selects amplitude point on trigger signal that causes sweep to start.
Trigger Mod:
AUTO provides normal triggering and provides baseline in absence of trigger signal.
NORM
permits normal triggering but no sweep in absence of triggering. TV provides triggering
on TV field or TV line.
References:
     1. “Student Reference Manual for Electronic Instrumentation”, S.E.Wolf and
        R.F.M.Smith, PHI, New Delhi, 1990.
     2. “Basic Electronic Instrument Handbook”, C.F.Coombs, Mc Graw Hill Book Co.,
        1972.




                                             35
Observations and Results

PART A

1.   Room Temperature               = _________________________0C

2.   Frequency of Audio signal      = _________________________

3.   Time/div scale setting         = _________________________

4.   Calculated frequency from CRO screen = _________________



                                    Table 1 : Position of Nodes

 S.No Position of microphone at nodes(cm)           Distance between successive nodes for the
                                                    following frequencies(in cm)
                  Frequency

       f1=______kHz f2=_____kHz f3=_____kHz f1=______kHz f1=______kHz f1=______kHz

 1

 2

 3

 4

 5



Calculations:



                                       f1 = ____ kHz     f2 = _____kHz    f3 = _______kHz


     Average /2 (cm)


     Average    (cm)


     Velocity of Sound , v = f




                                            36
Results:

The velocity of sound in air at room temperature __________0 C is

v = _________________________________ m/ sec.

Estimate the error in your determination of velocity of sound:

VEmp (T) = V0 T ; V0 =                      at 200 or NTP

                 ∆V
Then calculate
                 VEMP

∆V = VEMP ~ Vtmp



PART B

1.   Sketch Lissajous pattern observed on the CRO screen for the phase differences of 00,
     900, 1800, 2700 between X and Y signals.




                                            37
Table 2

Frequency of audio signal = ………………………………………….
Phase difference for pattern selected = ……………………………….

S. No.    Position of microphone       Difference between successive position λ (cm)
1
2
3
4
5

Average λ= ______________________________ cm

Result:

The velocity of sound v=f λ = ____________________________ m/s

Do error analysis same as in part A.




                                              38
Experiment 6

            Radiation from a Black Body: Stefan-Boltzmann Law

Apparatus

Blackened hemisphere (metal), heating coil, blackened silver disk, thermocouple, power
supply, stop clock etc.


Objective
To determine the Stefan–Boltzmann constant        by studying the radiation received from a
black body radiator.

Theory

The total radiation from black body is given by Stefan-Boltzmann relation

         R = σT 4      (per cm2 per sec)             ……………….                (1)

where R is the radiant energy per unit area per unit time and T is the absolute temperature
of the body. This relation was empirically deduced by Josef Stefan from the experimental
results of John Tyndall and was derived by Ludwig Boltzmann from theoretical
considerations based on thermodynamics.

Consider a black body radiator at temperature T1 and a metal disc at temperature T2 as
the receiver of the radiation (fig 1.). If R1 and R2 be the radiation absorbed and emitted by
the receiving metal disc respectively, then the energy gained per second by the disc is (R1-
R2 )A ; where A is the area of cross-section of the disc. If m and s are the mass and
specific heat of the disc, then

     dT2 (R1 − R2 )       σA 4
 ms
      dt
         =
                J
                      A=
                           J
                             (T1 − T24 )
             Jms      dT2
     σ=                                                      (2)
          A(T1 − T2 ) dt
              4    4


where dT2/dt is the rate of change of temperature of the disc. J=Joules’ equivalent
(4.2×107 ergs/calorie).

Experimental Setup

The experimental Setup
(Fig.1) consists of a
blackened          hollow
hemisphere which could be
heated to a uniform
temperature (T1)        by
passing electric current
through a nichrome heating
element wounded over it.

                                             39
The black body could be maintained at any desired constant temperature up to about 2000
C by passing appropriate current through heating coil. A copper–constantan thermocouple
1 connected to outer surface of B is used to ensure that temperature of the body is constant
before starting the experiment. A blackened silver disc S serving as the receiver is inserted
into the hole in B. The thermocouple 2 connected to the disc is used to measure its
temperature.

Procedure:

1. Heat B to a uniform temperature (usually heating will be started before you come to
the lab). Ensure that the temperature of the black body is constant by monitoring the
thermo emf developed by thermocouple 1 for few minutes (ignore small fluctuations in
micro voltmeter display).

2. Insert a thermometer through the hole provided for the disc S carefully and measure
the temperature T1 of the black body.

3. Replace thermometer with the silver disc carefully and mount it properly (make sure
that disc is at room temperature before inserting).

4. Record the thermo emf of thermocouple 2 developed as a function of time (say at 10
sec interval).

5. Note down the mass
and diameter of the
disc.

6. Convert the thermo
e.m.f. to temperature
(T2) by using the
calibration chart for it
(will be supplied to
you).

7. Plot T2 as function of time, obtain dT2/dt from the data and calculate the value of σ.

(Specific heat of the silver disc at room temperature s= 0.235Jg-1K-1 )



Observations:

       Mass of the disc:

       Diameter of the disc:

       Temperature of the black body (T1)= …

       Temperature of the disc (T2)=….




                                             40
Table for recording thermo e.m.f. as a function of time:

Sl. No.     Time (sec)     Thermo e.m.f. (mv)      Temperature (K)

1           10

2           20

3           30

4           40

5           50

6           60

7           70

…           80

…           90

…           ….

Plot T vs. time and find the slope and use eqn. (2) to calculate σ.

Result:

Measured value of σ = …….



(Two graph papers required).

References:
        1. M. W. Zemansky and R. H. Dittman, “Heat and Thermodynamics, an
            intermediate textbook” (MGH, 6th ed, 1981), Chap. 4.
         2. B. L. Worshnop and H. T. Flint, “Advanced Practical Physics for Students”
                                 (Khosla Publishing House, 1991).




                                              41
Experiment 7

                               Melting point of Solids
Apparatus
Electric oven/heater, glass tube, thermometer, thermistor, voltmeter, unknown solid for
which melting point is to be found out.
Objective
To calibrate a thermistor using a thermometer and using the calibrated thermistor as
temperature sensor find the melting point of a given chemical compound.

Theory:

 Thermistors (the name originated from thermal resistors) are basically semiconductor
devices with a characteristic negative temperature co-efficient of resistance. The
temperature dependent resistance of the thermistor is exploited in its application as a
temperature sensor. The sensitivity (>6% change in resistance per 0C rise in temperature)
and its rugged construction made it suitable for precision temperature measurement in the
temperature range –100°C to 300°C. Since thermistors are made up of a mixture of
metallic oxides such as Mn,Ni,Co,Fe,U etc., their resistance could be tailored between 0.5
Ω to 75 MΩ. They can also be made in varying sizes(beads as small as 0.15mm dia.) and
shapes. Thermally cycled thermistors give an extremely reproducible and reliable
resistance value over the specified dependence of the resistance of a typical thermistor.

Melting point of a solid:
In a solid, the relative distance between two atoms is fixed and atoms occupy equilibrium
positions. These atoms oscillate about their equilibrium positions. When the substance is
heated, the energy is partially used to increase the amplitude of atomic oscillations. This
results in thermal expansion of solid.

At sufficiently high temperature the solid melts, i.e. the atoms leave their equilibrium
position overcoming the binding energy and wander great distances through the resulting
liquid. However, even just below the melting point the atoms are in the vicinity of their
equilibrium positions. Hence substance must be supplied an extra energy required for
melting process. This extra energy is called latent heat. If energy is supplied at uniform
rate, the sample remains steady at melting temperature until it absorbs the latent energy.
The typical plot of temperature variations of a solid across its melting point, with time is
shown in fig.1.

                                                                                   DVM




                       Melting point




              Fig. 1                                    Fig. 2

                                            42
Experimental Set up:

An electrical oven has been designed for this experiment. A heating element is wound a
thin hard glass test tube. This test tube is thermally insulated from outer wall of the oven.
This oven can heat the substances up to 110°C by passing appropriate amount of current.
The thermistor resistance is measured using a Digital voltmeter (DVM). The schematic of
the setup is shown in Fig. 2.

Procedure:
The thermistor and the thermometer put together in the oven and heat the oven by passing
appropriate current through it. Measure the resistance of the thermistor from room
temperature to about 80°C. Plot the graph for resistance Vs temperature.(Switch off the
power supply immediately just after taking the readings). Now take the supplied chemical
in a test tube with the thermistor and put it inside the oven (Make sure that initially inside
of the oven is around the room temperature). Heat the oven and measure the resistance of
the thermistor in a regular time interval beyond the melting point(as you know during
melting resistance of the thermistor will be remain almost constant)

Analysis:
Plot the resistance Versus time. Calculate the melting point of the given sample using the
characteristics shown in fig. 1.

Observations:

Calibration of thermistor :

S. No.   Temperature (oC)     Resistance (Ω)
1        RT (25)
2        30
3        35
4        40
5        45
6        50
7        55
…        …
….       …
….       …


S. No.   Time (sec)           Resistance (Ω)
1        0
2        10
3        20
4        30
5        40
6        50
7        60
…        …
….       …
….       …




                                               43
Analysis:
Plot two graphs and find the melting point (temperature) from the flat region of the 2nd
graph graph.

Results:
       Melting point of the given solid is = …… oC



                              (Two graph papers required).




                                             44
Experiment 8

                                 e
          Measurement of           by Thomson’s bar magnet method
                                 m
Apparatus:
Cathode ray tube (CRT) with power supply unit, one pair of bar magnets, high resistance
voltmeter, magnetometer, and stopwatch.

Purpose of the experiment:
                                                          e
To measure the specific charge, i.e. charge to mass            ratio, of an electron using
                                                          m
Thomson’s bar magnet method.

Basic Methodology:
Electrons in a CRT are deflected in the vertical direction by applying a potential between
the vertical deflection plates of the CRT. A magnetic field perpendicular to the deflecting
electric field is produced using a pair of the bar magnets. The position of the magnets is
adjusted so as to cancel the deflection of the electrons. The knowledge of the deflecting
potential and the magnetic field of the bar magnets leads to a calculation of the specific
charge.

I.   Introduction

We have learnt that the electron has a negative charge whose magnitude e equals
1.6x10-19 Coulomb and mass (m) equal to 9.1 x 10-31 Kg. Millikan's Oil Drop method
enables us to measure the electron charge but the mass of the electron can not be
measured directly. It is calculated by measuring the value of e/m. The aim of this
experiment is to determine value of e/m by Thomson's method. This involves the motion
of an electron in a cathode ray tube (CRT).
A simplified form of a cathode ray tube is shown in Fig. 1. The electrons are emitted
from the cathode and accelerated towards the anode by an electric field. A hole in the
accelerating anode allows the electrons to pass out of the electron gun and between the
two sets of deflection plates. The metallic coating inside the tube shields the right end
free of external electric fields and conducts away the electrons after they strike the
fluorescent screen where they form a luminous spot.




                                            45
I.2   This experiment can be divided into the following parts:
      1.   The electric field (E) is applied alone. This produces a deflection of the
           electron beam.
      2.   A magnetic field is simultaneously applied along the electric field so that the
           deflection produced by the electric field is exactly counter-balanced by that
           produced by the magnetic field. As a result the spot made by the electron on
           the fluorescent screen returns back to the central position.




                                                                                      Fig. 2


      Let us consider an electron moving in the direction of magnetic meridian (say X-
      axis) with the velocity v0 m/s after passing through the accelerating anode. Under the
      action of the electrostatic field E = V/s ( s being the vertical distance between the
      plates VV/ and V the deflecting voltage)each electron ,as it passes between the plates
      , is acted upon by a perpendicular force eE. As a result the electron moves along a
      parabolic path AB(fig 2).The equation of motion is
                    d2 y
                 m        = eE                            -------------------------------- (1)
                    dt 2
      which, upon integrating once with respect to time, gives
                          dy       eE
                      v0       =        t                ------------------------------------ (2)
                          dt       m
      where v0 = dx / dt is the constant horizontal velocity .Here we also used the initial
      condition dy/dx = 0 at point A time t=0. At any point distant x(=v0 t) from point A in
      the field between the plates VV/, eq(2) gives
                        dy   eE
                           =   2
                                       x                 ------------------------------------- (3)
                        d x m v0
      On leaving the electrostatic field at point B (i.e. x=a), the electron moves along the
      tangential path BC with it’s velocity making an angle with the horizontal. Clearly,
                                      dy                eE
                  tan α = tan FBC =                   =    2
                                                             a ------------------------- (4)
                                      d x at po int B   m v0
                                    = Tangent to the curve AB at point B
      The electron finally strikes the screen at the point C (fig 2). The total vertical
      deflection of the electron
                          y = CF + FO/
      Now
                                                   eEa L
                     CF = BF Tan = L Tan =             2
                                                              --------------------------- (5)
                                                    m v0
      On the other hand, by eq (3), we have
                               eEx         eEa2
                       BD =        2
                                      dx =       2
                                                         ------------------------------- (6)
                               m v0        2 m v0

                                               46
Therefore the total displacement (y) in the spot position on the screen S due to the
      application of electric field between the plates VV/ is
                       y = CF + FO/ = CF + BD
                                    eEa a
                              y=       2
                                           +L          ----------------------------------- (7)
                                    m v0 2
      Thus
                                   2
                         e       v0 y
                           =                            ------------------------------------ (8)
                        m          a
                             Ea +L
                                   2
      Hence, if the velocity of electron along the X-axis (v0) is known, the value of (e/m)
      can be calculated.

I.3   Let B be the magnetic field produced by the two bar magnets placed symmetrically
      on either side of the cathode ray tube at a distance d from it. The magnetic field of
      the bar magnets will be in the east- west direction. The magnetic force in the electron
                         (     )
      is given by F = − e v × B . This step up a force Bev0 on the moving electron along
      the Y-direction. As a result, the electrons path becomes circular, with radius of
      curvature r given by
                                     2
                                  m v0
                                       = B e v0      -------------------------------------- (9)
                                   r
      When the force on the electron beam due to crossed electric field and magnetic field
      is equal and opposite, the electron beam will be un deflected.

      For this we require
                                                      E
                               e E = ev 0 B   or    v0 =
                                                      B
      The above analysis assumes that the magnetic field B is uniform. However the
      magnetic field produced by the bar magnet is non-uniform. Fig.3 shows the
      arrangement of the magnets with respect to the CRT.




                                   Fig.3

      Note that the CRT is aligned along the magnetic meridian, i.e. S-N direction, which
      is the direction along which the horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic field,
      BE acts. Since BE and the electron velocity are parallel, there is no deflection
      produced by the earth’s magnetic field.
      The magnetic field produced by the bar magnet along the path of the electrons will
      be a function B(x) of the position of the element and will act in the EW direction as
      shown in fig 3. The deflection, y, due to the magnetic force will be in the negative y-
      direction. To calculate the total deflection of the electron as it moves from A (anode

                                              47
aperture) to S (screen) we proceed as follows.

     The radius of curvature r of the electron path y(x) in the presence of the magnetic
     field is related to the curvature of the path as
                    1 d2 y
                      =
                    r d x2
     Of course, the radius of curvature will also change with position since the magnetic
     field changes, i.e.
                                         m v0
                            r = r(x) =                 by eq .(9).
                                        e B(x)
     Thus,
                            d2 y     e B( x )
                               2
                                   =                        -------------------------------- (10)
                           dx        m v0
     which upon integrating gives,
                                          e B( x )
                              y(x) =               dx dx
                                           m v0
     The net displacement y at the position of the screen (i.e. x = L0 = L-a) is then
                                 L0   x
                                        e B( x )          eI
                           y=                    dx dx =          --------------------------- (11)
                                  0   0
                                         m v0            m v0
     where we have denoted the double integral of the magnetic field as
                                 L0   x
                            I=            B( x ) dx dx          ----------------------------- (12)
                                 0    0

     when the deflection due to the electric and magnetic field are the same then we can
     use eqs(7) &(11) and eliminate the unknown velocity v0 to obtain
                                       a
                                         +L aVy
                               e       2
                                 =                    ------------------------------- (13)
                              m            s I2
I.4. Approximate evaluation of:

     A calculation of the integral ‘I’ requires the knowledge of the magnetic field
     produced by the magnets along the path of the electron in the CRT. We now give an
     approximate calculation of I assuming that the magnets are very long compared to
     the length of the CRT (L0). (See fig 3). The effect of the distant poles can be
     ignored. The field at the point Q, which will be in a direction normal to the x-axis, is
                                            (m + m′) d
                                 B( x ) =              3
                                                            ,
                                           (x 2 + d 2 ) 2
     here, m and m/ are the pole strengths of the N and S poles . The maximum of the
     magnetic field, Bm occurs at x = 0.
                                               ( m + m ′)
                                        Bm =
                                                  d2
     Thus, we can write,
                                                 Bm d 3
                                    B( x ) =              3
                                                             ----------------------------- (14)
                                             ( x2 + d2 ) 2




                                                    48
L0       x
      The integral I =        d x d x B( x ) can be evaluated to give,
                         0        0



                         [
                I = B m d d 2 + L20 − d 2    ]                 ------------------------------- (15)


I.5. Determination of Bm:

      The value of Bm is determined from the
      period of oscillation of the magnetometer
      needle. The magnetometer is placed at the
      center in place of CRT so that the magnets
      are at a distance of d from it (see fig4). The
      magnetometer needle aligns itself along                  the    resultant     magnetic      field
      fig 4
      B =     B 2 + B 2 where BE is the earth’s magnetic field acting towards south .
                E     m


      A small disturbance of the needle about the equilibrium position causes it to
      oscillate. The angular frequency of small oscillations can be easily shown to be
                           µB
      (Exercise 7) ω =          , where is the magnetic moment of the needle and I it’s
                            I
                                                                                   I
      moment of inertia, and hence the time period of small oscillations T = 2 π      .
                                                                                  µB
      Now, the resultant magnetic field B = B 2 + B 2 = B m / sin θ 0 . Thus
                                              E     m

                                    4 π 2 I Sin θ 0
                                  Bm =
                                       µ      T2
      In the absence of the magnets B=BE (due to the earth’s magnetic field) and the time
                          I              4π 2 I
      period T0 = 2 π           giving          = T02 B E ,
                       µ BE                 µ
      Thus,
                       T2
                  B m = 02 B E Sin θ 0                      ------------------------------- (16)
                       T
      With a determine of Bm the value of the eq(15) can be calculated and hence from
      eq(13) the value of (e/m).

II.   Setup and Procedure:
      PART A
1.    Place the magnetometer on the wooden box enclosing the CRT. Rotate the dial so
      that 00-00 position is perpendicular to the length of the CRT. Next rotate the CRT
      with the magnetometer on it so that the magnetometer needle aligns along 00-00
      position. In this position the CRT is aligned along the magnetic meridian (N-S
      position) while the scales attached perpendicular to the CRT (for magnetic
      mounting), are in E-W position.

2     Switch on the power supply and adjust the intensity and focus controls to obtain a
      fine spot on the CRT screen.
      (Note: the position of the spot may not be at the center of the CRT screen. Note down
                                                  49
the initial position of the spot)

3.   Choose a value of the deflection voltage and note down the deflection of the spot.
       (Note: the deflection has to be taken with respect to the initial spot position.)

4    Now extend the scales attached to the CRT and place identical bar magnets (as
     shown in Fig.3) and move the magnets symmetrically along the length of the scales
     until the spot deflection becomes zero (i.e. the spot returns to its initial position).
     Note the value d of the distance of the magnet poles from the center of the CRT.

5.   Reverse the deflection voltage and (with magnets removed) note the deflection of the
     spot.

6.    Place the magnets on the scale and find the value of d for which the spot returns to
     its

7.   Repeat the above steps for three different spot positions
          (Note: The deflection voltage should not exceed 375 volts)

PART B

Determination of time period of oscillation of magnetometer needle:

1.   Align the wooden arm on which the magnetometer is placed along the magnetic
     meridian and place the magnets along the scales in the EW direction at the same
     distance ‘d’ as in part A.
2.   Note the equilibrium deflection 0.

3.   With a third magnet, slightly disturb the needle from its equilibrium position and
     measure the time period of oscillations T.

4.   Now remove the magnets and let the needle come to equilibrium at 00-00 position.

5.   Disturb the needle about to this equilibrium position and measure the time period T0
     of the oscillation.

Precautions:

     1. The Cathode ray tube should be accurately placed with its longitudinal axis in the
        magnetic meridian.

     2. The spot on the screen should allowed to remain at a given position on the screen
        for a long time.

     3.   There should not be any other disturbing magnetic field near the apparatus.

     4.   While taking the observations for time periods, the maximum angular
          displacement of the magnetic needle should not exceed 40-50 degrees.

III. Exercises and Viva Questions:

     1. Study the working of a CRT. What is the typical value of accelerating voltage

                                            50
used in a CRT? Estimate the velocity ‘vo’ of the electron.

    2. What will happen to the spot if a sinusoidally time varying voltage is applied to
       the deflecting plates VV/ or HH/? What will happen if such a voltage (of the
       same frequency) is applied simultaneously to the horizontal and vertical
       deflecting plates?

    3. Draw a neat diagram showing the 3-dimensional orientations of vectors of the
       electron’s horizontal velocity, the electric field, the magnetic field the electric
       force on the electron and the magnetic force as the electron moves in the CRT.
       Orient your diagram according to the experimental set-up.

    4. If the deflecting voltage is switched off but the bar magnets kept in place, will
       there be a deflection of the spot? Describe qualitatively the motion of the
       electron in the CRT from aperture to screen.

    5. Describe the motion of the electron in the CRT in the presence of the deflecting
       voltage magnetic fields of the magnets

    6. What is the effect of earth’s magnetic field on the electron motion? What would
       happen if the apparatus were rotated by 900 so that the CRT is along the EW
       direction?
    7. Consider a dipole aligned with a magnetic field .If the dipole is given a small
       angular     displacement, then it experiences a restoring torque ‘ ’ = Bsin ,
       where ‘ ’ is the angle between the dipole and the magnetic field . Considering
       small displacements , show that the dipole will oscillate about the equilibrium
                                  B
       with angular frequency       . Where ‘I’ is the moment of Inertia.
                                 I

    8. Recalculate the integral ‘I’ (eq 12) assuming that the magnetic field of the
       magnet is a constant B=Bm. Use this to calculate the specific charge “e/m”. Does
       our approximate evolution of ‘I’ improve the evaluation of “e/m”?

    9. What are the sources of error in this experiment?

    10. How does your result compare with “e/m” measurement by Thomson’s method
        ? Which experiment is more accurate?


References:

    1. “Advance Practical Physics for Students”, B.L.Worsnop and H.T.Flint,
       Mentheum London, 1942.

    2. “Physics”, M.Alonso and E.J.Finn, Addison-Wiley, 1942.




                                           51
Experiment 8
              Measurement of e/m by Thompson’s bar magnet Method
                                        Observations and Results

1.             Constant Values

Length of plate, a = 2 cm
Distance to screen from plate, L = 16.0 cm
Distance between the plates, S = 0.4 cm
Horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field BE = 3.53 X 10-5 T .

PART A: Measurement of deflection y:

               Initial position of spot, yo = ____________________ cm (specify +ve or –ve)

                                                                  Table 1
Applied    Displaced position of   Displacement of spot y =          Mean        Position of magnet d   Mean
Voltage    spot y1 (cm)            y1 - yo                        Displacement   (cm)                   d (cm)
V(volts)   Direct       Reverse    Direct      Reverse               y(cm)       Direct      Reverse



1

2
3




PART B Determination of Time period

                                Table 2(all time measurements are in seconds)
               No. of Oscillations = ___________________

               Without Magnet                                                With Magnet

S.No                                      d = ____ cm                d = ______ cm         d = ______ cm
                                             = _____ deg                 = _____ deg            = _____ deg

                Total              To     Total               T        Total          T      Total           T
                time                      time                         time                  time




              Mean To                    Mean T



                                                          52
Calculations:
                        To2
Displacement     Bm =
                        T2
                            B E sin   O
                                                 [
                                          I = B m d d 2 + L2o − d 2   ]       a
                                                                                +L aVy
                                                                          e   2
                                                                            =
                                                                          m      s I2

1



2



3




Results:

Calculated value of specific charge of electron (e/m) = __________________ C/Kg.

Standard Value of (e/m)                                   = _________________ C/Kg

% error in e/m                                            = _________________.




                                                 53
Experiment 9
                   Measurement of “(e/m)” by helical coil method
Apparatus:
Cathode ray tube (CRT), CRT power supply, DC power supply (30V), solenoid, Rheostat,
DC voltmeter, and connecting wires.

Purpose of experiment:
To measure the specific charge, i.e. .charge to mass ratio (e/m) of an electron.

Basic methodology:
Electrons are accelerated towards the screen of a CRT and also deflected by a transverse
AC voltage. The CRT is placed in a magnetic field produced by a solenoid. The resulting
motion of the electron is then helical .A measure of the pitch of the helix leads to a
calculation of the e/m ratio .

________________________________________________________________________

Introduction
1.1   Electron are emitted at the cathode of a CRT and accelerated through an
      accelerating DC voltage Va towards the screen. In addition a small transverse
      (AC) voltage acts across the XX/ plates.. Once the electron leaves the plate region
      its velocity ‘v ‘is constant and makes angle with Z-axis. The component of it’s
      velocity along Z-axis is v|| =v cos            When the AC deflecting velocity is
      switched on, different electrons receive varying velocity v         and hence a line
      gets formed on the CRT screen.




                              fig 1

I.2   When the CRT is placed along the axis of the solenoid then there is a magnetic
      field B= o n I (along the axis of the solenoid) which acts on the electron. Here
      n=number of turns per unit length of the solenoid and I=current in the solenoid,
      length of the solenoid and I=current in the solenoid.




                                             54
Fig 2
I.3    When the magnetic field is present the motion of
       the electron in the CRT is helical. This is seen as
       follows. Viewed along the Z-axis with the
       magnetic field coming out of the page, the
       magnetic field has the effect of making the
       electron move in a circular path (fig3). The
       centripetal force is
                     2
                 m v⊥
                       = e v⊥ B     -------- (1)
                   r                                                            Fig. 3

       with v     r (   is the angular velocity of circular motion =cyclotron frequency)
                  eB
       gives    =
                  m
                                                   2 m
       The time period of evolution is T =             ------------------------------------ (2)
                                                    eB
       Note that T is independent of v
       Along with the circular motion the electron has a longitudinal velocity v||                v
       which transforms the purely rotational motion to helical path (fig 4)




                                         fig 4


I.4.   The pitch of the helical motion is defined as longitudinal distance moved in one full
       rotational period i.e.


                                                     55
I.4. The pitch of the helical motion is defined as longitudinal distance moved in one full
     rotational period i.e.
                                                       2 mv
                                        pitch = v||T                -----------------(3)
                                                         eB
I.5. When the magnetic field is switched on the line on the CRT rotates and shrinks. The
       AC deflecting voltage produces a range of “v values (both +ve and –ve) for the
       transverse velocities of the electrons. The radii of different electrons will be different
       but all the electrons rotate through the same angle in the same time causing the line
       on the screen to rotate. (fig 5).

       From fig.5 , it is clear that if each electron
       rotates through a full circle then the line on the
       CRT screen will shrink to a point .For this
       purpose to happen the distance L (from plate
       to screen of the CRT )should at least
       equal to one pitch of the helix . By adjusting
       B the pitch of the helix can be made equal to
       L and the lines becomes a point .This is called                     fig.5
       focusing action of the magnetic field.

I.6    At this value of magnetic, we have
                                      2 mv
                         L= pitch =            ---------------------- (4)
                                       eB
       The velocity ‘v’ of the electron can be estimated using the accelerating Va , by
                                        2 e Va
                 (½) m v2 = e Va >                 ----------------------------- (5)
                                           m
       Thus,
                    2     2 Va     m
              L=
                         B         e
       giving,
                 e 8 Va
                    =                             --------------------------- (6)
                 m L2 B 2
       The value of the ratio (e/m) can be calculated knowing the accelerating voltage Va
       the distance L and the magnetic field of the solenoid B .

II.    Setup and procedure:

       1. Insert the CRT in the solenoid approximately at the middle position. Place the
          axis of the solenoid parallel to the magnetic meridian. (This is to counter balance
          the effect of the Earth’s magnetic field).

       2. Insert the plug of the CRT to the base of the power supply.

       3. Connect the DC power supply, rheostat & solenoid in series as shown in fig.6




                                                56
Fig 6

4. Let the DC power supply to solenoid be switched off to begin with. Switch on
   the     power supply to the CRT. Select the AC supply in the ‘Off’ position .Use
   the     intensity & the focus controls to obtain a point –like spot at the center of
   the        screen. Next select the AC supply in the ‘X’ position and adjust the
   voltage using             the control to get a line on the screen about 1.5 cm long
   .Using a voltmeter across the terminals of the accelerating voltage supply adjust
   the control to set the voltage Va=250 V.

5. Switch on the DC power supply to the solenoid .As you increase the voltage the
         line on the screen shrinks and also rotates. Increase the voltage so that the
   line shrinks to a point on the screen. This is the focusing effect. If the does not
   completely shrink to a point in the voltage range available adjust the rheostat
   position till this is possible. Note down the current I1 through the solenoid at this
   point.

6. Keeping all settings same, interchange the contact at A&B (fig 6). This reverses
         the direction of the current in the solenoid. Adjust the DC supply till a point
   like image is again obtained on the screen and record the current I2.

7. Repeat step 4 & 6 for accelerating voltages Va=275V & 300V.


III.     Error analysis:

1. One of the major sources of error in the experiment is the horizontal component
   of earth’s magnetic field BE=3.53 x 10-5 T. This has partly been taken care of by
   our averaging procedure. Assuming that in the forward position the Bo adds to
   the solenoid field and that in the reverse position BE reduces the solenoid field
                                  8 2 Va           8 2 Va
   Then (e / m )1 + (e / m )2 = 2              + 2
                               L ( B1 + B E ) 2 L (B1 − B E ) 2

       Assuming BE << B1 & B2 , one can Taylor expand the RHS to get the following
                       8 2 Va 8 2 Va 16 2 Va − B E B E
            RHS ≅              + 2 2 +                      + 3
                        L2 B1
                            2
                                  L B2         L2        3
                                                        B1    B2
       The third term is negligible if B1=B2. Thus the average of (e/m)1 & (e/m)2 gives a
       value for e/m corrected for the earths magnetic field(BE).


                                           57
2.     Another source of error in our expression (eq 6) for e/m is that we have used a
                      2 e Va
 constant value v =            for the velocity of the electron. This may be all right if
                        m
    the acceleration is completed before the electron starts traveling the distance L.
    However if the acceleration extends beyond the edge of the X plates,       then our
    use of constant ‘v’ will lead to an over estimate of e/m.

 3. A further source of error is due to fact that the solenoid is of a finite length. The
    magnetic field along the axis of the solenoid varies with position. The value
     B=   on   I is strictly valid only for an infinite solenoid (see exercise 5)

 4. General error analysis:
    Take a variation of eq (6) for e/m as a function of Va , L & B . Add the
    magnitude of all the terms in the variation and divide the expression by e/m .this
    leads to the estimation of the fractional error as
                   ∆ (e / m )   ∆ Va       ∆L        ∆B
                              =        +2        +2      ----------------------------- (7)
                    (e / m )     Va         L          B
      Va & L can be taken to be the least counts of the respective measuring
     instruments .The error in B i.e. B = ( o n I) can arise due to error in the
     current
     measurement and error in counting the number of turns.

 IV. Exercises and Viva Questions:

 1. What will be the effect of the earth’ s magnetic field on the experiment? How is
    the effect accounted for in the experiment?

 2. What will be the effect of keeping the solenoid axis perpendicular to the
    magnetic meridian?

 3. Why does the line on the CRT screen rotate and shrink as the magnetic field is
    turned on?

 4. What will be the difference in the experiment if the transverse deflecting voltage
    is DC instead of AC?

 5. Evaluate the magnetic field on the axis of a solenoid of finite length (at point ‘p’
         as shown in figure)




     and show that it is given by
                                    B=(     on   I / 2)(cos + cos    )
 6. Derive equation (7).

                           ∆ ( e / m)
 7. Estimate the error                in your experiment.
                            ( e / m)


                                            58
8. Refine the error estimate for the magnetic field by using exercise 5 and
                    ∆ ( e / m)
        recalculate            .
                     ( e / m)
     9. What happens to the pattern on the screen if the solenoid current is continuously
        increased?

     10. Compare this experiment with the Thomson’ s bar magnet method for measuring
         e/m.

References:

1.   “ Fundamentals of Physics” , D.Halliday, R.Resnick and J.Walker, 6th edition, John-
     Wiley & sons, New York.
2.   “ Electricity & Magnetism” , A.S .Mahajan and A.A.Rangwalla ,Tata –McGraw Hill,
     New Delhi.




                                           59
Experiment 9

               Measurement of (e/m) by helical coil method.
                                 Observations and Results

Constant values:
      1. Distance between the edge of X deflecting plates and fluorescent screen, L =
9cm.

       2. Total number of turns in the solenoid, N = 3350.

       3. Length of the solenoid, l = ____________ cm.

       4. Magnetic permeability of free space,        o   = 4 x 10-7 Nm2 / Amp2.

       Observation table :
                                   I1=    Solenoid     current   I2 = Solenoid current
                                   (forward direction)           (reverse direction)

           1. Va = 250V


           2. Va = 275V


           3. Va = 300V


       Solenoid current and accelerating voltage at focusing

     Calculations and results:
     1.                B1 = ( oN I1) /( l )                      8 2 Va
     Va = 250V                                        (e/m )1 = ----------   (e/m)avg =
                                                                  L2B12
                                                       =
                          B2 = ( oN I1) /( l )                  8 2 Va
                                                      (e/m)2 = ----------
                                                                L2B22
                                                      =
    2.                    B1 =                        (e/m)1 =               (e/m)avg =
    Va = 275 V
                          B2 =                        (e/m)2 =

    3.                    B1 =                        (e/m)1 =               (e/m)avg =
    Va = 300 V
                          B2 =                        (e/m)2 =




                                                 60
Results:

       The calculated value of e/m =____________________C/kg.

       The standard value of e/m =_____________________C/kg.

       % Error in e/m          =_____________________




                                       61
Experiment 10

                            Charging and Discharging of a Capacitor
Apparatus:

Ballistic galvanometer, lamp, and scale, capacitor, resistor, solar cell, light filters, stop
watch, two way switches, damping key , connecting wires .

Purpose of experiment:

i) To study the charging and discharging of a capacitor
ii) To measure the time constant characterizing charging / discharging process
iii) To understand the working of a ballistic galvanometer.

Basic Methodology:

A capacitor is charged by a solar cell and discharged (for different times) through a
resistor and ballistic galvanometer .The deflection of the galvanometer is in proportion to
the amount of charge that passes through it .A lamp and scale arrangement is used to
measure the deflection.


I. Introduction:

I.1   The basic circuit for charging and discharging a
      capacitor is shown in fig 1.      If switch S1 is closed
      keeping S2 open, then the battery charges the capacitor
      and current flows through the resistor R1 until the
      capacitor is fully charged. If the charge on the capacitor
      at time t is q(t) , then the voltage across the capacitor
      C is q/C .and the current through R1 is i = dq/dt .
      By applying Kirchoff’ s second law,               fig.1

              iR1 + (q/C) =             R1 (dq/dt)+(q/C) =     . -------------------- (1)
      which has the solution
       q(t) =C (1 – exp(-t / R1 C ) ) = qo(1 – exp(-t / R1C ) ) -----------------(2)
                    where qo = C
      The quantity =R1C is the charging time constant which characterizes the rate at
      which charge is deposited on the capacitor .As t        , eq (2) shows that q C
             In practice the capacitor charges to its maximum value qo after a time interval
      equal to a few time constants. Once the capacitor is fully charged then the current i
      through the resistor become zero.

I.2   At this point if the switch S1 is opened and S2 is closed the charge in the capacitor
      discharges        through the resistor R2




                                              62
By Kirchoff’ s second law
                               dq      q
                       R2            +    = 0 --------------------------------------- (3)
                               dt      C
     with the solution (taking q=qo at t=0)
                                          −t
                       q ( t ) = q 0 exp      ---------------------------------------(4)
                                         R2 C
     Thus the charge on the capacitor decays exponentially with time. In fact after a time
     t=R2 C (equal to the discharging time constant ) the charge drops from it’ s initial
     value qo by a factor of e-1 .

II.2 In this experiment we will measure the quantity of charge present in the capacitor by
     discharging it through a ballistic galvanometer . The circuit for the experiment is
     shown in fig.2.




                              fig 2.
     A solar cell generates emf upon being illuminated by a light source. The ballistic
     galvanometer is a sensitive detector of small quantities of charge. Thus, it is
     sufficient to charge the capacitor with solar cell, which typically produces an output
     of about 0.1 – 0.3 V. When the switch S1 is in the position L      M and the switch S2
     is in the position A      B, then the capacitor gets charged. The time constant for
     charging is 1=R1C.If the switch S1is in the position L          N, then the capacitor
     discharges through the resistor R2. The time constant is 2=R2C. At any point of time
     the charge residing on the capacitor, can be measured by changing S2 to the position
     A D, discharging the capacitor through the ballistic galvanometer (BG).

II.3. Ballistic galvanometer:

     A galvanometer is an instrument, which uses magnetic effects for detecting and
     measuring currents or electric charge. In a moving coil galvanometer, a flat
     conducting coil is suspended between the poles of a permanent magnet (fig 3). The
     coil consists of an insulated wire wound on light brass or aluminum frame.

     The coil is usually suspended by a phosphor bronze strip, which also serves as the
     current lead for the current to the coil and is finally connected to a terminal at the
     base of the instrument. The other end of the coil is connected to a light spring, which
     provides the restoring couple. The other end of the spring is attached to the other

                                            63
terminal.

A ballistic galvanometer is used for the
purpose of measuring the total charge
in an impulse current as against
measurement of a steady current. For
this we require that the period of
oscillation of the moving coil be large
compared to the time for the current
pulse passing through it. This is
achieved by loading the coil so as to
increase its moment of inertia. Thus
when the current pulse passes through it
, the coil receives a kick due to an impulse torque. Subsequently the coil oscillates
freely due to the restoring torque provided by the suspension. The maximum
deflection amplitude     (called first throw position) is reached long after the current
is passed. A necessary requirement is also that damping is small. The fact that the
coil is kicked from rest (much like a bullet is shot of a gun) leads to the
nomenclature ballistic galvanometer for the instrument.

The first throw position       (maximum amplitude of deflection) is proportional to the
total charge q = i dt in the current i passing through the coil. If A is the area of the
coil , n is the number of turns of the coil and B is the magnetic field of the
permanent magnet .Then the impulse on the coil is
                       G = n (i A) B
leading to an initial angular momentum ( I is the moment of inertia of the coil ) ,

            I    =      G   dt = n A B q                          ----------------------------(5)

If the restoring torque provided by suspension is k  then equating the initial kinetic
energy To the work done by the restoring torque , we get

           1 2 1
             I ω = k θ 02 --------------------------------- (6)
           2        2
which leads to (using eq 5 ),
                             1
                 q= Ik           θ0
                          n AB
         I
                         I
 Substituting T = 2 π       , the period of free oscillations, we get
                         k
                       T k θ0
                    q=                    ----------------------------------- (7)
                       π nAB 2

  showing the proportionality relationship between q and




                                           64
The deflection of the coil is measured by the
      deflection of a light beam by the mirror attached to
      the coil (fig 4). This deflection is recorded as the
      linear deflection of the spot, X, that the reflected
      beam makes on the scale. Clearly X will also be
      directly proportional to the charge q discharged
      through the ballistic    galvanometer. Thus, if the
      capacitor is discharged through the galvanometer
      after different charging / discharging times, the
      relation of X with time will be given by equations
      analogous to eqs (2) & (4).

      Note the damping key S in fig (2). When passed, this
      simply shorts the two ends of the galvanometer coil.              fig 4
      The oscillations of the coil get severely damped (why?). The damping key thus can
      used to stop the motion of the coil.                        .

II.   Set - up and Procedure:

      Part A: Measurement of time constant for charging of capacitor.

      1. Connect the circuit as given in fig.2 with R1 = 0 (i.e. without the resistance R1).
         (This is to ensure that the charging of the capacitor by the solar cell is almost
         instantaneous)

      2. Choose a filter for the light illuminating the solar cell. (The voltage output of the
         solar cell will depend on the intensity of the light illuminated it).

      3. Switch on the lamp of the lamp and scale arrangement and adjust the
         arrangement so that a bright spot is obtained on the scale. Use the damping key S
         to bring the bright spot to rest. Note down the initial rest position of the spot.

      4. Switch on the illumination to the solar cell with the key S1 in the L             M
         position. The solar cell will then charge the capacitor.

      5. After fully charging the capacitor (this should happen in the less than a minute),
         press the key S2 to the A       D position. This will cause the capacitor to the
         discharge through the ballistic galvanometer. Note the deflection Xo of the first
         throw position of the spot.

         (Caution: The deflection should not be larger than about 20 cm. Causing too
         large to discharge through the galvanometer will cause a large and uncontrolled
         deflection of the    coil which can damage the instrument. Choosing darker
         filter colours for the solar cell illumination can moderate the charge on the
         capacitor)

      6. Depress the key S2 so that it is in the A   B position and also set the key S1 so
         that it is in the L M ( charging ) position .Again fully charge the capacitor .

      7. Set the key S1 to the L    N position so that the capacitor discharges through the
         resistor R2. Discharge the capacitor for a time t (t can be measured with the help

                                              65
of a stop watch).    At the end of the time t press S2 to the A      D position and
          note the

          first throw position X . Repeat for t = 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 seconds.

       8. Repeat the measurement for two different filters.

       Part B: Measurement of time constant for charging of capacitor.

       1. Add the resistance R1 ( R1 2 M ) to the circuit as in fig 2 .Also remove the
          resistance R2 from the circuit leaving the node N unconnected.

       2. Choose a filter and switch on the solar cell and set the key S1 in L      M position
          to charge the capacitor.

       3. At the end of a time interval t (measured by stop watch) turn the switch S1 to the
          L N position. This halts the charging of the capacitor. Now depress S2 to
          connect A      D discharging the capacitor through the galvanometer and note the
          first throw deflection X.

          (Note: You will need to take a large number of measurements (about 10 – 15) to
          get
          proper results .Also make sure there are sufficient measurements for times
          smaller than        and for times greater than the time constant .You could
          choose the following measurements : t = 5 , 10 , 15 , 20 , … … .60 seconds )


III.   Exercises and Viva Questions:

       1. Plot qualitatively the curves q(t) describing charging and discharging of a
          capacitor
          and explain these curves physically .

       2. What is the physical meaning of the time constant = RC? Explain for both the
          cases of charging and discharging.

       3. Estimate total charge deposited by the solar cell on the capacitor. Why do we
          need to use solar cell in the experiment?

       4. What is the effect of changing the filter? Look at your observations and verify
          your
          expectations.

       5. How does a ballistic galvanometer work? Why it is called so? Why do we need
          to use a ballistic galvanometer in this experiment?

       6. Why is it necessary in a ballistic galvanometer, to have a relatively large moment
          of inertia for the moving coil and small damping ?

       7. What is the effect on the galvanometer deflection on pressing the damping key?
          Explain why the damping is produced?

                                              66
8. What would be the effect on the experiment if resistances of the order of 100 or
        1 k were used?

     9.   By what percentage (with respect to the maximum charge on the capacitor C )
         , does        the capacitor charge / discharge in a time interval t = ,t = 2 ( =
         time constant )?
     10. Estimate the width of the current pulse that passes through the ballistic
         galvanometer when the capacitor is discharged through it .You may need to have
         an idea of the intrinsic resistance of the galvanometer.

References:

1.   “ Physics” , M.Alonso and E.J.Finn, Addison-Wiley, 1992

2.   “ Fundamentals of Physics” , D.Halliday, R.Resnick and J.Walker,6th edition, John-
     Wiley & sons, New York 2001.




                                           67
Experiment 10

                       Charging and Discharging of a Capacitor

                                  Observations and results

Part A: Measurement of time constant for discharging of a capacitor

R2 = ________________________

C = ________________________



PART A : Measurement of time constant for discharging of capacitor

                                 Table 1
Rest position of spot on the scale = ______________________

          S.No        Discharging       First throw position X (cm)            ln X
                      time t (sec)
                                        Red             Green


          1           0

          2           10

          3           20

          4           30

          5           40

          6           50

          7           60




Calculations:

Plot the graph of ln X vs. t and draw a best fit straight line .Obtain the time constant from
slope ( = - 1 / R2 C ) of the line .


Slope =



                                              68
= - (1 / slope) =


Results:
The value of time constant measured = __________________ sec

The value of time constant calculated =___________________ sec


Part B: Measurement of time constant for charging of capacitor
                        Table 2
       Rest position of spot on scale =___________________

        S No         Charging time t (sec)          First throw position X (cm)
        1                     0
        2                     5
        3                    10
        4                    15
        5                    20
        6                    25
        7                    30
        8                    35
        9                    40
        10                   45
        11                   50
        12                   55
        13                   60
        14                   65
        15                   70

Calculations:

Plot the graph X vs. t and fit a smooth curve. Draw an asymptote to the graph for large
values of t. Estimate the asymptotic value Xo for X for large values of t. From the graph
estimate the time at which X = Xo (1- e-1) = 0.63 Xo. This time is an estimate of the
charging time constant = R 1 C. Explicitly
Show the procedure on the graph.

Results:
       1.       Estimated value of time constant = _______________

       2.       Calculated value of time constant = R1C = ______________

(Two graph papers required).




                                             69
Experiment 11

                       Self Inductance and resistance of a coil

Objective :
       To determine the self inductance and resistance of a coil with air core and iron
core.

Theory:

        Let us consider an R-L circuit connected to an ac supply as shown in Fig 1.
Practically it is not possible to have an ideal inductor at room temperature. The present
inductor coil has a self inductance of ' and resistance '. Let V 1 be the voltage drop
                                         L'                 r'
across the coil which is the combination of voltage drop due to inductance ' and    L'
resistance '. Let VL and Vr be the voltage drop due to the inductive and resistive parts of
            r'
the coil. From Fig.2




        V 1= √ (VL2 + Vr 2) --------------------------------(1)

Let V2 be the voltage drop across the resistor ' and ' be the total voltage drop across
                                               R'    V'
the R-L Circuit. The complete phase diagram is shown in Fig 3.


From Fig.3,

V 2 = V12 + V22 − 2V1V2 Cos (π − θ )

Or

V 2 = V12 + V22 + 2V1V2 Cos(θ ) … (2)

Vr = V1 Cos θ --------------------(3)

V L = V1 Sin θ-------------------- (4)

Also VL = I.L.ω ------------------(5)

and Vr = I r--------------------- (6)


                                                70
By measuring the voltage V across resistor R, current I in the circuit can be determined.
Measure V1, V2, and V to determine L and r using equations (2) to (6).

Procedure:

1. Connect the R-L circuit to the oscillator using the given resistor and inductor coil
   (Fig. 1).

2. Set the oscillator frequency to 2 KHz and set the voltage amplitude in the oscillator such
that the voltage drop across the inductor does not exceed certain Volts (… .).

3. Measure the voltage drops V 1 , V 2 and V for different values of R (Table 1).

4. Repeat the experiment by inserting an iron rod into the inductor coil.

From eq (2) to eq (6) calculate the inductance L and resistance r of the coil for air core
and iron core and plot them as a function of current in the circuit.

Table1

 Sl No.             R(ohms)            V(volts)           V1(volts)          V2(volts)




Table2

   Sl No              R(ohms)            I(amps)            L(mH)              R(ohm)




                                              71
Experiment 12

                                     Resonance in LCR circuits

Apparatus:

Oscillator (1 to 150 kHz), variable capacitor, resistance, resistance box, AC mill voltmeter.

Purpose of the experiment:

To study resonance effect in series and parallel LCR circuit. This experiments also enables
study of forced damped oscillation.

Basic methodology:

In the series LCR circuit, an inductor (L), capacitor (C) and resistance(R) are connected in
series with a variable frequency sinusoidal emf source and the voltage across the
resistance is measured. As the frequency is varied, the current in the circuit (and hence the
                                                                                1
voltage across R) becomes maximum at the resonance frequency ν 0 =                    . In the
                                                                           2π L C
parallel LCR circuit there is a minimum of the current at the resonance frequency.

I.    Introduction:

I.1   There is in general an analogy between resonating mechanical systems (like a driven
      spring mass system) and electrical systems involving inductors, resistor and
      capacitors. In the electrical case it is the charge q(t) on the capacitor (or the current
      I= dq/dt ) that satisfies a differential equation analogous to the displacement of the
      mass in the familiar spring mass system.

      Consider the circuit fig 1 consisting of an
      inductor (L) , capacitor (C) and a resistance(R)
      connected in series with a source of
      sinusoidally varying emf       (t) = o cos t .
      Equating the voltage drops across the resistor
      and capacitor to the total emf, we get,


      RI + ( q / C ) = VL+      o   cos t       Fig.1

           = - L (dI / dt ) + o cos t --------------(1)
      Differentiating the equation with respect to time
      and rearranging, we get

      L ( d2 I / dt ) + R (dI / dt) + ( I / C ) = -     o   sin t -----------------------(2)

      which is analogous to the equation of motion for a damped oscillator .

      The current I(t) has the solution
                        I(t)= Io cos ( t – ) --------------------------------------(3)


                                                  72
where Io exhibits resonance behaviour . The amplitude Io is given by

                                  ε0
                I0 =                                    1
                                                                                ----------------------(4)
                                                2           2
                                        1
                        R2 + ω L−
                                       LC


                                        1
                                ω L−
                                       ωC
                       Tanα =                                        -------------------------------(5)
                                   R

      Gives the phase of the current relative to the applied emf. We can write Io =                  o/   Z
      where ,
                                                    1
                                            2           2
                              1
                Z= R2 + ω L−                                           ------------------------(6)
                             ωC

      is the impedance of the circuit .The reactance X of the circuit is
                                  1
                       X =ω L −       ,                    ---------------------------(7)
                                 ωL

      so that the impedance Z is given by
                               Z= ( R2 + X2 ) 1/2
      Clearly the impedance will be minimum (and Io will be maximum) at resonance
      condition when the reactance vanishes, i.e.. at the angular frequency (known as
      resonance frequency )

                           1
                   ω0 =                                              -------------------------------(8)
                          LC

      which is the natural frequency of electromagnetic oscillations in LCR circuit without
      an external source of emf .

I.2   Resistance, Capacitance and Inductance in AC circuits:

      Consider a resistor with a voltage drop
      VR = VRO cos ( t) across it (fig 2a). By
      Ohm’ s law the current through resistor is

              VR   VR 0
       IR =      =      cos ω t    --------------(9)
              R     R

      The current and the voltage across a resistor
      are in phase.


      In the case of a capacitor (fig 2b) the current
      IC = dQ/dt where q is the charge on the
      capacitor .If the potential drop across the capacitor is VC = VCO cos t, the charge q

                                                                73
= CVC = CVCO cos t             fig2

                                                         π
        I C = − ω C VCO sin ω t = ω C VC O cos ω t +                                  -------------10)
                                                         2

      Thus the current through the capacitor is ahead of voltage by phase angle /2.
      Consider now an inductor (fig 2c) with current IL (t) =ILO cos t . Assume that the
      current flows and increases in the direction shown. The back emf induced in the
      inductor opposes the
      current and the potential drop across the inductor is

                VL = L (dI / dt ) = —          L ILO sin t = L ILO cos ( t +      /2 )----------(11)

      The voltage across the inductor is ahead of the current in phase by an angle            /2

I.3   Complex Impedance:

      It is convenient to use complex phasors to represent the current and voltage in an AC
      circuit. For example, the phasor V = Vo e i ω t = Vo (cos ωt + j sin ωt ) represents a
      sinusoidal varying voltage Vo cos t which is its real part .For any component A we
      define its complex impedance by VA = Z A I A . We write
                                Z = R + jX ,
      Where the real part of Z is the resistive impedance (R) , while the imaginary part of
       Z is the reactive impedance (X).

      The complex impedances of the resistor, capacitor and the inductor can be obtained
      by generalizing eqs (9) ,(10) & (11) to phasor equations :
                             1
                       I R = VR       ZR = R       ----------------------------------------(12)
                            R
                                j   t+                                 1
                 I C = CVCO e            2
                                             = j CVC    ZC     ZC =       --------------------(13)
                                                                      j C

                       j   t+
        VL = L I L e     2
                            = + j L IL     ZL = j L     ---------------------------------(14)
      Thus the impedance of a resistor is its resistance itself, while the impedance of a
      capacitor and inductance are reactive with XC = 1/ ( C ) and XL = L .

      It can be shown from Kirchoff’ s rules that complex impedances in series or parallel
      combine just like resistors in series or parallel. Thus, for the series LCR circuit fig 1,
      the net impedance of the circuit is
                                                     1
                Z = Z R + ZC + ZL = R + j L −               --------------------------------------(15)
                                                       C
      The current flowing in the circuit is then
                                   j t
                               o e
                I= =                        = I o e j ( t − ) --------------------------------(16)
                    Z                  1
                         R + j L−
                                        C
      From eq (16) it can be easily seen that

                                                   74
IO =                  O
                                                                          ( = Re I )
                                                                     2
                                                       1
                                           R2 +     L−
                                                        C
                                                           1
                                                  L−
                                                            C
     and                          = Tan −1
                                                       R

     which clearly reproduces eqs (4) & (5) . The physical current in the circuit is, of
     course,
     the real part of the phasor I in eq (16).

I.4. Parallel LCR circuit :




                                       Fig 3

     Consider now the parallel LCR circuit shown in fig 3. The current through the
     resistor can be found by calculating the equivalent impedance of the circuit.
                                                         L
                       1             Z Z                   C
       Z = ZR +               = R+ L C = R−j                   --------------------(17)
                    1     1         ZC + ZL                  1
                        +                              L−
                   ZC     ZL                                 C

     Thus
                                  ej   t

                                                  = I O e j(         )
                              O                                 t+
           I=       =                                                      ---------------------------------(18)
                Z
                          L/C
                        R−j
                              1
                         L−
                               C
     The magnitude of current IO is given by
                          IO =                     O
                                                                         ---------------------------------(19)
                                                                     2


                                                   L/C
                                       R2 +
                                                      1
                                                   L−
                                                       C
     Viewed as a function of , it is clear that IO is now a minimum (the impedance in
     the denominator is maximum ) when L = 1 / ( L) , or ,where


                                                               75
1
                 =       = O        -----------------------------------------------(20)
                    LC
    and is known as “ resonance frequency” even though it corresponds to an amplitude
    minimum .
                                                                                   1
    (Note: The amplitude of current in eq (19) strictly falls at              =         since the
                                                                                   LC
    denominator tends to infinity. This is because we have considered idealized (i.e
    resistance less) capacitor and inductor. A finite value of current amplitude at
    resonance will be obtained if resistive impedance is included for these components)

I.5. Power Resonance:

    The power dissipated at the resistor is P = I V = I2 R = V2 / R. From eq (3) for the
    series resonance circuit, the power dissipated at the resistor is
                      P = I 2 R cos 2 ( t − ) ------------------------------------(21)
                            O
    where IO is given by eq (4) . The average power dissipated over one cycle is
                                      2
                  I2 R                O R
              P= O =                                 ------------------------------(22)
                    2                       1
                                                 2

                          2 R2 +        L−
                                             C



    Fig 4 shows graph of P as a
    function of the driving frequency .
    The maximum power value Pm
    occurs at the resonating frequency
            1
      O =        . It can be shown that to
           LC
    a good approximation, which the
    power falls to half of the maximum
    value, Pm / 2 at       =± .O
                              2
    Here      is related to damping in the electrical
    circuit and is given by = R / L .                       Fig .4
    The width or range of over which the value of P falls to half the maximum at the
    resonance is called the Full Width Half Maximum (FWHM). The FHWM is a
    characteristic of the power resonance curve and is related to the amount of damping
                                           R
    in the system. Clearly FWHM = = . One also define the quality factor Q as
                                           L
                  1 L
     Q= O =               which is also a measure damping. Large Q(small R) implies
                 R C
    small damping while small Q(large R) implies large damping . Clearly we have
                                    R
                      FWHM = =                         -------------------------------(23)
                                    L
    Thus, the quality factor Q can be determined from the FWHM of the power
    resonance graph.

                                              76
II.   Set-up and Procedure:

      1. The series and parallel LCR circuits are to be connected as shown in fig 1 & fig
         3.

      2. Set the inductance of the variable inductance value and the capacitances the
         variable capacitor to low values ( L ~ 0.01H , C ~ 0.1 F ) so that the resonant
         frequency
                        1
                O =             is of order of a few kHz .
                    2 LC
      3. Choose the scale of the AC mill voltmeter so that the expected resonance occurs
         at approximately the middle of the scale.

      4. Vary the frequency of the oscillator and record the voltage across the resistor.

      5. Repeat (for both series and parallel LCR circuits) fir three values of the resistor
         (say R = 100 ,200 & 300 ).

III. Exercises and Viva Questions:

      1. Write down the Newton’ s law for a forced damped harmonic oscillator and map
         the electrical quantities appearing in eq (2) with corresponding mechanical
         quantities.

      2. Verify that the solution, eq (3) satisfies the differential equation (2).

      3. Distinguish between resistive impedance and reactive impedance. What is the
         effect of reactive impedance on the current and voltage in an AC circuit? In a
         DC circuit?

      4. For the circuit shown with emf (t) = o cos t , determine the current
         I(t) = IO cos ( t – ) . (i.e. determine the amplitude IO and phase ).




      5. Calculate the (resistive or reactive) impedance of the components L, C and R at
         resonance for series and parallel circuits , for your experiment .

      6. Why does the series circuit give a power maximum at resonance while the
         parallel circuit lead to a power minimum ?

      7. The AC mill voltmeter gives the ‘rms’ value of the voltage across the resistor,
         i.e. Vrms .
         If V = VO cos t , what is Vrms ? Show that the average power P = Vrms / R .
                                                                            2




                                               77
8. Show that eq (22) can be written as
                           2
                             RL             1
                     P= O
                            2C                        2

                                  Q2 +        −   O

                                           O

     9. Qualitatively plot the power resonance curve for increasing values of Q .Show
        that the
        FWHM of the power resonance curve is approximately given by =  O
                                                                         .
                                                                      Q
     10 Argue why the power maximum(minimum) for the series (parallel)LCR circuit
        increases.

Reference:
1. “ Physics” , M.Alonso and E.J.Finn, Addison-Wiley, 1992
2    “ Linear Circuits” , M.E.Van Valkenburg and B.K Kinariwala , Printice Hall,
        Englewood Cliffs ,NJ ,1982.




                                          78
Experiment 12

                              Resonance in LCR circuits
                                 Observations and results
Part A: Series LCR Circuit.

        L = _______________________ mH

        C = _______________________ F.

                                    Table 1
           Frequency
  S.No       (kHz)     R1 = ___________          R2 = ____________ R3 = _______________

                       V       P = V2 / R        V       P = V2 / R   V      P = V2 / R
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
   10




Part B: Parallel LCR Circuit
        L = _________________ mH
        C = _________________ F.
                                     Table 2
           Frequency
  S.No
             (kHz)     R1 = ___________          R2 = ____________ R3 = _______________


                                            79
V       P = V2 / R        V                P = V2 / R     V         P = V2 / R
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
   10

Calculations and Results:

     1. Plot the graph of frequency ( ) vs P                (average power ) for series and
        parallel cases.

                                                                     1
     2. Read off the resonant frequency             O   =                    by locating the maxima /
                                                            2        LC
            minima in the graphs
            i). Resonance        frequency          for                   series        LCR       circuit
                =________________kHz

            ii) Resonance     frequency             for                  parallel       LCR       circuit
                =________________kHz

            iii). Calculate     the    value                    of            resonance       frequency
                  =________________kHz

Results :

Estimated value of Q for series resonance from graph : (1)                          (2)          (3)

                              1   L
Calculated value of Q =             =                            (1)                (2)          (3)
                              R   C
% errors in Q                                                    (1)                (2)          (3)

(One graph paper required).




                                               80
Experiment 13

          Hysterisis loop for a ferromagnetic material (M–B curve)

Apparatus:

Two solenoid coils, S and C, ferromagnetic specimen rod, reversible key (R), ammeter,
magnetometer, battery, solenoid, rheostat and transformer for demagnetizing set up.

Purpose of experiment:

i)    To study the magnetization (M) of a ferromagnetic material in the presence of a
      magnetic field B and to plot the hysterisis (M vs. B) curve .

ii)   To calculate the retentivity and coercivity of the material.

Basic Methodology:

A ferromagnetic rod is magnetized by placing it in the magnetic field of a solenoid. The
magnetized rod causes a deflection ( ) in a magnetometer .The deflection is recorded as
the current in the solenoid (I) is varied over a range of positive and negative values .

I.    Introduction:

I.1   The magnetic field of a solenoid at a point on its axis is
                               B= O n I                   ----------------------------(1)
                           -7     2    2
      where O = 4     x 10 Nm / A is the magnetic permeability of vacuum , n is the
      number of turns per unit length in the solenoid and I is the current in the solenoid .

I.2. The specimen rod is placed along the axis of the solenoid acquires a magnetization
     M along its axis. (Magnetization is defined as the magnetic dipole moment per unit
     volume). The magnetic dipole moment ‘m’ of the rod is
                      m = M (l )                       --------------------------(2)
     where l = length of the rod and = cross-sectional area of the rod .

I.3. The magnetic field produced by the
     rod at the position of the
     magnetometer (r) is
                     2mr
       Bm = O                ------------(3)
             4          l2
                   r −
                     2

                        4
I.4. The apparatus is aligned so that the                     fig 1
     horizontal component of the earth’ s magnetic field BE , which is along South – North
     direction , is perpendicular to the axis of the rod (which is along the East –West
     direction ). The magnetometer needle aligns along the resultant magnetic field
     making an angle with BE as in fig 2.




                                              81
Clearly,
                           BM
            Tan =                            B M = B E Tan          -------
                           BE
      (4)

I.5   Using eqs 2, 3 & 4 we can write

        M=
                     4            (r   2
                                           − l2 / 4   )
                                                      2

                                                          B E Tan   -------
                 O       (2 l )               r
      (5)
      Hence M ∝ Tan . Also from eq 1, B∝ I .
      Therefore a plot of Tan vs. I reproduces the                            fig .2
       features of M vs. B curve .

I.6   Hysterisis:

      A ferromagnetic material whose atoms behave like
      magnetic dipoles produced by the spins of unpaired
      electrons. Domains form in the interior of the
      material with in which the dipoles align in a given
      direction but the domains themselves randomly
      oriented. (Fig 3)

      In the presence of an external magnetic field the
      different domain moments tend to align producing a
      net magnetization    in the direction of the
      magnetic field.

      The variation of the magnetization M as the magnetic
      field B is varied gives rise to a characteristic curve
      called the hysterisis loop. Figure 4 shows a typical
      curve obtained. (The axes are taken to be Tan & I as
      is to be done in the experiment). As the magnetic
      field is increased the magnetization of the sample increases as more and more
      domains align along the direction of the magnetic field. With further increase in B,
      the magnetization M saturates to a maximum value (point b). If the current I (field B)
      is decreased the magnetization M decreases.




                                                                    Fig 4

      When the current is made zero (point c ) the magnetization M however does not fall
                                                                    82
to zero. At this point the material has a residual magnetization and behaves like a
      permanent magnet. To make the magnetization zero (point d) requires a non-zero
      current in the reverse direction. As I is increased in the reverse direction, M saturates
      to a maximum negative value (point e).           Further increase in the current brings
      the magnetization to zero (point g) and eventually to saturation (point b).

I.7   Retentivity & Coercivity:

      Retentivity (MO) is the residual magnetization in the sample when the external
      magnetic field is zero .
      This is calculated as

                MO =
                            4        (r   2
                                                   )2
                                              −l2 / 4
                                                      BE Tan          ------------------------(6)
                                                               O
                            O   2l             r
                       cf
      Where, Tan    O   =    (c & f are the points in the graph, fig 4)        ---------------(7)
                        2
      Coercivity BO is the external magnetic field required to reduce the residual
      magnetization in the sample to zero.
                    dg
               IO =      ; BO = O n IO                         -------------------------------(8)
                     2
       (d & g are the points in the graph , fig 4 )

II    Set-up and procedure:

      1. Complete the wiring of the apparatus according to the circuit diagram, fig 5




      2. Alignment of apparatus:
         Rotate the dial of the magnetometer until 00 – 00 position is aligned with the axis
         of the solenoid. Rotate the wooden arm, containing the solenoid, magnetometer
         and compensating coil, until the magnetic pointer coincides with the 00 – 00
         position. In this position the wooden arm is along the E – W position .The
         horizontal component of earth’ s magnetic field BE (along S-N direction) is then
         perpendicular to the wooden arm.




                                                        83
3. Demagnetization of specimen:

    Complete the wiring of the
    demagnetizing apparatus according
    to circuit Fig 6. Insert specimen
    rod in the solenoid and vary the
    AC current in the solenoid using
    rheostat. This procedure should
    take 2-5 minutes.

4   Positioning of the Compensating
    Coil:
    Pass current (say 1A) through the
    coils S & C. Vary the position of C
    along the wooden arm until the deflection of the needle is zero. Fig 6

    The magnetic field of solenoid S is then nullified (at the position of
    magnetometer)
    by the magnetic field of C .

5. Begin Measurement:

    i). To begin with, the current in the solenoid should be switched off.

    ii). Insert specimen rod so that it’ s leading tip is at the edge of the solenoid.
         (Note: There should be no deflection of the needle at this point .If deflection
         is observed, repeat step 3 for demagnetizing rod).

    iii). Keep the reversing key R in a position so that current flows in a given
          direction.
          The rheostat position should correspond to maximum resistance.

    iv). Switch on the current.
         (Caution: From now on the current variation sequence has to be followed
         strictly Any change or back tracking of measurement will lead to incorrect
         results).
    v). Vary the current using the rheostat from 0A – 1.5A and back 1.5A – 0A
         insteps of 0.1A and note the deflections 1 & 2 for each setting of current.
         (Caution: To get strictly zero current you will have to switch off the battery)

    vi). Reverse the position of the reversible key R and vary the current in the
         reverse direction 0A – 1.5A ,and back 1.5A – 0A .Note the deflections 1 &
         2


    vii). Reverse the position of the key R and vary the current from 0 – 1.5A. Again
        note the deflections 1 & 2




                                        84
III. Exercises and Via Questions:

     1. Define paramagnetic, diamagnetic & ferromagnetic substances. Give one
        example of each.

     2. Why the M vs. B curve called the hysterisis curve?

     3. Derive eq (6).

     4. What is the need to align the solenoid along the E – W direction?

     5. Will the hysterisis curve be different if this alignment were not done? If yes
        why?
     6. How does the demagnetization setup demagnetize the rod?

     7. It is said that dropping the specimen rod on a hard surface also serves to remove
        any small residual magnetization . Is it true ? If so give reason.

     8. Draw a small figure showing how the hysterisis curve would develop over many
        cycles of the current.

     9. How would the retentivity & coercivity change with temperature? Do you think
            that they should depend on the geometry of the sample?

     10. Identify the main sources of error in your experiment.

References:

     1. “ Fundamentals of Physics” , D.Halliday, R.Resnick and J.Walker, 6th edition,
        John-Wiley & sons, New York 2001.

     2. “ Physics” , M.Alonso and E.J.Finn, Addison-Wiley, 1992.

     3. “ Introduction to Electrodynamics” , D.J.Griffiths ,PHI, 1998.


                               Observations and results

   1.     Distance, r = __________________________ m

   2.     Length of specimen, l = __________________ m

   3.     No. of turns per unit length of solenoid , n = 1600 turns/m .

   4.     Area of cross-section of rod , S = 1.84 x 10-5 m2 .

   5.     Horizontal component of earth’ s magnetic field ,BE = 3.53 x 10-5 T .




                                            85
Table : Current through S & deflection
Current   Deflection (forward current) Deflection (reverse current)   Deflection (forward current)
I (A)           Degree.                         Degree
           1       2      avg   Tan       1       2    avg   Tan       1      2      avg   Tan
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.4
1.3.
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0




                                          86
Calculations:

      1.        Attach graph of Tanθ vs. I.

      2.        cf = _____________________

                dg = ____________________

      3.        Calculation of retentivity MO :


                Calculation of coercivity BO :

      Results:

                Retentivity MO = _______________

                Coercivity BO = ________________



      (One graph paper required).




                                              87
Experiment 14

                              Electromagnetic Induction

Apparatus:

Metallic semi–circular arc (radius 40 cm), supporting frame, movable weights, bar
magnets measurement board consisting of voltmeter, milli – ammeter, resistance
condenser and diode.

Purpose of experiment:

To verify Faraday’ s laws of electromagnetic induction.

Basic Methodology:

A bar magnet is made to pass through a coil .The resulting emf produced by Faraday’ s
effect charges a capacitor .The voltage of the capacitor is a measure of the induced emf .

I.     Introduction

I.1   Faraday’ s law states that a charge in magnetic flux ( ) through a closed conducting
      circuit induces an electro motive force (emf) in the circuit .
                                              dΦ
                                         = −              --------------------------------(1)
                                               dt
      The emf      is proportional to the rate of change of the flux through the coil. The
      minus sign is related to the fact that the induced emf opposes the change in the flux
      linking the circuit .In MKS system has units of Volts (V), while units of Weber
      (W) .In this experiment we will measure certain effects leading from Faraday’ s law
      and will hence indirectly verify the law.

      The setup (fig1) basically consists of a bar magnet attached to a metallic arc. The
      frame the            arc is suspended at the
      center so that the whole frame can freely
      oscillate in its plane. Movable weights
      are provided on the diagonal arm whose
      position is can be altered, leading to a
      variation of the period of oscillation from
      about 1.5 sec to 3 sec. As it oscillates the
      magnet passes through two copper coils.
      (Connected in series) of about 10,000
      turns.

                                                                     fig 1

      As the magnet passes through the coils the flux through the coils changes with
      time as shown in fig 2. The induced emf is generated in the coils in the form of two
      pulses with opposite sign for each swing .The pulse width is the time over which
      the flux through the coil changes during a swing. The maximum value of o of emf
      corresponding to the maximum value of

                                             88
dΦ
                        . This is related to the maximum velocity vrms of the magnet.
      dt

I.2. Calculation of vrms :

     The maximum velocity of the magnet is clearly
     obtained at the equilibrium point i.e. at the
     bottom of the swing .The velocity vrms can be
     easily calculated. If M is the mass of the frame
     and magnet, l is the distance of the center of
     mass from the point of suspension of frame and
     magnet , and O is the initial release angle , then
     by conservation of energy, we have
      1
          2   I   2
                  max   = Mg l ( 1 − cos   O   ) = 2 M g l sin 2   O

                                                           2
     --------------------(1)
     Thus
                  M gl
        max = 2            sin O         ----------------(2)
                     I           2
                              M gl
     Thus the quantity                is actually the natural                            fig 2
                                 I
     frequency of small oscillations .Thus if T is the time period of small oscillations ,
     then
                               I
                 T =2                --------------------------------------------------(3)
                            M gl
     Using eq (3) and vmax = R max (R is the radius of the arc) we get
                                    4 R
                            v max =        sin O ------------------------------------(4)
                                      T          2

I.4. We now give a rough argument that the maximum value of the emf                     max   =   o   is
     proportional to vmax .

     As the magnet moves, the flux through the coil changes. Clearly = ( ) ,where
       is the angular position of the magnet . Hence
                                       dΦ          dΦ d              dΦ
                                 = −        = −               = −            -----------------(5)
                                        dt         d      dt          d
     Thus, is also a function of , i.e.
                                           dΦ ( )
                                ( ) = −              ( ) --------------------------------------(6)
                                            d
                                               dΦ
     At the equilibrium point = max but            = 0 hence eq = 0 . The maximum of the
                                                d
     emf
      max occurs at and angle max slightly before the equilibrium point
                                      dΦ
                        max = O = −              ( max ) ----------------------------------------(7)
                                      d max
                                                                                      v
     Since the point max is close to the equilibrium = 0, ( max) ≈ max = max . Hence
                                                                                        R

                                                           89
1 dΦ
                  max   =   O   ≈ −           v max -------------------------------------(8)
                                 R d      max



      Thus o ∝ = v max approximately and the constant of proportionality depends only
      on the geometry of the apparatus and is independent of the angle O .Hence a graph
      of o vs. vmax is expected to approximate a straight line.

I.4   In this experiment we will measure   o by   charging a capacitor by the induced emf .

      The capacitor is connected in series with the coil along with a diode and a resistance
      R. The resistance Rint is the internal resistance of the coil and forward resistance of
      diode and is about 500 Ω .The diode allows current to flow only in one direction and
      hence the capacitor charges only during one swing of the complete oscillation .If the
      time constant RC is small compared to the pulse width τ then the capacitor gets fully
      charged to the maximum voltage o in the swing. However if RC > τ then the
      capacitor gets fully charged only after several swings .




                             fig 3
      The voltage across the capacitor after n swings can be measured by closing the
      switch S and discharging the capacitor through a voltmeter.

      The total charge delivered to the capacitor during each swing is
            final
                   ε dt    f
                             1 dΦ
        q=              =−        dt
           initial
                    R      i
                             R dt


          =
              1
                (Φ1 − Φ 2 ) = ∆ Φ                  -------------------------------------- (9)
              R                R

I.5. Electromagnetic damping in an oscillating system

      Successive Oscillations of the metal arc do not have the same amplitude . This is due
      to damping
      whose primary sources are i) air friction ii) friction at the point of suspension iii)
      electromagnetic damping due to Lenz’ s law .

      The damping oscillation of the system can be modeled by the differential equation
      (assuming small damping )
               d2 θ    ωO d θ
                  2
                    +           + ω 2 θ = 0 ---------------------------------------(10)
               dt       Q dt


                                             90
M gl
  where ωO =
         2
                        . The third term arises from the restoring force while the second
                   I
                             dθ
      term proportional to        represents damping . The strength of the damping is
                             dt
      characterized by the parameter Q , called the quality factor of the system .Small Q
      implies large damping, while large values of Q (Q>1) represents small damping .
      The solution θ(t) to eq (10) can be shown to be oscillatory but with an amplitude
      which decreases with time as
                                                         ωt
                                                     −
                        θ A ( t ) = θ AO e               2Q
                                                                               ------------------------------------- (11)
                                                                        2π
      Thus after n oscillations i.e . t = n T = n                             the amplitude decreases from the initial
                                                                        ωO
      amplitude θAO by
                                                                       πn
                                                                   −
                                    θAn = θAO e                        Q
                                                                             -------------------------------------- (12)
                                       π
      Thus        ln θ A n = ln θ   AOn  −  --------------------------------------------- (13)
                                   Q
      A plot of ln θAn vs n is expected to be a straight line . The quality factor can be read
      off from the slope .

II.   Setup and Procedure:

      Part A: Measurement of time period T for small oscillations

      1   Make sure that the equilibrium position of the metal arc + magnet is at = 00 . If
          not adjust the position of the weights to ensure this.

      2. Check that the oscillation of the arc through the coils are free and that the arcs
         does not touch the sides of the coils when oscillating .

      3. Displace the metal arc by a small angle (50 - 100) and measure the time taken for
         a few (say5) oscillations .The time period T can be obtained .

          Repeat step 3 for different angles.

          Part B: Measurement of             o   .

      1. Connect the circuit as in fig 3. Take C = 100 F and R to be small (~ 100 ).
         Connect the two coils in series.

      2. Keep the switch in the off position.

      3. Choose an initial displacement o (say 400) and release the magnet. As the
         induced current flows in the circuit the millimeter registers kicks. The kicks stop
         after a few oscillations when the capacitor has become fully discharged.

      4. Flip the switch to the ON position and measure                                     o   as the maximum voltage
         recorded by the voltmeter.

      5. Repeat for different values of                       o   = 400, 350, 300, 250, 200, 150, 100.

                                                                   91
6. Calculate vmax for each case and plot     o vs.   vmax .

    Part C: Charge delivered to the capacitor.

    1. Choose a large value of R(say 1k ) in the circuit of fig 3. The time constant RC
       is thus greater than ( is the approximately estimated by dividing the magnet
       length by vmax).

    2. With a given release angle o , measure the voltage V across the capacitor after
        n complete oscillations , n = 1, 2, 3, … … … 6.
       (Caution: Each time, i.e. after n oscillations, prevent further oscillations by
        stopping the frame by hand and measure V.Also make sure that the capacitor is
        completely discharged each time before making a new measurement ) .

    3. Repeat for three different values of R.

    4. Calculate q = CV for the charge depositing in the capacitor and plot qn vs. n.

    Part D: Electromagnetic damping

    1. Let the coils be open. There will be no electromagnetic damping during the
       oscillations. Give a small (~ 200) displacement to the metal arc and measure the
       amplitude An after n swings (n = 1, 2, 3… ..)

        Plot ln An vs n and calculate the quality Q0 (without EM damping) .Repeat for
        another initial displacement.

    2. Now connect the coils in series (B to C) and short the ends A & D. Measure for
       amplitudes An ( n =1,2,3… … ) for the same two values of initial displacement as
       in step 1. Plot ln An vs. n ( it will be useful to plot all the four graphs on the
       same graph sheet) and obtain the value of quality Q with electromagnetic
       damping .
       Note: Since damping is small you may have to take measurement for a large (~
       10) number of swings.

III. Exercises and Viva Questions

    1. What is the advantage in having a large number of turns in the coil? What is the
       effect of connecting the two coils in series or in parallel?

    2. Show that the angular frequency for small oscillations of the metal frame is given
           M gl
       by
             I
    3. What is the effect of moving the weights closer to the point of suspension?
       Would the emf be the same for the same release angle?

    4. Find a way of estimating the angle/ position at which the maximum emf occurs

    5. Estimate the pulse width for a given        0 (from    your observation). Would the emf
       be the same for the same release?


                                           92
6. The charge deposited per swing (eq 9) appears to be constant (depending only on
       total change flux and not on the velocity or o). Does your observation of q
       depend on o? If so why?

    7. What is the function of the diodes in this experiment? What would happen if the
       diode were absent in the circuit?

    8.    Give reasons why the graph ln       0   vs n (Part D) could deviate from a straight
         line?

                                                          ω0 t
                                                      −                                          1
    9.   Verify by substitution that θ( t ) = θ 0 e       2Q
                                                                 cos (ωt + α )   ( ω = ω0 1 −       ) is
                                                                                                4Q2
         a solution of the differential eq(10).

    10. Give some practical applications of Faraday’ s law.

References:

    1. “ Physics” ,M.Alonso and E.J.Finn, Addison-Wiley, 1992

    2. “ Introduction to Electrodynamics” , D.J.Griffiths ,PHI, 1998.




                                              93
Observations and Results

 Radius of Arc = 40 cm

      Part A (Time period T)
     S.No        No. of Oscillations                  Time (sec)        T(sec)           Mean T(sec)

     1

     2

     3



Part B : Measurement of                0


C= ________________________ F

         0   (degrees)                     vmax (cm/sec) (calculated)                0

              40
              35
              30
              25
              20
              15
              10

Plot the graph of            0   vs vmax

Part C : Charge delivered to the capacitor

C = ____________________________ F

 0   = ___________________________

Table I

     No.of          R1 =                            R2 =                     R3 =
     swings
                                    q = CV                      q = CV                         q = CV
      N
                         V              -C           V            -C             V               -C
     1
     2
     3
     4
     5

                                                           94
6
     7
     8
     9
     10

Plot the graph of q vs n .

Part D : Electromagnetic Damping
Table II
No . of swings       1 = ___________               Amplitude    An    2   = ___________
                  Without              With EM               Without EM        With EM
                  EM damping           damping               damping           damping
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Plot the graph of ln   An   vs n


Discuss briefly how this experiment has verified Faraday’ s law .


(Three graph papers required).




                                            95
Experiment 15

                          Electrical Resistivity of Semiconductors

Apparatus

Four probe assembly with oven, semiconducting sample, current source, voltmeter etc.


Objective:
 To study the temperature variation of electrical resistivity of a semiconducting materials
using four-probe technique and determine the bandgap of the semiconductor.

Theory
 The Ohm' law in terms of the electric field and current density is given by the relation,
        s
    →       →
    E=ρJ                                                                               (1)
where ρ is electrical resistivity of the material. For a long thin wire-like geometry of
uniform cross-section or for a long parellelopiped shaped sample of uniform cross-section,
the resistivity ρ can be measured by measuring the voltage drop across the sample due to
passage of known ( constant) current through the sample as shown in Fig. 1a . This simple
method has following drawbacks:

•       The major problem in such method is error due to contact resistance of measuring
        leads.

•       The above method cannot be used for materials having random shapes.

•       For some type of materials soldering the test leads would be difficult.
•       In case of semiconductors, the heating of samples due to soldering results in injection
        of impurities into the materials thereby affecting the intrinsic electrical resistivity.
        Moreover, certain metallic contacts form schottky barrier on semiconductors.
    To overcome first two problems, a collinear equidistant four-probe method is used.
This method provides the measurement of the resistivity of the specimen having wide
variety of shapes but with uniform cross-section. The soldering contacts are replaced by
pressure contacts to eliminate the last problem discussed above.


                    l/a

                                                               +I           +V               -V   -I
I                                   I
                                                                    1       2                3         4




                   (a)                                                  r               r’
                                                                                 (b)

                                                 96
Fig 1

  In this method, four pointed, collinear equispaced probes are placed on the plane
surface of the specimen (Fig.1b). A small pressure is applied using springs to make the
electrical contacts. The diameter of the contact (which is assumed to be hemispherical)
between each probe and the specimen surface is small compared to the spacing between
the probes. Assume that the thickness of the sample d is small compared to the spacing
between the probes s (i.e., d << s). Then the current streamlines inside the sample due to
                                                                     →       ∂V ∧
a probe carrying current I will have radial symmetry, so that E = −               r and from
                                                                             ∂r
eqn.(1),
   ∂V ∧        →
       r = −ρ J                                                               (2)
   ∂r
  If the outer two probes (l and 4) are current carrying probes, and the inner two probes (2
& 3) are used to monitor the potential difference between the inner two points of contact,
then total current density at the probe point ‘2’ which is at a distance r from probe ‘1’ and
r’ from probe ‘4’ can be written as,
                                                                                      (3)
              ∧   ^
  →
         I    r r′
  J=            −
       2πd r r ′

From eqns. (2) and (3) potential difference between probes (2) and (3) can be written as,
      Iρ
           2s
                1   1          I
V=                +      dr =    ρ ln 2
     2πd        r 3s − r      πd
           s                                                                        (4)
       Vπd
∴ ρ=
       I ln 2
Now temperature variation of resistivity is given by: ρ = ρ 0 exp( E g / kT ) , where Eg is the
bandgap of the semiconductor. A plot of ln(ρ) vs. 1/T would be a straight line with a slope
of E g / k . Hence bandgap Eg can be determined from the slope of the straight line. For
convenience, usually ln(ρ) is plotted as a function of 1000/T (instead of 1/T) and Eg is
calculated by taking into account the 1000 factor..

Experimental Set-up:
        The four-probe assembly consists of four spring loaded probes arranged in a line
with equal spacing between adjacent probes. These probes rest on a metal plate on which
thin slices of samples (whose resistivity is to be determined) can be mounted by insulating
their bottom surface using a mica sheet. Black leads are provided for carrying current and
red leads for voltages measurements. The sample, usually, is brittle, hence do not attempt
to mount the sample yourself. This assembly is mounted in a lid of an oven, so that the
four probes and the sample can be kept inside the oven and sample can be heated up to a
temperature of 200° C. The temperature inside the oven can be measured by inserting a
thermometer through a hole in the lid.
        The constant current is supplied through probes 1 and 4 by a constant current
source. The value of the current can be read from the LED display on the unit. The digital
voltmeter is used to measure the voltage drop between probes 2 and 3. It uses the same
LED display through a toggle switch. It operates in two modes xl and x10 with maximum
of 199.9 mV and 1.999 V, respectively. Oven can be heated to low (L) or high (H)
temperatures through the electric supply for it. There is an indicator LED which glows

                                              97
when the oven is turned on

                                      Milli-Ammeter
                  Constant                                                    Milli-Voltmeter
                 Current source                        V
                                                               I




                                            1     2        3           4           Probes




                                                 S     S           S
                                                 Fig. 2
Procedure:


   1. Make the connections as shown in Figure 2.
   2. Set some suitable low value of current (2 to 4 mA) from the constant current
      source. Note down this reading.
   3. Switch the LED display to milli-voltmeter mode. Note the temperature and voltage
      between probes 2 and 3 (V1).
   4. Switch on the oven supply. Record the voltage between the inner probes as a
      function of temperature using the method described in the previous step.
   5. Determine the experimental resistivity as a function of temperature using equation
      (4) and the measured voltage and current.
   6. Express your resistivity data in Ohm-cm unit and temperature in Kelvin(K). Plot
      ln(ρ) vs. 1000/T(K) and see that it is a straight line. From the slope of the line
      (choose only the linear portion of the curve), calculate Eg (bandgap of the
                                                          Eg
      semiconductor) using the relation: ρ = ρ 0 exp(         ) , where k = 8.617 x10 −5 eV/K.
                                                         2kT
   7. Estimate error in measured resistivity

Observation Table:

Set Current I=

   Sl     Temperature        1000/T(K-1) Voltage           Rsistivity      ln(ρ)
   no.    in C                           (V)               ρ




Useful data:
Distance between probes,          s=2 mm,       Thickness of the sample, d=0.5mm

Calculation:
Plot ln(ρ) vs. 1000/T and use the straight line portion of the graph to calculate the slope of
                                                  98
the straight line. Slope = Eg/2k*1000 which yields Eg in eV for the semiconductor
material under study.
(One graph paper required)
.
Reference:

D. K. Schroder, “ Semiconductor Material and Device Characterization” , John Willey &
          Sons Inc. 1990, Chap 1.


Appendix:
Electrical conductivity of materials
The electrical resistance of matter changes with temperature. The number of quasi-free electrons
increases with rising temperature which causes the current to increase and the resistance to
decrease. On the other hand, the ions of the crystal lattice oscillate more strongly with increasing
temperature, thus hindering the electron movement, so that the current decreases and the
resistance increases.
In conductors (e.g. metals such as Cu, Ag, Al) the second effect dominates, since at room
temperature nearly all conduction electrons are quasi-free and contribute to the electron gas. A
rise in temperature does not considerably influence their number, so the resistance of metals
increases with temperature. Generally this is only a small effect, which can be the other way round
in some special alloys!
In semiconductors and isolators the first effect dominates, as a rise in temperature can increase
the number of quasi-free electrons considerably: Due to the stronger atomic binding only few
quasi-free electrons exist at room temperature. Rising temperature thus leads to a decrease of the
electrical resistance. Electrical conductors show an approximately linear dependence between
temperature and resistance. Let R0 and Rt be the resistances at temperatures t0 and t1
respectively. Then                          R t = R 0 (1 + β(t1 − t 0 ))                    (1)

The temperature coefficient β characterizes the relative change in resistance per 1 ° or K.
                                                                                     C
Semiconductors show an approximately exponential temperature dependence:
                        b
           R( T ) = a ⋅ e T , where a and b are empirical constants.                        (2)
Table 1: Data of typical materials used for resistors.

 Material                              Resistivity ρ at 20° /Ωm
                                                           C Ω             Temperature coefficient α at
                                                                                   20° / K-1
                                                                                      C

 Silver                                            1.6 . 10-8                       3.8 . 10-3

 Copper                                            1.7 . 10-8                       3.9 . 10-3

 Aluminum                                          2.8 . 10-8                       3.9 . 10-3

 Iron                                              10 . 10-8                        5.0 . 10-3

 Mercury                                           96 . 10-8                        0.9 . 10-3

 Nichrome                                         100 . 10-8                        0.4 . 10-3

 Carbon                                           3500 . 10-8                      - 0.5 . 10-3

 Silicon                                              640                          - 7.5 . 10-2


                                                    99
Experiment 16

                                    Planck’s constant

Apparatus:

Photoelectric cell, DC source, DC millimeter, Variac (AC) (0-260V), AC ammeter,
Tungsten filament lamp (60 W), Monochromatic filters.

Purpose of experiment:

To measure the value of Planck’ s constant ‘h’ .

Basic methodology:

Light from a tungsten filament lamp (assumed to be a black body source) is passed
through a
Monochromatic filter and made to fall on a photoelectric cell. The slope of the graph ln Iph
    1
vs.   , leads to a determination of Planck’ s constant.
    T

I     Introduction:

I.1   The electromagnetic radiation emitted by a black body ( a perfect absorber and
      emitter of electromagnetic radiation ) is spread continuously over the entire
      electromagnetic        spectrum. It was Planck who first gave the law for black body
      radiation based on the idea that electromagnetic radiation is composed of quanta
      called photon of energy
        = h , where is the frequency of radiation and h is Planck’ s constant.


I.2   Planck’ s law for radiation from a black
      body gives the energy of the radiation in
      the frequency range to + d . This is
      denoted as U( ) d and is given by
                     8 π h ν3     1
        U ( ν ) dν =     3      hν
                                       dν --------(1)
                       c
                              e k T −1

      In eq. (1), c = 3 X 108 m/s is the speed of
      light, K = 1.38 X 10-23 J/K is the Boltzman
      Constant. Fig. 1 shows a graph of U ( ) vs. for given temperature T.

                                               hν
        In the high frequency region, where       >>1, eq. (1) can be approximated as
                                               kT
                                         hν
                            8πhν 3 − kT
                    U (ν) =        e     -----------------------------(2)
                              c3
      Showing an exponential decrease in the energy density with frequency.


                                               100
I.3     In this experiment, a tungsten filament lamp is taken to be a black body radiator.
        Using a monochromatic filter, radiation with frequency in the visible region is
        selected. For the range of temperatures of the tungsten filament, the energy density
        can be taken to be given by eq. (2). The energy density at the chosen frequency is
        indirectly measured by measuring the photocurrent Iph generated upon exposing a
        photocell to the radiation. From the properties of the photoelectric effect, it is known
        that the photocurrent is proportional to the intensity of the radiation. Thus
                                             hν
                                    8πhν 3 − kT
                  I ph ∝ U (ν ) ≈         e       ------------------------------------ (3)
                                      c3

                          hν     8πhν 3  hν
        or          ln I ph = −
                             + ln 3 = −     + cons tan t ------------------(4)
                          kT       c     kT
         Hence the graph of ln Iph Vs 1/T will be a straight line of slope of magnitude
h /K.

I.4     The temperature of the tungsten filament can be varied by changing the current
        through it. The temperature of the filament can be estimated by measuring the
        resistance R of the filament. The variation of R with temperature for tungsten is
        given by the empirical formula (T is expressed in oC )
                                R = Ro ( 1 +αT +βT2 ) ----------------------------(5)

        Where
                    R34oC = Resistance at 34oC = 57Ω and 64Ω for set 1 and set 2
                          = 5.24 X 10-3 (oC)-1
                        β = 0.7. X 10-6 (oC)- 2

        A calibration graph can be obtained by drawing the graph of eq. (5).Then, knowing
        the resistance R = V/I of the filament the temperature T (oC) can be obtained from
        the calibration graph.


II.      Set-up and Procedure

         1. Complete the circuit with Tungsten lamp and photocell as shown in Fig. (2)

         2. Choose and set the colour of the monochromatic filter (say red).

         3. Using the variac, vary the AC voltage to the tungsten filament from 80V to
            220V
            In steps of 20V.

         4. Measure the AC current to the tungsten and the DC photocurrent Iph.

         5. Repeat the measurements for three filters in all (say red, blue and green).

         6. Prepare the calibration graph of R (resistance of filament) by using eq. (5) to
            calculate R for value of T (oC) = 400, 600, 800, 1000 … 2000.
            Plot and find the calculated value of R vs. T by a best fit straight line.



                                                  101
7. Calculate the resistance R = V/I from your measurement and use the
         calibration graph to read off temperature of the filament, against the value of
         the resistance




                                             Fig. 2


III. Exercise and Viva Questions:

      1.     What is the meaning of the quantity U( ) in the Planck’ s black body radiation
             law?

      2.     Give the approximate form of the energy density for (h /KT) <<1 and
           (h /KT) >>1.

      3.     What is the purpose of using a photocell in this experiment?

      4.     Use the energy density expression to argue how the photocurrent should
             change upon varying the frequency, keeping the variac voltage same. How
             will Iph change if the frequency is kept constant but the variac voltage is
             varied? Verify your expectations from your observations.

      5.     Argue how Iph would change as the variac voltage is changed if the tungsten
             lamp were allowed to illuminate the photocell without using a filter in-
             between. What frequency would contribute most to the photocurrent?

      6.     Study the photoelectric effect and list the characteristics of the photoelectric
             effect which can only be explained by the quantum nature of light.

      7.     Is our assumption that Iph U( ) always right ? Is it true that radiation of any
             frequency will give rise to a photocurrent?



                                             102
8.   Look up the value of work function of tungsten and calculate the cut off
            frequency    o for tungsten.


       9.   We have taken the tungsten filament to be a black body radiator. What
            qualitative change would we expect if it were taken to be an imperfect black
            body?

       10. What is the significance of the Planck’ s constant in physics?


References:

1.   “ Physics” , M. Alonso and J. Finn, Addison Wesley 1992.

2.   “ Modern Physics “ , A. Beiser, McGraw Hill Inc., 1995.




                                           103
Experiment 16

                                 Planck’s constant

                               Observations and Results

1.   Calibration of R Vs T : Ro (calculated) = _____________________Ω

                                                 Table 1.

                                 T (oC)                     R(Ω)




        Plot a graph of R Vs T and fit a straight line.




                                           104
2.     Verification of photocurrent (Iph) with variac voltage (V)
                                            Table 2.

                                                     Photocurrent

 Variac                       Iph (mA)                                  ln Iph
 Voltage
  (V)            Filter 1     Filter 2       Filter 3       Filter 1   Filter 2    Filter 3
                 =_____       =_____         =_____         =_____     =_____      =_____

     80

     100

     120

     140

     160

     180

     200

     220


3.     Calculation of temperature (T) of filament

                                         Table 3.

                        Filament     Resistance
       Variac          Current I      R = V/I            T (oC)        T (K)      1/T (K-1)
      Volatage(V)       (A)            (Ω)              Calculated

           80

           100

           120

           140

           160

           180

           200

           220


                                               105
4.   Plot graphs of ln Iph Vs 1/T (K-1) for the three filter colours.

5.   Calculate the Planck’ s constant from the slope of the graphs.


Calculation:


Results:
               The measured value of Planck’ s constant h = ______________________

               The known value of Planck’ s constant        h = ______________________

               % error in the experiment:




                                              106
Experiment 17
                      Study of magnetic field along the axis of a coil
Apparatus:
Circular coil, power supply, switching keys, magnetic needle, sliding compass box etc.

Objective
To measure the magnetic field along the axis of a circular coil and verify Biot-Savart law.

Theory
For a circular coil of a n turns, carrying a current I, the magnetic field at a distance x from
the coil and along the axis of the coil is given by

          µ 0 nIR 2             1
B( x) =                                                                                      (1)
             2        (R   2
                               + x2   )
                                      32




where R is the radius of the coil.

In this experiment, the coil is oriented such that the plane of the coil is vertical and parallel
to the north-south direction. The axis of the coil is parallel to the east-west direction . The
net field at any point x along the axis, is the vector sum of the fields due to the coil B(x)
and earth’ s magnetic field BE (Fig 1).

            B( x)
∴ tan θ =                                                BE θ
             BE

                                                                   B(x)

                                                             Fig 1.
Procedure

The appratus consists of a coil mounted perpendicular to the base. A sliding compus box is
mounted on aluminium rails so that the compus is always on the axis of the coil.

1. Orient the apparatus such that the coil is in the north-south plane.
2. Adjust the levelling screws to make the base horizontal . Make sure that the compus is moving
   freely.
3. Connect the circuit as shown in the figure.
4. Keep the compus at the center of the coil and adjust so that the pointers indicate 0-0.
5. Close the keys K and KR ( make sure that you are not shorting the power supply) and adjust the
   current with rheostat, RH so that the deflection is between 50 to 60 degrees. The current will be
   kept fixed at this value for the rest of the experiment.
6. Note down tha readings        1        θ   θ
                                   and 2 . Reverse the current and note down 3 and 4θ        θ
.7. Repeat the experiment at intervals of 1cm along the axis until the value of the field drops to
10% of its value at the center of the coil. Repeat on both sides of the coil.
8. Draw following graphs:
                          . B(x) as a function of x.
                                                                       2
                                . log(B(x)) as a function of log   R       +x
                                                                                2



Find slope and y-intercept from the graph and verify results with the expression for B(x).

                                                       107
Observations/Calculations
Parameters and constants
. Least count for x measurement=
. Least count for θ measurement=                                              6v                                 1
. No of turns of the coil,n=..                                                                                               1
. Radius of the coil,R=10cm                                mA
                                                            k                      2                            KR                2’
.      Current in the coil,I=....                                                                           2

. Permeability of air, µ0 =4π × 10 −7 N/A 2            P.S ckt                Rh                                1’       1
. Earth’ s magnetic field, BE =0.39×10-4 T                                          To mA




                                                                                                            Fig 2.
Observations

i.       Least count of x-measurement= …
ii.      Least count for θ measurement = …
iii.     No. of turns of the coil (n) = …
iv.      Radius of the coil = …
v.       Current in the coil = … ..A
vi.      Permeability of air (µo) = 4π×10-7 N/A2
vii.     Earth’ s magnetic field BE = 0.39×10-4 Tesla.

Table I

          X      θ1     θ2    θ3    θ4       θ (average)    Tan θ    log(tanθ )            2        2           B(x)=            Log B(x)
          (cm)                           4                       4                 log(R       +x       )       BE tanθ
                                                                                                                (T) (10-4)
          1
          2
          3
          4
          5
          6
          7
          8
          9
          10
          11
          …
          ….

Table II
For other side of the scale … …
          X      θ1     θ2    θ3    θ4       θ (average)    Tan θ    log(tanθ )            2        2           B(x)=            Log B(x)
          (cm)                           4                       4                 log(R       +x       )       BE tanθ
                                                                                                                (T) (10-4)
          1
          2
          3
          4

                                                           108
5
      6
      7
      8
      9
      10
      11
      …
      ….


Calculation:

From the graph of B(x) vs. log (R2+x2), find the slope and intercept from regression
analysis. Slope should be -1.5 according to Biot-Savart law, and intercept value should
match with the value calculated using µo, n, I, and R.

Results:

       Experimental value of exponent (slope) = … .
       Theoretical value of slope = -1.5
       Experimental value of intercept = … .
       Theoretical value of intercept = … .



(Two graph papers required).




References: David J. Griffiths, “ Introduction to Electrodynamics” , Prentice Hall, 2000,
Chap. 5.




                                              109
Experiment 18

                                  Study of Hall Effect

Apparatus

Commercial setup with the following components: electromagnet with power supply, Hall
probe, Semiconductor sample, arrangement for pressure contact, current supply with
meter, voltmeter etc.

Objective:

 To study Hall effect in extrinsic semiconducting samples and determine the type and
density of majority charge carriers. This experiment demonstrates the effect of Lorentz
force.

Introduction:
 Consider a rectangular slab of semiconductor with thickness d kept in XY plane [see
Fig. 1(a)]. An electric field is applied in x-direction so that a current I flows through the
sample. If w is width of the sample and d is the thickness, the current density is given by
Jx=I/wd.



                 Y


                                Jx                       q             W          VH
                         X
             Z
                                                                   d
                                         B




                                       Fig. 1

Now a magnetic field B is applied along positive z axis (fig. 1). If the charge carriers are
positive (negative) and are moving with velocity v along positive (negative) x-axis then
the direction of force experienced by the charge carriers in presence of magnetic field is
along negative y direction. This results in accumulation of charge carriers towards bottom
edge (fig1.). This sets up a transverse electric field Ey in the sample. The potential, thus
developed , along y-axis is known as Hall voltage VH and this effect is called Hall effect.
Assuming Ey to be uniform the Hall voltage is given by
               VH = E y w                                                     (1)
and the hall coefficient RH is given by
                       Ey     V d
                RH =       = H                                                (2)
                      JxB      IB
The majority carrier density n is related to the Hall coefficient by the relation


                                             110
1
               RH =                                                         (3)
                     qn
where q is the charge.

  From Equation (3), it is clear that the sign of charge carrier and density can be estimated
from the sign and value of Hall coefficient RH. RH can be obtained by studying variation
of VH as a function of I for given B.

Experimental Set-up
        Sample is mounted on a sunmica sheet with four spring type pressure contacts. A
pair of green colour leads are provided for current and that of red colour for hall voltage
measurement. Note the direction of current and voltage measurement carefully. Do not
exceed current beyond 10 mA.
        The unit marked "Hall Effect Set-up" consists of a constant current generator
(CCG) for supplying current to the sample and a digital milli voltmeter to measure the
Hall voltage. The unit has a digital display used for both current and Hall voltage
measurement.
        For applying the magnetic field an electromagnet with a constant current supply is
provided. It is capable of generating a magnetic field of 7.5 Kgauss between its pole
pieces. The magnetic field can be measured by gauss meter along with the hall probe
based on the Hall effect.

Procedure

1. Connect the leads from the sample to the "Hall effect Set-up" unit. Connect the
   electromagnet to constant current generator.
2. Switch on the current through sample and measure the hall voltage without any
   magnetic field. There may be some voltage due to misalignment of pressure contacts
   on the sample. This error must be subtracted from the readings.
3. Switch on the electromagnet and set suitable magnetic field (<3 Kgauss). You can
   measure this using Hall probe. (Set magnetic field B=2 kG and B=3 kG for the
   experiment).
4. Insert the sample between the pole pieces of the electromagnet such that I, B and V are
   in proper direction (Fig.1).
5. Record the hall voltage. Also record voltage by reversing both the current and
   magnetic field simultaneously. (Note down data for the first two columns with +B for
   all I’s and then reverse the field (-B) to record data for the next two columns)
6. Keeping the magnitude of magnetic field constant, measure hall voltage as a function
   of I.
7. Repeat step 5 and 6 for various magnetic fields.
Plot VH as a function of I using the averaged data and find the value of Hall coefficient
from the slope of the graph. Hence determine charge carrier density and type of majority
carrier in the given material.
Note down the sample number or details of the sample.



                                            111
Observation Table:
Sample number:         Thickness of the sample:           Magnetic field: B= 2000 Gauss


    Sl.      I        VH1(+I,+B)    VH2(-I,+B)    VH3(+I,-B)     VH4(-I,-B) VH avg
    No.      (mA)
    1        1
    2        2
    3        3
    4        4
    5        5
    6        6
    7        7
    8        8


                                             Magnetic field: B= 3000 Gauss


    Sl.      I        VH1(+I,+B)    VH2(-I,+B)    VH3(+I,-B)     VH4(-I,-B) VH avg
    No.      (mA)
    1        1
    2        2
    3        3
    4        4
    5        5
    6        6
    7        7
    8        8

Plot two graphs and from the slope, calculate Hall coefficient RH.

From the sign of the Hall voltage with the given current and field direction, determine the
type of conductivity in the semiconductor material.

Calculate free carrier density (n) = 1/(q RH) = … . m-3




                                            112
Results:

For the given sample, RH = … … ..
                      n=…….
Type of majority carrier = … …


(Two graph papers required).


Reference: D. K. Schroder, “ Semiconductor Material and Device Characterization” , John
                           Willey & Sons Inc. 1990, Chap 5




                                         113
Experiment 19

                           I-V Characteristic of Solar Cell
Apparatus:
Solar cell, rheostat, ammeter, voltmeter, illumination source, varic and connecting wires.

Purpose of experiment:
To study illuminated characteristics of a solar cell for different illumination levels.

Basic methodology:
A solar cell is illuminated by light having photon energy greater than the band gap energy
of the solar cell. Then, using a proper circuit, the open circuit voltage, short circuit current
and power drawn from the solar cell are measured.


I.         Introduction
I.1   Solar cell is basically a two terminal p-n junction device designed to absorb photon
      absorption through the electrical signal or power in the external circuits. Therefore it
      is necessary to discuss the physics of semiconductor p-n junction diode, which
      converts the optical energy into electrical signals.

I.2   It is well known that doped semiconductors are of two types, p and n- types
      semiconductors depending upon the nature of the charge carriers. In n-type
      semiconductor the free carriers are electrons and in p-type semiconductor, the
      positive charge carriers are holes. Since the semiconductors are electrically neutral,
      in a doped semiconductor the number of free carriers is equal to the lattice ions
      present in the semiconductor. The nature of the semiconductor can be defined from
      the location of Fermi energy level (EF) in the band structure of the semiconductor as
      shown in Fig.1. (The Fermi energy level is defined as the highest filled energy level
      at 0 K). In p-type semiconductor the Fermi level lies just above the valence band
      (EV) and in n-type semiconductor it lies just below the conduction band (EC) as
      shown in Fig. 1. When these two types of semiconductors come in contact, the free
      carriers flow in opposite direction and neutralize each other. This process will
      continue until the Fermi energy levels of the two semiconductors come to the same
      level as shown in Fig. 2.

      The region surrounding the junction thus only contains the uncovered positive ions
      in n-side and uncovered negative ions in p-side. This region is known as the
      depletion region (W) and there are no free carriers available in this region (Figure
      3a). In the depletion region, the nature of Fermi energy level is most important from
      device point of view.

      The variation of different parameters across the depletion region are also shown in
      Fig. 3(b-e).

       _______________________EC                        _________________________EC
                                                           -------------------------------------EF

           ----------------------------------EF
           _______________________EV                        _________________________EV

                                                  114
p-type semiconductor                             n-type semiconductor

         Figure 1. Location of Fermi energy level in p and n type semiconductors.




      Figure 2. Energy bend band diagram of p-n junction diode under no bias condition.
      Vo is the potential difference at the depletion region.

I.3   A p-n junction semiconductor can be used in forward as well as in the reverse
      biasing mode. If V is the applied reverse voltage across the junction then the current
      in the external circuit can be expressed as follows:

                         Lp           Ln              qV

               I = qA          pn +        np     e kT − 1                             (1)
                         τp           τn
      Where,

      Lp,n = Recombination length of holes and electrons in semiconductors.

      τp,n = Life time of holes and electrons.

      A = Surface area of the junction in p-n semiconductor diode.

      pn , np = minority carrier density in n and p sides.

      V = is the applied reverse bias voltage across the junction.

      For a combination of two particular semiconductors, the quantity

                          Lp            Ln
                   qA          pn +          n p = Cons tan t = I rs .
                          τp            τn

      and is known as the reverse saturation current ( Irs ).

I.4   When a radiation of photon energy greater than the band gap energy of the
      semiconductor falls up on the surface across the junction (i.e., region surrounding the
      depletion region), it produces new electron – hole (e-h) pairs. Since there exists a
      junction potential difference as shown in Fig 3, the new carriers flow in opposite
      directions depending on their nature of charge. Under this condition eq. (1) can be
      modified as follows:




                                                115
Lp                      qV

I = qA
          τp
               pn +
                       Ln
                       τn
                            np                    (
                                 e kT − 1 − Aqg op L p + L n   )               ( 2)


Where, gop is the optical generation rate of e-h pairs per (cm3- sec) and V is the
applied




Figure 3. Schematic diagram of p-n junction showing different parameters exist
across the junction [Taken from reference 2].

reverse bias across the p-n junction diode. The second part of the equation is the
current due to optical generation of e-h pairs (Iop). So, the above equation could be
written as


                                       116
qV

       I = I rs    e   kT
                            − 1 − I op                                (3)


Following eq.(2), when the device is short circuited (V=0), there is a short – circuit
current from p to n equal to Iop. The usual (i.e., under dark conditions) V-I
characteristic for diode is shown in Fig. 4 by the dashed line that passes through the
origin (see eq. (1)).




Figure 4. V-I characteristic curves of a photo-diode under dark (------) and
illuminated
 ( ___ ) conditions.

When the optical generation current, Iop is introduced , the nature of the
characteristic curve is modified. In the illuminated condition, the curve passes
through the fourth quadrant also. When the circuit is open, I=0, using applied reverse
bias is also zero, the potential across the junction due to optical generation of
electron – hole pairs, become Voc ( as like V) and one can write from eq. (2),


                  kT             (L   p        )
                                          + L n g op
      Voc =          ln                                     +1                   ( 4)
                   q           Lp               Ln
                                      pn +             np
                               τp               τn

Under this condition the Fermi levels will again change the nature in depletion
region. From the difference of the Fermi levels in n and p-type semiconductors one
can express the open circuited voltage as shown in Fig . 5.




                                                117
Figure 5. Illuminated I-V characteristics for solar cell for two different illuminations


I.5   When we need to use the photodiode as detector application, we usually operate it in
      the 3rd quadrant. If power is to be extracted from the device, the fourth quadrant is
      used. The equivalent circuit for the purpose is shown in Fig. 6. in the experimental
      section. The maximum power delivered through the load RL is when the series
      resistance RS is equivalent to the value of RL as given in the procedure. Again to
      receive maximum power from solar cell, it is designed with large surface area coated
      with appropriate materials to reduce the reflection of the incident light and to reduce
      the recombination. Therefore in solar cell device the junction depth from the surface
      must be less than the recombination length of electron and holes from both sides, so
      that the optically generated carriers can reach the depletion region before
      recombination with the majority carriers in the semiconductors. In most of the cases
      the incident photons penetrate the n and p regions and are absorbed in the depletion
      region.

II.   Set-up and procedure:

      1. Complete the circuit as shown in circuit diagram (figure 6.)




      Figure 6. Circuit diagram of performing the solar cell experiment

      2. Illuminate the solar cell. Adjust the rheostat position for resistance so that the
         volt meter reads zero. This is the short circuit connection. Adjust the variac

                                             118
(maximum up to 230 V) such that ammeter reads a value of about 500 mA. Note
          down the value of the current as short circuited current, Isc .

     3. Increase the resistance by varying the rheostat slowly and note down the readings
        of current and voltage till a maximum voltage is read. Ensure to take at least 15 –
        20 readings in this region.

     4. Disconnect he rheostat and note down the voltage. This is the open circuit
        voltage, Voc.

     5. Repeat the experiment for another intensity of the illumination source.

     6.    Tabulate all readings in Table 1. Calculate the power using the relation, P = V x
          I.

     7. Plot I vs. V with Isc on the current axis at the zero volt position and Voc on the
        voltage axis at the zero current (see Figure 5.)

     8.  Identify the maximum power point Pm on each plot. Calculate the series
        resistance of the solar cell using the formula as follows : RS = [ ∆V/∆I ].
     9. To see the performance of the cell calculate fill factor (FT) of the cell, which can
        be expressed by the formula, FF = [ Pm/Isc Voc ].


III. Exercise and Viva Questions:

     1. What is a semiconductor? What are p and n type semiconductors? Give one
        example of each.

     2. What are the advantages of using doped semiconductor rather than pure
        semiconductors? Why are semiconductor diodes preferred to valve diodes?

     3. What is the meaning of valence and conduction band in semiconductor? How is
        the
        Fermi energy level in a semiconductor defined?

     4. Why do the Fermi energy levels come to the same level when p and n-types of
        semiconductors come in contact?

     5. What is the depletion region? Assuming majority carrier concentration in n-type
        semiconductor is higher than p-type, discuss about the width of the depletion
        region about the physical contact layer.

     6. What is the meaning of recombination, recombination length, and life time of
        carriers in doped semiconductor?

     7. What is reverse saturation current in p-n diode? If you increase the reverse bias
        voltage, what will be the nature of the 3rd quadrant part of the dotted line in
        figure 4?

     8.   Try to deduce equation 4 from equation 2 under proper assumption.


                                            119
9. Discuss the curve in the 4th quadrant of Fig 4.


    10. Give some practical uses of the solar cell.


References:

   1. “ Solid State Electronics Devices “ , B.G.Streetman, Prentice-Hall of India Private
      Limited, Third Edition, 1993.

   2. “ Integrated Electronics “ , J.Millman and C.C.Halkias, McGraw-Hill Kogakusha
      Ltd., International Student Edition.




                                          120
Experiment 19
                               I-V Characteristic of Solar Cell
                                 Observations and Results


                                            Table 1

     S.No.       Illumination 1 : Variac Voltage         Illumination 2 : Variac Voltage
              Volts          Current Power            Volts         Current   Power
              (mV)            (mA)    (mW)            (mV)           (mA)     (mW)




Calculations :

1.     Fill up Table 1 and identify the maximum power point for both illumination levels
       [Pm1 and Pm2 ]

2.       Plot I vs. V for both illumination levels.

3.       Mark Pm1 and Pm2 on the plots.

                                               121
4.     Note down V and I (as in Fig. 5).

5.     Calculate the series resistance and fill factor.


Results:

1.   The I-V characteristic was drawn for given solar cell for two illumination levels.

2.   The open circuit voltages and short circuit currents for two different illuminations
     are measured as :
     Voc1 = ___________;Voc2 = ____________;

     Isc1 = _____________ and Isc2 = ____________

3.   The series resistance of         the   cell   calculated   using   the   two   plots   is
     ______________________.

4.   Fill factor :




                                (One graph paper required).




                                             122
Experiment 20

                           Air wedge: Interference of light
Apparatus

Glass plate, thin wire, beam splitter, light source, traveling microscope etc.

Objective:

To measure the diameter of a given thin wire using interference patterns formed using an
extended source, at the air wedge between two glass plates.

Theory:

Interference effects are observed in a region of space where two or more coherent waves
are superimposed. Depending on the phase difference, the effect of superposition is to
produce variation in intensities which vary from a maximum of ( a1 + a 2 ) 2 to a minimum
of ( a1 − a 2 ) 2 where a1 and a2 are amplitude of individual waves. For the interference
effects to be observed, the two waves should be coherent. Interference patterns can be
observed due to reflected waves from the top and bottom surfaces of a thin film medium.
Because of the extended source, the fringes are localized at or near the wedge.



       Fig (1) shows the cross
sectional view of the two flat glass
plates kept on each other and separated
by a wire at the rightmost end. There is
a thin air film between the two glass
plates due to the wire kept at the right
end.
       The path difference between the two rays r1 and r2 is 2t cos r , where ‘t’ is the air
thickness as shown in the figure
       The condition for dark band is,

                       2tCosr = mλ

       If the incident ray is close to normal ,

                       2t = mλ                         (1)

For m=N, the maximum order of the dark band the path difference will be maximum and
this correspond to the position where the wire is kept .Moreover, here the fringes are equal
thickness fringes. So Eqn (1) can be written as

                       2d = Nλ                         (2)


                                             123
The length ‘L’ shown in the figure can be written as

                       L = Nβ                          (3)

where β is the fringe width. From eq (2) and (3),
                      d=Lλ/2β----------------------------(4)

Procedure:

1. Place the two optically flat glass plates one over the other , so that they touch each
   other at the left end and are separated at the right end by the given thin wire . The
   length of the wire should be perpendicular to the length of the glass plate.

2. Place this assembly on the platform of the microscope such that the length of the glass
   plate is parallel to the horizontal traverse of the microscope.

3. Illuminate the assembly by sodium light. Adjust the glass plate G, such that incident
   light is almost normal to the glass plate wire assembly.

4. Focus the microscope to observe
   the interference patterns

5. Measure the horizontal positions of
   the dark bands in the order of say,
   m, m+5, m+10,......... by traversing
   the microscope horizontally.

6. Determine the length ‘L’ with the
   help of microscope.

7. Plot a graph of horizontal positions
   versus order of dark band. Find out
   the mean fringe width β from the
   graph and calculate the thickness
   of the given wire.


Results:
Thickness of the wire = … … … … … … … .

(One graph paper required).

 Wavelength of the source: 5893 A


References:

1. F. A. Jenkins and H. F. White, “ Fundamentals of Optics” (McGraw Hill, 1981),
   Chapter 14.
                                                         nd
2. E. Hecht and A. Zajac, “ Optics” , (Addision Wesley, 2 Ed. 1987).




                                             124
Experiment 21

                                     Newton’s Rings

Apparatus:

Traveling microscope, sodium vapour lamp, plano-convex lens, plane glass plate,
magnifying lens.

Purpose of the experiment:

To observe Newton rings formed by the interface of produced by a thin air film and to
determine the radius of curvature of a plano-convex lens.

Basic Methodology:

A thin wedge shaped air film is created by placing a plano-convex lens on a flat glass
plate. A monochromatic beam of light is made to fall at almost normal incidence on the
arrangement. Ring like interference fringes are observed in the reflected light. The
diameters of the rings are measured.


I.    Introduction:

I.1   The phenomenon of Newton’ s rings is an illustration of the interference of light
      waves reflected from the opposite surfaces of a thin film of variable thickness. The
      two interfering beams, derived from a monochromatic source satisfy the coherence
      condition for interference. Ring shaped fringes are produced by the air film existing
      between a convex surface of a long focus plano-convex lens and a plane of glass
      plate.

I.2. Basic Theory:

      When a plano-convex lens (L) of long focal length is placed on a plane glass plate
      (G) , a thin film of air I enclosed between the lower surface of the lens and upper
      surface of the glass plate.(see fig 1). The thickness of the air film is very small at the
      point of contact and gradually increases from the center outwards. The fringes
      produced are concentric circles. With monochromatic light, bright and dark circular
      fringes are produced in the air film. When viewed with the white light, the fringes
      are coloured.

      A horizontal beam of light falls on the glass plate B at an angle of 450. The plate B
      reflects a part of incident light towards the air film enclosed by the lens L and plate
      G. The reflected beam (see fig 1) from the air film is viewed with a microscope.
      Interference takes place and dark and bright circular fringes are produced. This is
      due to the interference between the light reflected at the lower surface of the lens and
      the upper surface of the plate G.




                                              125
Fig 1

For the normal incidence the optical path difference between the two waves is nearly
2 t, where is the refractive index of the film and t is the thickness of the air film.
Here an extra phase difference occurs for the ray which got reflected from upper
surface of the plate G because the incident beam in this reflection goes from a rarer
medium to a denser medium. Thus the conditions for constructive and destructive
interference are (using = 1 for air)
            2t=m            for minima; m =0,1,2,3… … … … … ..             ------------
(1)

                     1
and     2 t = m+        λ for maxima; m = 0,1,2,3… … … … … . -------------(2)
                     2
Then the air film enclosed between the spherical surface of R and a plane surface
glass plate, gives circular rings such that (see fig 2)




                     Fig. 2


                                       126
rm2 = (2R-t)t
      where rm is the radius of the mth order dark ring .(Note: The dark ring is the mth dark
      ring excluding the central dark spot).

      Now R is the order of 100 cm and t is at most 1 cm. Therefore R>>t. Hence
                              (R − t ) 2 + rm = R 2
                                            2
                                                        rm = (2R − t ) t
                                                         2

                       2
      (neglecting the t term ), giving
                                  r2
                            2t ≈ m
                                  R
      Putting the value of “ 2 t” in eq(1) gives
                                 r2
                       mλ ≈ m               rm ≈ m λ R , m =0,1,2,3… … ----------------(3)
                                              2

                                 R
      and eq (2) gives (for the radius rm of mth order bright ring )
                           2
                         rm          1                   1
                             = (m + ) λ         rm = m + λ R
                                                 2
                                                                          ----------------------(4)
                          R          2                   2
      Hence for dark rings
                         rm = m λ R                                     --------------------------(5)
      while for bright rings
                                    1
                          rm =    m+   λR ;     m =0,1,2,3… … ------------------------(6)
                                    2
      With the help of a traveling microscope we can measure the diameter of the mth ring
                                        D
      order dark ring = Dm . Then rm = m and hence,
                                         2
                           D2 = 4 m λ R
                             m                                    -----------------------(7)
      So if we know the wavelength , we can calculate R(radius of curvature of the lens).

II.   Setup and Procedure:

      1. Clean the plate G and lens L thoroughly and put the lens over the plate with the
         curved surface below B making angle with G(see fig 1).

      2. Switch in the monochromatic light source. This sends a parallel beam of light.
         This beam of light gets reflected by plate B falls on lens L.

      3. Look down vertically from above the lens and see whether the center is well
         illuminated. On looking through the microscope, a spot with rings around it can
         be seen on properly focusing the microscope.

      4. Once good rings are in focus, rotate the eyepiece
         such that out of the two perpendicular cross wires,
         one has its length parallel to the direction of travel
         of the microscope. Let this cross wire also passes
         through the center of the ring system.


                                                 127
5. Now move the microscope to focus on a ring (say, the 20th order dark ring). On
        one side of the center. Set the crosswire tangential to one ring as shown in fig 3.
        Note down the microscope reading . fig 3
        (Make sure that you correctly read the least count of the vernier in mm units)

     6. Move the microscope to make the crosswire tangential to the next ring nearer to
        the center and note the reading. Continue with this purpose till you pass through
        the center. Take readings for an equal number of rings on the both sides of the
        center.

     Precautions:
     Notice that as you go away from the central dark spot the fringe width decreases. In
     order to minimize the errors in measurement of the diameter of the rings the
     following precautions should be taken:

          i)      The microscope should be parallel to the edge of the glass plate.

          ii)     If you place the cross wire tangential to the outer side of a
                  perpendicular ring on one side of the central spot then the cross wire
                  should be placed tangential to the inner side of the same ring on the
                  other side of the central spot.(See fig 3)

          iii)    The traveling microscope should move only in one direction.

III. Exercises and Viva Questions:

     1. What is the medium that causes the interference in this experiment? Why are the
        interference effects due to the glass plate and the lens ignored?

     2. Explain why the interference rings are circular in shape.

     3. Why do the rings get closer as the order of the rings increases?

     4. Show that the difference in radius between adjacent bright rings is given by

                                   1 λR
                     ∆ r = rm + n − rm ≈    for m >>1.
                                   2 m
     5. Show that the area between adjacent rings is independent of m and is given by
        A=    R, for m >>1.

     6. Why is the central spot dark? What would be the reason for not obtaining a dark
        central spot in the experiment?

     7. What would be the shape of the rings if a wedge
        shaped prison went kept inverted on the glass
        plate?

     8. What will be the effect of using a plano-convex
        lens in the experiment?

        Derive an expression for the radius of bright and
        dark rings.
                                           128
9. What would be effect of using white light instead of monochromatic light?

    10. Why is it necessary to use a lens of large value of R in this experiment?

Reference:

    1. “ Physics” ,M.Alonso and E.J.Finn, Addison-Wiley, 1992

    2.   “ Fundamentals of Physics” , D.Halliday , R.Resnick and J.Walker,
           6th edition ,John-Wiley & sons , New York 2001.




                                           129
Observations and results

     1.       Least count of vernier of traveling microscope = ___________________mm

       2. Wave length of light = _______________________ m

                            Table 1: Measurement of diameter of the ring

S.No      Order                       Microscope reading                         Diameter
          of
          ring(m)             Left side                 Right side
                     MS       VS        Net(cm)         MS        VS   Net(cm)   D(cm)      D2(cm2)

1         20

2         18


3         16

4         14

5         12

6         10

7         8

8         6

9         4
10        2


Calculations:

Plot the graph of D2 vs. m and draw the straight line of best fit.

Give the calculation of the best fit analysis below. Attach extra sheets if necessary.


From the slope of the graph, calculate the radius of curvature R of the plano convex lens
    as

                    1
           R = ( slope) ×
                       = ____________________________ cm.
                   4λ
Results: … … … … … … … … … .
(One graph paper required).

                                                  130
Experiment 22

                         Diffraction at a single and double slit

Apparatus:
Optical bench, He-Ne Laser, screen with slits, photo cell, micro meter.

Purpose of the experiment:
To measure the intensity distribution due to single and double slits and to measure the slit
width (d) and slit separation (a).

Basic Methodology:

Light from a He-Ne Laser source is diffracted by single and double slits. The resulting
intensity variation is measured by a photo cell whose output is read off as a current
measurement.

I.    Introduction:

I.1   Single slit diffraction

      We will study the Fraunhofer diffraction pattern produced by a slit of width ‘a’ . A
      plane wave is assumed to fall normally on the slit and we wish to calculate the
      intensity distribution produced on the screen. We assumed that the slit consists of a
      large number of equally spaced point sources and that each point on the slit is a
      source of Huygen’ s secondary wavelets which interfere with the wane lets emanating
      from other secondary points. Let the point sources be at A1, A2, A3… ..and let the
      distance between the consecutive points be .(see fig 1). Thus, if the number of point
      sources be n, then

                                   a = (n-1) .         ---------------------------------------(1).

      We now calculate the resultant field produced by these n sources at point P on the
      screen. Since the slit actually consists of a continuous distribution of sources , we
      will in the final expression, let n go to infinity and go to zero such that n tends to
      a.




                                      Fig 1.

                                               131
Now at point P the amplitudes the disturbances reaching from A1, A2, … .. will be
very nearly the same because the point at a distance which is very large in
comparison to a. However, because of even slightly different path lengths ti the pint
P, the field produced by A1 will differ in phase from the field produced by A2.

For an incident plane waves, the points A1, A2.. are in phase and, therefore, the
additional path traversed by the disturbance emanating from the point A2 A2/. This
follows from the fact the optical paths A1B1P and A2/ B2P are the same. If the
diffracted rays make an angle with the normal to the slit the path difference would
be
                        A2 A2/ = sin                --------------------------------(2)

The corresponding phase difference, φ , would be given by
                            2π
                         φ=       ∆ sin θ                     ----------------------------------- (3)
                             λ
Thus, if the field at the point P due to the disturbance emanating from the point A1 is
a cos(ω t ) then the field due to the disturbance emending from A2 would be
emanating a cos (ω t − φ) . Now the difference in phases of the disturbance reaching
from A2 and A3 will also be φ and thus the resultant field at the point P would be
given by
               E = E 0 [cos(ω t ) + cos(ω t − φ) + ......... + cos(ω t − (n − 1)φ)] ----------- (4)

Because
cos(ω t ) + cos(ω t − φ) + ......... + cos(ω t − (n − 1)φ)
                              nφ
                         sin
                               2                   1
                      =                 cos ω t − ( n − 1)φ            ----------------------- (5)
                               φ                   2
                          sin
                               2


                                  1
Thus,            E = E θ cos ω t − ( n − 1)φ                     --------------------------- (6)
                                  2
Where the amplitude E0 of the resultant field would be given by
                                        nφ
                               E 0 sin
                                         2
                        Eθ =                                  ---------------------------------------
                                       φ
                                   sin
                                       2
(7)
In the limit of n        and         0 in such a way that n          a, we have
                      nφ n 2π           π
                         =     ∆ sin θ → a sin θ
                       2   2 λ          λ
                2π           2π a
Further φ =        ∆ sin θ =      sin θ would tend to zero and we may therefore,
                λ             λ n



                                             132
nφ              π a sin θ
                   E 0 sin         sin
                          2 = nE             λ        sin β
     write E θ =                                   =A                       ------------------------- (8)
                       φ         0
                                       π                β
                                         a sin θ
                       2               λ
     where,
                                           π a sin θ
                A = n E0     and β =                                ----------------------------- (9)
                                               λ


                                sin β
     thus,               E=A          cos(ω t − β)                 ----------------------------(10).
                                  β
     The corresponding intensity distribution is given by
                                         sin 2 β
                               I = I0                           --------------------------------- (11)
                                           β2
     where I0 represent the intensity at = 0.


I.2. Positions of the maxima and minima:


     The variation of the intensity with           is shown in fig 2a. From eq(11) it is obvious
     that the intensity is zero when
                                 =m ,         m     0           --------------------------------- (12)
                                or
                    a sin = m ; m = ±1, ±2, ±3 (minima)
     In order to determine the position of the minima, we differentiate eq(11) wrt.                      and
     set it equal to zero.
     This gives
                             Tan     =       (maxima)                ---------------------------- (13)
     The root      = 0 corresponds to the central maximum. The other roots can be found by
     determining the points of intersections of the curves y =                and y = tan      (fig 2 b,c).
     The intersections occur at         = 1.43 ,         = 2.46     etc. and are known as the first ,
                                                         2
                               sin (1.43 π)
     second maximum etc. Since                               is about 0.0496, the intensity of the first
                                  1.43 π

     maximum is about 4.96% of the central maxima. Similarly the intensities of the
     second and third maximum are about 1.88% and 0.83% of the central maximum
     respectively.




                                                   133
Fig 2




I.3. Double slit diffraction pattern:

     In this section we will study the Fraunhofer diffraction pattern produced by two
     parallel slits (each of width a) separates by a distance d. We would find that the
     resultant intensity distribution is a product of single slit diffraction pattern and the
     interference pattern produced by two point sources separated by a distance d.

     In order to calculate the diffraction we use a method similar to that used for the case
     of a single slit and assume that the slits consists of a large number of equally spaced
     point sources and that each point on the slit is a source of Huygen’ s secondary
     wavelets. Let the point sources be at A1, A2, A3,… .(in the first slit) and at b1, b2,
     b3… (in the second slit)(see fig3). As before, we assume that the distances between
     two consecutive points in either of the slit is . Then the path difference between the
     disturbances reaching the point P from two consecutive point in a slit will be sin .
     The field produced by the first slit at the point P will, there fore, be given by (see eq
                                            134
10)




                             Fig 3

                 sin β
         E1 = A         cos(ω t − β)                     ------------------------------------ (14)
                   β
Similarly, the secondary slit will produce a field
                                 sin β
                         E2 = A          cos(ω t − β − Φ1 ) ------------------------------ (15)
                                   β
                                  2π
at the point P, where Φ 1 =           d sin θ represents the phase difference between the
                                  λ
disturbances from two corresponding points on the slits; by corresponding points we
imply pair of points like (A1 ,B1), (A2 ,B2)… … ., which are separated by a distance d.
Hence the resultant field will be
                                       sin β
                  E = E1 + E 2 = A           [cos(ω t − β) + cos(ω t − β − Φ1 )]
                                          β
                                                                                         sin β
which represents the interference of two waves each of amplitude A                              and
                                                                                           β
differing in phase by 1. Above equation can be written as
                          sin β                      Φ
                E =A            cos γ cos( ω t − β − 1 )
                            β                          2
             Φ       π
where = 1 = d sin θ .
              2      λ
The intensity distribution will be of the form
                        sin 2 β
               I = 4 I0          cos 2 γ              ----------------------------------- (16)
                           β 2




                                            135
sin 2 β
      where I 0         represents the intensity distribution produced by one of the slits. As
                  β2
      a can be seen, the intensity distribution is a product of two terms, the first term
        sin 2 β
                represents the diffraction produced by a single slit of width a and the
          β2
      second term (cos2 ) represents the interference pattern producedby two point sources
      separated by a distance d(see fig4)




                                      Fig 4
I.4. Positions of Maxima & Minima:
     Equation (16) tells us that the intensity is zero wherever = , 2 , 3 …
                  π 3π 5π
     or when γ = ,       ,    .....
                  2 2 2
     The corresponding angles of diffraction will be given by
                    a sin = m ; (m = 1,2,3..)
     and
                                    1
                     d sin θ = n + λ ;           (n = 0, 1, 2, 3… ) ----------------- (17)
                                    2
     Interference maxima occur when
                                    = 0, , 2 , 3 … ..
     or when
                            d sin = 0, , 2 , 3 … ..



                                               136
II.   Setup and Procedure:

      1. Switch on the laser source about 15 minutes before the experiment is due to start.
         This ensures that the intensity of light from the laser source is constant.

      2. Allow the laser beam to fall on a slit formed in the screen provided.

      3. The intensity distribution in the diffraction pattern is measured with the help of a
         photo cell. The photo cell is secured to a mount and is kept as far behind the slit
         as possible. A screen with a slit (0.3mm wide) is fitted in front of the photocell.
         The photo current is measured with a multimeter( A) range and is
         approximately proportional to intensity of the incident light.

      4. Repeat the same procedure for double slit and record the diffraction pattern on
         both the sides of central maximum. The interval between two consecutive
         minima positions of the photocell should be small enough, so that adjacent
         maxima/minima of the intensity distribution are missed.

Precautions:

      1. The laser beam should not penetrate into e yes as this may damages the eyes
         permanently.

      2. The photo cell should be as away from the slit as possible.

      3. The laser should be operated at a constant voltage 220V obtained from a
         stabilizer. This avoids the flickering of the laser beam.

III. Exercises and Viva Questions:

      1. What are the characteristics of light produced by a laser? Can this experiment
         conducted by using any other source?

      2. Verify eq(4).

      3. For a traveling wave, derive the relation between path difference and phase
         differences.

      4. What is the effect on the intensity distribution if the slit with ‘a’ is changed ? If
         the slit separation‘d’ is changed?

      5. What would be the result if the experiment were to be carried out with white
         light?

      6. What is the intensity distribution for a double slit ignoring diffraction effects?

      7. Count the number of interference fringes observed with in the envelope of central
         diffraction maximum. Give an example based on the experiment for the number
         of fringes seen.

      8. What is the effect on the intensity pattern if the distance D between slit and
         photocell is changed?

                                             137
9. How much D change for a bright fringe at the photocell should be replaced by
   dark fringe?

10. What will be the intensity pattern for a 3-slit interference?

Reference:

1. “ Fundamentals of Optics” ,         F.A.jenkins    and    H,E.white,   McGraw-Hill
   International(4th edition),1976.

2. “ Optics” , A.Ghatak, Tata McGraw-Hill(2nd edition), 1992.

3. “ Fundamentals of Physics” , D.Halliday, R.Resnick and J.Walker,         6th edition
   John-Wiley & sons , New York 2001




                                        138
Appendix: Lasers
Introduction:
The light emitted from a conventional light source is(like sodium lamp) is said to be
incoherent because the radiation emitted from different atoms do not, in general, bear any
definite phase relationship with each other. On the other hand, the light emitted from a
laser has a very high degree of coherence and is almost perfectly collimated.
Laser is an acronym for Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation. The
basic principle involved in lasing action is the phenomenon of stimulated emission, which
was predicted by Einestein in 1917. Einestein argued that when an atom is in the excited
state, it can make a transition to a lower energy state through the emission of
electromagnetic radiation; however, in contrast to the absorption process, the emission ca
be occur in two different ways:
i). The first is referred to as spontaneous emission in which an atom in the excited state
       emits radiation even in the absence of any incident. It is thus not stimulated by any
       incident signal but occurs spontaneously.
ii) The second is referred to as stimulated emission in which an incident signal of
       appropriate frequency triggers an atom in an excited state to emit radiation.
Using the phenomenon of stimulated emission, C.H. Townes and A.H. Schawlow, in
1958, worked out the principle of the laser.
Stimulated Emission:
Consider a gas enclosed in a vessel containing free atoms having a number of energy
levels, at least one of which is metastable. By shining white light into this gas many can be
excited, through resonance, from the ground state to excited states. As the electron drop
back, many of them will become trapped in the metastable states. If the pumping light is
intense enough we may obtain a population inversion, i.e. more electrons in the metastable
state than in the ground state.

When an electron in one of these metastable states spontaneously jumps to the ground
state, it emits a photon. As the photon passes by another nearby atom in the same
metastable state, it stimulates that atom to radiate a photon of the exact same frequency,
direction, and polarization as the primary photon and exactly the same phase. Both of
these photons upon passing close to other atoms in their metastable states, stimulates them
to emit in the same direction with the same phase. However, transitions from the ground
state to the excited state can also be stimulated thereby absorbing the primary photons. An
excess of stimulated emission gives population inversion. Thus, if the conditions in the gas
are right, a chain reaction can be developed, resulting in high intensity coherent radiation.

Laser Design:

In order to produce a laser, one must collimate the stimulated emission, and this is done by
properly designing a cavity in which the waves can be used over and over again. For this,
a cavity is attached with two end mirrors with high reflecting power and into this cavity is
introduced an appropriate solid, liquid, or gas having metastable states in the atoms or
molecule. The electrons in these atoms are excoted and produce a population inversion of
atoms in a metastable state, which spontaneously radiate. Photons moving at an appreciate
angle to the walls of the cavity will escape and be lost. Those photons emitted parallel to
the axis will reflect back and forth from end to end. Their chance of stimulating emission
will now depend on the high reflectance at the end mirror and a high population density of
metastable atoms within the cavity. If both these conditions are satisfied the build-up of
photons surging back and forth through the cavity can be self sustaining and the system
will oscillate or lase, spontaneously.

                                            139
Helium – Neon Gas Laser:
The He – Ne laser was first fabricated by A I Jaran and Harriot in 1961 at Bell Telephone
laboratories in USA. This consists of a mixture of helium and neon gases in a ratio of
about 10 : 1, placed inside a long narrow discharge tube.(see fig.5). The pressure inside
the tube is 1 mm of Hg. The gas system is enclosed between a pair of plane mirrors. One
of the mirror is of high reflectivity while the other is partially transparent so that the
energy may be out of the system.




                                     Fig 5

All the lower energy levels of He and Ne are shown in an energy level diagram in fig 6.
The normal state of helium is 1S0 level arising from two valence electrons in 1s orbits. The
excitation of either one of these electrons to the 2s orbit finds the atom in a 1S0 or 3S1 state,
both quite metastable, since transitions to the normal state are forbidden by selection rules.

Neon, with Z = 10, has 10 electrons in the normal state and is represented by the
configuration, 1s2, 2s2, 2p6. when one of the six 2p electrons are excited to the 3s, 3p, 4s,
4p, 4d, 4f, 5s, etc., orbit, triplet and singlet energy levels arise. A sub shell like 2p5,
containing one 2p5 electron. The number and designations of the levels produced are
therefore the same as for two electrons, all triplets and singlets.
As free electrons collide with helium atoms during the electric discharge, one of the two
bound electrons may be excited to 2s orbits, i.e., to the 3S1 or 1S0 states. Since downward
transitions are forbidden by radiation selection rules, these are meta stable states and the
number of excited atoms increases. We therefore have optical pumping, out of the ground
stae 1S0 and in to the metastable states 3S1 and 1S0 .

When one metastable helium atom collides with a non atom in its ground state, there is a
high probability that the high excitation energy will be transferred to the neon, raising it to
one of the 1P1 or 3P0, 3P1, or 3P2 levels of 2p55s. The small excess energy is converted in to
kinetic energy of the colliding atoms.

In this process each helium atom returns to the ground state as each colliding neon atom is
excited to the upper level of corresponding energy. The probability of a neon atom being
raised to the 2p53s or 2p53p levels by collision is extremely small because of the large
energy mismatch. The collision transfer therefore selectively increases the population of
the upper levels of neon.

Since selection rules permit transitions from these levels downward to the 10 levels of
2p53p and these in turn to the 4 levels of 2p53s, stimulated emission can speed up the
process of lasing . Lasing requires only that the 4s and 5s levels of the neon be more
densely populated than the 3p levels. Since the 3p levels of neon are more sparsely
populated, lasing can be initiated with out pumping a major of the atoms out of the ground
state.

                                              140
Light waves emitted with in the laser at wavelengths such as 6328,11,177 and 11,523 A0
will occasionally be omitted parallel to the tube axis .Bouncing back and forth between the
end mirrors, these waves will simulate emission of the same frequency from other excited
neon atoms , and the initial wave with the stimulated wave will travel parallel to the axis.
Most of the amplified radiation emerging from the ends of the He – Ne gas laser are in the
near infrared region of the spectrum , between 10,000 and 35,000 A0, the most intense
amplified wavelength in the visible spectrum being the red line at 6328 A0.




                                            141
Experiment 21
                     Diffraction at a single and Double slit.


                            Observations and Results

Wavelength of He-Ne laser = 623.8 nm.

Distance D between slit and photocell = _______________________ cm.

Least count of screw gauge = _______________________________ cm.

                          Table 1 : Single slit diffraction


       S.No                  Position of photocell (mm)
                    Main Scale   + Vernier           =        Net     Current
                                                                        µA
          1
          2
          3
          4
          5
          6
          7
          8
          9
         10
         11
         12
         13
         14
         15
         16
         17
         18
         19
         20




                                        142
Table 2: Double Slit diffraction

S.No              Position of photocell (mm)       Current
       Main Scale +       Vernier      =     Net    µA
 1
 2
 3
 4
 5
 6
 7
 8
 9
 10
 11
 12
 13
 14
 15
 16
 17
 18
 19
 20
 21
 22
 23
 24
 25
 26
 27
 28
 29
 30
 31
 32
 33
 34
 35
 36
 37
 38
 39
 40

                          143
Calculations & Results:
1. Determination of width od single slit ‘a’
     Plot a graph of current Vs position of the photocell. Using data from Table1.
     Measure the distance x from center of diffraction pattern to the first minimum of the
     graph paper. Calculate the slit width ‘a’ using (m=1 in eq. 12).

                                                      X
                          a sin θ = a                           =λ
                                              X   2
                                                      + D2

2.   Determination of a & d for double slit
     Plot a graph of current Vs position of the photocell using data of Table 2. Measuer
     the distance X of the first minimum of the diffraction envelope from the center of the
     diffraction pattern ( see Fig 4). Measure also the distance y between two consecutive
     minima of the interface pattern with the diffraction envelope (see Fig 4). Calculate a
     and d using the following relations.

                                 aX
                                              = λ ( m = 1 in eq.12 )
                            X    2
                                     + D2
                                 y
                            d
                                 2            λ
                                          =               ( n = 1 in eq. 17 )
                               y      2       2
                           D +
                             2

                               4


Results

1.   The width of the single slit = ___________________________ mm.

2.   For the double slit a = ________________________________ mm.

                        b = ________________________________ mm.


(Two graph papers required).




                                                      144
Experiment 23

                                  Diffraction Grating

Apparatus

Spectrometer, grating, sodium lamp, mercury lamp, power supply for spetral lamps,
magnifying glass.

Objective of the experiment:
     a. To calibrate the grating spectrometer using the known source (Hg source) of light
         and to calculate the grating constant.
     b. Using the same grating, to calculate the wavelength of sodium –D lines

Basic methodology:
Light from a mercury lamp source is made to fall normally on a grating mounted on a
spectrometer. The diffraction angle of the diffracted light is measured for each spectral
line of the Hg-source. Likewise for sodium source, the diffraction angle and angular
separation ∆θ of the sodium doublet is measured.




I.     Introduction

I.1    Diffraction grating

A diffraction grating is a very powerful and precise instrument for the study of spectra and
is widely used in a large number of fields from Astronomy to Engineering, wherever there
is a need for detection of the presence of atomic elements.

A diffraction grating can be simply thought of as a set of identical and equally spaced slits
separated by opaque strips. In reality gratings are made by ruling fine grooves by a
diamond point either on a plane glass surface to produce a transmission grating or on a
metal mirror to produce a reflection grating. In a transmission grating the grooves scatter
light and so are opaque while the unruled surfaces transmit and act like slits. Typically a
high quality grating (used for studying spectra in the visible range) has about 15000
grooves per inch, which gives a slit spacing of the order of a micron.

The chief requirement of a good grating is
that the lines be equally spaced over the
width of the ruled surface, which can vary
from 1-25 cm. After each groove has been
                                                          Fig. 1
                                             145
ruled, the machine lifts the diamond point and moves the grating forward by a small
rotation of a screw. For rulings of equal spacing the screw must have a constant pitch.
Replication gratings are also used, in which a cast of the ruled surface is taken with some
transparent material. Replication grating give satisfactory performance where very high
resolving power is not required. A typical groove profile is the triangular blazed profile
shown in Fig. 1. The angle ϕ is called the blaze angle.



I.2     Basic Theory

When a wave front is incident on a grating
surface, light is transmitted through the slits
and obstructed by the opaque portions. The
secondary waves from the positions of the
slit interface with one another, similar to the
interference of waves in Young’ s experiment.
If the spacing between the lines is of the
order of the wavelength of light then an
appreciable deviation of the light is
produced.

Consider the diffraction pattern produced by
N parallel slits, each of width b; the distance
between two consecutive slits is assumed to
be d (See fig. 2).

The field at any arbitrary point P will
essentially be a sum of N turns (recall the                                  Fig. 2
derivation for the double slit),

       sin β                       sin β                                     sin β
E=A            Cos (ωt − β ) + A           cos(ωt − β − φ1 ) + ....... + A           cos(ωt − β − ( N − 1)φ1 )
         β                          β                                         β
                                                                                      --------------------(1)
    sin β sin Nγ
E=A              cos[ωt − β − 1 ( N − 1)φ1 ] ,                                        ------------------(2)
      β sin γ                 2




                     πb sin θ                     φ1       πd sin θ
        where β =                  and      γ =        =
                        λ                         2           λ

and ϕ1 is the phase difference between the light rays emanating from successive slits. The
corresponding intensity distribution will be

            sin 2 β sin 2 Nγ
        I = I0                                                ------------------(3)
              β 2 sin 2 γ
As can be seen, the intensity distribution is a product of two terms, the first term

                                                       146
sin 2 β
            represents the diffraction pattern produced by a single slit and the second term
      β2
represents the interference pattern produced by N equally spaced slits. For N=1 eqn. (3)
reduces to the single slit diffraction pattern and for N=2, to the double slit diffraction
pattern.



I.3        Principal Maxima

When the value of N is very large, one obtains intense maxima at γ=mπ i.e. when

                   d sin θ = m λ , m=0, 1, 2, … … …                 (Maxima)      … … … (4)

Thus it can be easily seen by noting that

                         sin Nγ     lim N cos Nγ
                    lim
                                =                = ±N
                   γ →mπ
                          sin γ   γ →mπ   cos γ
Thus, the resultant amplitude will be
                            sin β
                E (θ ) = NA
                                        β
and the corresponding intensity distributions are given by

                        sin 2 β                  πb sin θ πbm
           I = N 2 I0             , where β =            =
                          β   2
                                                    λ      d

Such maxima are known as principal maxima. Physically, at these maxima the fields
produced by each of the slits are in phase and therefore, thay add up and the resultant
fields is N times the field produced by each of the slits.



I.4        Minima and secondary maxima


To find the minima of the function sin Nγ
                                      2
                                                        we note that the numerator becomes
                                                sin 2 γ
zero at Nγ = 0, π ,2π or in general, pπ where p is an integer. In the special case when p=0,
N, 2N … ., γ will be 0, π, 2π; … . For these values the denominator will also vanish, and we
have the principal maxima descrined above. The other values of p give zero intensity since
for these the denominator does not vanish at the same time. Hence, the condition for
minima is γ = pπ N , excluding those values of p for which p=mN, m being the order.
These values of γ corresponds to

                                  λ 2λ 3λ                ( N − 1)λ ( N + 1)λ
                   d sin θ =        ,       ,   ,… … ,            ,            … … … … … … .(5)
                                  N N N                      N         N



                                                          147
Nλ 2 Nλ
Omitting the values 0,     ,     ,...... for which d sin θ = m λ and which corresponds to
                       N      N
principal maxima. Thus, between two principal maxima we have (N-1) minima. Between
two such consecutive minima the intensity has to have a maxima; these maxima are
known as secondary maxima. These are of much smaller intensity than principal maxima.
The principal maxima are called spectrum lines.




                                             Fig. 3


The intensity distribution of the screen is shown in Fig. 3. P corresponds to the position of
the central maxima and 1, 2 etc on the two sides of P represents the 1st, 2nd etc principal
maxima. a, b, c etc are secondary maxima and e, f, etc are the secondary minima. The
intensity as well as the angular spacing of the secondary maxima and minima are so small
in comparison to the principal maxima that they can not be observed. This results in
uniform darkness between any two principal maxima.



I.5 Dodium D lines

The sodium doublet is responsible for the
bright yellow light from a sodium lamp. The
doublet arises from the 3p→3s transition, in
the sodium atom. The 3p level splits into
two closely spaced level with an energy
spacing of 0.0021 eV. The splitting occurs
due to the spin orbit effect. This can be
crudely thought of as arising due to the
internal magnetic field produced by the
electron’ s circulation around the nucleus and                     Fig. 4
the splitting takes place anologus to the Zeeman effect. Fig. 4 shows the 3p and 3s levels
their splitting and the radiative transition that produces the sodium doublets or D lines.

II.    Set-up and procedure:

PART A: Calibration of diffraction grating:

1. Adjust telescope for parallel rays i.e. focus telescope on the object at infinity. Here we

                                              148
can adjust telescope on an object which is at very large distance. Level the
   spectrometer and prism table on which grating is mounted using a spirit level. Fig. 5
   schematically shows the arrangement of the grating and the spectrometer.




2. Switch on the power supply for spectral lamp.
3. Place the grating on the prism table such that the surface of the grating is
   approximately perpendicular to the collimator of the spectrometer (i.e. perpendicular
   to the incident slit falling on the grating). Fix the prism table in this position. With the
   Hg source observe first order spectrum on left hand side and right hand side. Measure
   the angle of diffraction of each line by rotating telescope so that cross-wire coincides
   with particular spectral line. Note down each measurement on the observation table I.
   The diffraction angle is equal to difference between LHS and RHS observation divided
   by two for a particular spectral line. (See Fig. 5).

   The wavelength of the main spectral lines of Hg in the visible region are given in
   Table I.

   PART B: To measure the wavelength of second sodium light (D2)

4. Repeat step 2 and 3 with sodium source. In first order spectrum of sodium measure the
   angular position θL of yellow 1 (D1) on the left side. Use the micrometer screw to turn
   the telescope to align the crosswire at the second yellow line (D2) and read its angular
   position θL.
5. Likewise measure θR on the RHS for D1 and D2.

Precautions:

1. The experiment should be performed in a dark room.
2. Micrometer screw should be used for fine adjustment of the telescope. For fine
   adjustment the telescope should be first licked by means of the head screw.
3. The directions of rotation of the micrometer screw should be maintained otherwise the
   play in the micrometer spindle might lead to errors.
4. The spectral lams (mercury source) attain their full illuminating power after being
   warmed up for about 5 minutes, observation should be taken after 5 minutes.
5. One of the essential precautions for the success of this experient is to set the grating
   normal to the incident rays (see below). Small variation on the angle of incident causes

                                             149
correspondingly large error in the angle of diffraction. If the exact normally is not
   observed, one find that the angle of diffraction measured on the left and on the right
   are not exactly equal. Read both the verniers to eliminate any errors due to non-
   coincidence of the center of the circular sale with the axis of rotation of the telescope
   or table.

Method to make light fall normal to the grating surface:

a) First mount grating approximately normal to the collimator. See the slit through
   telescope and take reading from one side of vernier window. Note down the reading.
b) Add or subtract (whichever is convenient) 900 from reading taken in step (a) and put
   telescope to this position. In this position telescope is approximately perperdicular to
   the collimator.
c) Now rotate prism table until the slit is visible on the cross-wire of the telescope. At this
   position the incident light from the collimator falls at an angle 450 with the plane of the
   grating. Note down this reading.
d) Next add or substract 45o to step (c) reading and rotate the prism table so as to obtain
   this reading on the same window. In this situation, light incident in the grating surface
   is perpendicular.

III. Exercise and viva questions:

1. What is a diffraction grating? How are they made? Name three different types of
   gratings.
2. Can a gratingbe used for studying spectra in the UV or infrared region? If so, what
   should be its characteristic? Can a prism be so used? What are the advantages of a
   grating over a prism?
3. The dispersion of a grating is defined as D=∆θ/∆λ where ∆θ is the angular separation
   of the principal maxima of two linees whose wavelengths differ by ∆λ. Show that the
   dispersion of a grating is D=m/(dcosθ) at the m-th order. Calculate D for the sodium
   doublet at the first order for your experiment.
4. The resolving power of a grating is defined as R=λavg/∆λ where λavg is the mean
   wavelength and ∆λ the difference in the wavelength of two spectral lines which can
   just be resolved into two lines. It can be shown that R=Nm, where N is the total
   number of ruling on the grating and m is the order at which the two spectral ines can
   be resolved. Calculate the number of rulings required to resolve the sodium doublet at
   the first order.
5. Use Bohr model for the frequency of light emitted in atomic transitions to calculate the
   wavelengths foe the sodium doublet, using Fig. 4.
6. In the Hg spectrum which lines are prominent and which are weak? What could be the
   reason for variation in intensities of spectral ines?
7. What would be the advantages and disadvantages of looking at the second order
   spectra in this experiment?
8. What is the mechanism by which the emission spectrum is produced in the spectral
   lamps 9Na or Hg)? Look up Ref. 2 for details.
9. What will happen if the incident light does not fall normally on the grating? Show that
   if φ is the angle of incidence w.r.t. the normal to the grating, then the principal maxima
   occur at angles θ w.r.t. normal such that d (sin θ + sin φ ) = m λ .

References:

1. “ Advanced Practical Physics for students” , B. L. Worsnop and H.T. Flint, Metheun
                                             150
London, 1942.
2. “ Fundamentals of Optics” , F.A. Jenkins and H.E. White, 4th edition, McGraw-Hill Inc,
   1981.
3. “ Fundamentals of Physics” , D. Halliday, R. Resnick and J.A. Walker, 6th Ed. John
   Willey and Sons, New York, 2001.
4. “ Optics” , A. Ghatak, 2nd Ed, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi 1992.




                                          151
Experiment 22

                                             Observations and Results
Table I
S.No.      Spectral       Wavelength in                   Position of Telescope
                                                                                                        θ L −θ R   Sinθ
           line           Α°              Left side θL (degree Right side θR (degree               θ=
                                          minutes)                     minutes)                            2
                                          Main     Vernier Total       Main     Vernier Total
1          Volet-         4047


                      I
2          Violet-II      4078
3          Blue           4358
4          Bluish-        4916
           green
5          Green          5461
6          Yellow I       5770
7          Yellow II      5791


Table II

S.No.      Spectral       Wavelength in                      Position of Telescope
                                                                                                        θ L −θ R   Sinθ
           line           Α°              Left side θL        (degree Right side θR (degree        θ=
                                          minutes)                        minutes)                         2
                                          Main     Vernier     Total      Main     Vernier Total
1          Volet-         5890


                      I
2          Violet-II      5896



1. Angular position θ of yellow line in first order = … … … … … .
2. Angular separation ∆θ between two yellow lines in first order = … … … … … …

Calculations:

1. Using data of Table I, plot a graph between sinθ and λ , determine the grating constant
    d from the slope of the graph.
2. Using above graph, find out the values of λ corresponding to the values of sinθ quoted
    in Table 2. These are the wavelengths of spectral lines of sodium. Determine the
    wavelength separation ∆λ.
3. Differentiate eqn. (4) for first order,
                       (d cos θ )∆θ = ∆λ
Use above equation to calculate the wavelength separation between two yellow lines since
d, θ, and ∆θ are known from table 2.
Results:
1. Wavelength of the spectral lines of Hg are given in table I.
2. The grating constant d is found to be … … … … … … .
3. The wavelengths of spectral lines of sodium are … … … ..
4. The wavelength separation between the sodium doublet lines (found from graph) is
   ∆λ= … … … … … … … … … … … .Å.
5. The wavelength separation between sodium doublet lines (calculated as in step 3
   above) is ∆λ= … … … … … … … … … … … .Å.
                               (One graph paper required)

                                                               152
Experiment 24

                                 Speed of light in glass
Apparatus

Prism, spectrometer, monochromatic light source, spirit level.

Objective

To determine the speed of propagation of light waves in glass.

Theory

Light travels with the speed c = 2.998 × 108 m s-1 in vacuum. In a material medium its
speed (v) is less. As a result, light waves undergo refraction at the interface of two media.
In this experiment, we take the material of the medium in the form of a glass prism. A
parallel stream of waves traveling from a medium 1 (here air) is incident on the interface
of air and glass (of the prism), at the angle incidence θ1. The angle of refraction is θ2 .
Snell’ s law connects the two by the relation,

                               n1sinθ1 = n2 sin θ2               … … … ..… …     (1)

where n1 and n2 are the refractive indices of the two media 1 and 2 respectively.

Since the medium 1 here is air (n1 ≅1.000), the speed of light in the second medium is
given by

                              ν=c(sinθ2 /sinθ1 )              ………………              (2)

We know that for a certain direction of incidence, the ray travels parallel to the base of the
prism and the angular displacement of the final ray that emerges from the second interface
of the prism has the lowest possible value. For this minimum angular deviation, δm, and
the corresponding incidence angle θ1, the geometry of symmetric propagation inside the
medium leads to the equation for ν

                                    sin(α/2)
                             ν = c ---------------             … … … … … … … .(3)
                                   sin(α+∂m)/2

where α is the angle of the prism. Thus, from a measurement of the angle of the prism and
the value of the minimum angular displacement δm, the speed of light in the material can
be determined.

Procedure

A spectrometer is used to measure the necessary angles. The spectrometer consists of three
units: (1) collimator, (2) telescope, and (3) prism table.
The prism table, its base and telescope can be independently moved around their common
vertical axis. A circular angular scale enables one to read angular displacements (together
with two verniers located diametrically opposite to each other).

                                              153
In the experiment, we need to produce a parallel beam of rays to be incident on the prism.
This is done with the help of a collimator. The collimator has an adjustable rectangular slit
at one end and a convex lens at the other end. When the illuminated slit is located at the
focus of the lens (See Fig. 1), a parallel beam of rays emerges from the collimator. We can
test this point, with the help of a
telescope adjusted to receive parallel
rays. We first prepare the telescope
towards this purpose as follows:

•   Setting the eyepiece: Focus the
    eyepiece of the telescope on its cross-
    wires (for viewing the crosswires
    against a white background such as a
    wall) such that a distinct image of the
    crosswire is seen by you. In this context, remember that the human eye has an average
    “ least distance of distinct vision” of about 25 cm. When you have completed the above
    eyepiece adjustment, you have apparently got the image of the crosswire located at a
    distance comfortable for your eyes. Henceforth do not disturb the eyepiece.

•   Setting the Telescope: Focus the telescope onto a distant (infinity!) object. Focusing
    is done by changing the seperation between the objective and the eyepiece of the
    telescope. Test for the absence of a parallax between the image of the distant object
    and the vertical crosswire. Parallex effect (i.e. separation of two things when you move
    your head across horizontally) exits, if the cross-wire and the image of the distant
    object are not at the same distance from your eyes. Now the telescope is adjusted for
    receiving parallel rays. Henceforth do not disturb the telescope focusing adjustment.

•   Setting the Collimator: Use the telescope for viewing the illuminated slit through the
    collimator and adjust the collimator (changing the separation between its lens and slit)
    till the image of the slit is brought to the plane of crosswires as judged by the absence
    of parallax between the image of the slit and crosswires.

•   Optical leveling of the Prism:
    The prism table would have been nearly leveled before use have started the
    experiment. However, for your experiment, you need to do a bit of leveling using
    reflected rays. For this purpose, place the table with one apex at the center and facing
    the collimator, with the ground (non-transparent) face perpendicular to the collimator
    axis and away from collimator. Slightly adjust the prism so that the beam of light from
    the collimator falls on the two reflecting faces symmetrically (Fig. 2) When you have
    achieved this lock the prism table in this position. Turn the telescope to one side so as
    to receive the reflected image of the slit centrally into the field of view. This may be
    achieved by using one of the leveling screws. The image must be central whichever
    face is used as the reflecting face. Similarly, repeat this procedure for the other side.




                                            154
•   Finding the angle of the prism (α):

    With the slit width narrowed down sufficiently and prism table leveled, lock the prism
table and note the angular position of the telescope when one of the reflected images
coincides with the crosswires. Repeat this for the reflected image on the otherside
(without disturbing the prism and prism table). The difference in these two angular
positions gives 2α.

•   Finding angle of minimum deviation (δm):

     Unlock the prism table for the measurement of the angle of minimum deviation (δm).
Locate the image of the slit after refraction through the prism as shown in Fig. 3. Keeping
the image always in the field of view, rotate the prism table till the position where the
deviation of the image of the slit is smallest. At this position, the image will go backward,
even when you keep rotating the prism table in the same direction. Lock both the
telescope and the prism table and to use the fine adjustment screw for finer settings. Note
the angular position of the prism. In this position the prism is set for minimum deviation.
Without disturbing the prism table, remove the prism and turn the telescope (now unlock
it) towards the direct rays from the collimator. Note the scale reading of this position. The
angle of the minimum angular deviation, viz, δm is the difference between the readings
for these last two settings.


                                    ∝

                                                  δm




                  Fig 3. Minimum deviation geometry



                                            155
Observation tables:

1. For angle of the prism:

                  Vernier A                              Vernier B
      Telescope Reading 2α        α        Telescope Reading 2α α
      Face I    Face II                    Face I   Face II


2. For angle of minimum deviation:

                Vernier A                                   Vernier B
      Direct          Minimum         δm    Direct          Minimum     δm
      Reading         Deviation             Reading         Deviation



Calculation:

Use eqn. (3) to calculate the speed of light in the glass medium.

Result:

Sped of light in glass = … … ..




References:

1. F. A. Jenkins and H. F. White, “ Fundamentals of Optics” (McGraw Hill, 1981),
    Chapter 2.
2. E. Hecht and A. Zajac, “ Optics” , (Addision Wesley, 2nd Ed. 1987).




                                            156
Experiment 25

                                  Polarization of light

Apparatus
Laser source, polarizer, analyzer, photodiode, battery, multimeter, glass slab, optical table
and stand.

Objective
To study the polarization of light, to verify Malus law and to find the Brewster angle for
glass.

Theory


There are a number of ways an unpolarised light can be converted into a plane polarized
light. You are given two polarising sheets (polaroids). The light passing out of a polarizer
is linearly polarized with the electric field E fixed in one direction in space as determined
by the orientation of the polarizing sheet. If this light passes through a second polarizer
(analyser), then the light output depends on the relative orientation of the two polarizers.
If the pass plane of the second polarizer is making an angle θ with respect to the electric
field E, then the magnitude of the field in the output wave is cosθ and the output
intensity is proportional to cos2 θ Thus the output intensity I of the light transmitted by
the analyser is given by


I=I0 cos2 θ                                                                          (1)


Where I0 is the intensity of the polarized light incident on analyser. This is known as
Malus law.


Alternatively one can obtain polarised light by using a beam that is reflected at an
interface at a particular angle called Brewster angle.
Consider a polarised beam falling on an interface YZ (fig. 1). The beam is in XY plane
and the polarisation of the light is in the plane of incidence (electric field EI is in XY
plane) . The magnitude of the reflected electric field is given by

       α−β
ER =       EI                                                                        (2)
       α+β
Where α =cosθT/cosθI and β =µ1n1/µ2n2. µ is the magnetic permeability of the material
and n is the refractive index of the material.
Thus the reflectivity (ER /EI) depends on angle of incidence for the inplane polarisiation
and goes to zero at a certain angle of incidence called Brewster angle θB given by
tanθB = n1/n2
This fact can be used to get a polarised beam from an unpolarised beam. An unpolarised

                                             157
beam is made to incident at an interface at Brewster angle. The reflected beam will contain
the perpendicular component only.


Experimental Setup
The set-up consists of a laser light source (partially polarised), polariser, analyser, and a
photodiode (Fig. 2). The analyser unit is fitted with a circular scale to record the angular
readings. Photodiode is used to measure the intensity of light. All the components can be
mounted on an optical bench for proper alignment


     µ1n1          Y       µ2n2
    kR       ER
                           ET
                                    kT
                                     X
     EI

            kI

                 Fig. 1

Procedure

Part A
1. Assemble the photodiode circuit (reverse bias) in photoconductive mode as shown in
   fig 3. In this configuration photocurrent will be directly proportional to the intensity of
   light falling on to it.
2. Align the light source and two polaroid sheets so that the beam passes through both the
   polarisers and falls on to the detector. The plane of polaroids must be perpendicular to
   the beam.
3. Remove the polariser from the path of the beam and rotate the analyser to get the
   maximum photocurrent (as the source is partially polarised). Now insert the polariser
   in between laser and the analyser and rotate ithe polariser to get again maximum
   current. This will ensure that the pass plane of polariser and analyser are parallel and
   along the larger component of the field.
4. Now rotate the analyser in small angular steps and record the photocurrent current as a
   function of θ.
Part B
1. Remove the polariser from the path of the beam.
2. Place the glass slab on a horizontal table and align it with light source so that the
   incident beam is normal to the glass surface. Note this angular reading. Angle of
   incidence can be changed by rotating the glass plate about vertical axis.
3. Set the analyser such that it passes only horizontal polarised light.
4. Record the intensity of reflacted beam as a function of angle of incidence.



                                             158
Observation Table:
Part A: θ = angle between Polaroid sheet
        IT= Total current
        IS=Stray light current
Table I
S. no.   θ (degree)    IT (mV)     IS (mV)        I=IT-IS
1        0
2        5
3        10
..       ..
..       ..
..       360


Part B: θI = Angle of incidence
Table II
S. No.   θI (degree)   IT (mV)     IS (mv)        I=IT-IS
1        10
2        15
3        20
4        25
5        30
6        35
7        40
8        45
9        50
10       52
11       54
12       56
13       58
14       60
15       65
16       70
17       75
18       80


Analysis:
1. In Part A, plot I vs. θ and verify eqn. (1).
1. In Part B, plot I vs. θI. Find Brewster angle from the minima of the graph. Estimate
   uncertainty in the Brewster angle.
For calculating error in θB i.e. ∆θ B from graph, use the following concept:

                                              159
∆θ B = ∆θ I min + ∆θ (∆I ) , where ∆I is the least count in I measuring instrument.




                                        Photodiode
                                                            µA



                                                Fig. 3


Results:
       Brewster’ s angle for glass = … … … … … … … … … … .

(Two graph papers required).

Reference: F. A. Jenkins and H. F. White, “ Fundamentals of Optics” (McGraw Hill,
1981), Chapter 24.




                                             160

More Related Content

PPT
Gravitational Fields
PDF
Class 11 Mechanical Properties of Solids MobView
PPTX
Magnetic fields
PDF
bloch.pdf
PPT
Electromagnetism
PPTX
Physics 33 electromagnetic effects 2
DOCX
Experiment to verify ohm’s law
PPTX
Air Wedge Interference
Gravitational Fields
Class 11 Mechanical Properties of Solids MobView
Magnetic fields
bloch.pdf
Electromagnetism
Physics 33 electromagnetic effects 2
Experiment to verify ohm’s law
Air Wedge Interference

What's hot (20)

DOCX
The Photoelectric Effect lab report
PDF
Blochtheorem
PPT
Chapter 3 Electromagnetism
PPTX
IGCSE PHYSICS: Electromagnetic Effects
PPT
Coulombs law
PPTX
Ch 12 (atoms)
PPTX
COULOMBS LAW
PPTX
Magnetic materials
PPTX
ferromagnetism
PPTX
The wkb approximation
PPTX
Magnetism and electromagnetism
PPTX
Electric Charge and Electric Field Lecture
PPTX
Magnetic materials
PPTX
FERROMAGNETIC AND ANTIFERROMAGNETIC MATERIALS.pptx
PPTX
IGCSE PHYSICS CORE: ATOMIC PHYSICS
PPT
Std 10 - Electromagnetism
PPTX
Electromagnetism
PPT
5 introduction to quantum mechanics
PPTX
Electrostatic potential and capacitance
The Photoelectric Effect lab report
Blochtheorem
Chapter 3 Electromagnetism
IGCSE PHYSICS: Electromagnetic Effects
Coulombs law
Ch 12 (atoms)
COULOMBS LAW
Magnetic materials
ferromagnetism
The wkb approximation
Magnetism and electromagnetism
Electric Charge and Electric Field Lecture
Magnetic materials
FERROMAGNETIC AND ANTIFERROMAGNETIC MATERIALS.pptx
IGCSE PHYSICS CORE: ATOMIC PHYSICS
Std 10 - Electromagnetism
Electromagnetism
5 introduction to quantum mechanics
Electrostatic potential and capacitance
Ad

Similar to Physics lab manual (20)

PDF
Quantum and statistical physics workbook dec2020
PDF
Manual 191
DOCX
Physics 101 Lab ManualDr. W.A.AtkinsonSouthern Illinois .docx
DOCX
1 P a g e A semester of Experiments for ECE 225 .docx
DOCX
Chemistry Lab Manual 2012-13
PDF
Physics Laboratory Experiments 7th Edition Jerry D Wilson Cecilia A Hernndez
PDF
Pcbm1112syllabus
PDF
Class 11 Cbse Physics Syllabus 2011-12
PDF
Class 11 Cbse Physics Syllabus 2012-13
PPTX
5acd06cb-6042-40e1-b1bb-06db2f251836.pptx
PDF
1494Manual_SP12.pdf
PDF
Analog Communications Lab Laboratory Manual
PPT
Physics-practical-work.ppt practical in physics
PDF
2021 icse reducedsylabiix-physics
PDF
Experiment format
PDF
Alternativetopractical
PPTX
Physics lab for btech engineering students
DOCX
Science enginering lab report experiment 1 (physical quantities aand measurem...
PDF
International spec-physics
PPTX
Physical world and units and measurment
Quantum and statistical physics workbook dec2020
Manual 191
Physics 101 Lab ManualDr. W.A.AtkinsonSouthern Illinois .docx
1 P a g e A semester of Experiments for ECE 225 .docx
Chemistry Lab Manual 2012-13
Physics Laboratory Experiments 7th Edition Jerry D Wilson Cecilia A Hernndez
Pcbm1112syllabus
Class 11 Cbse Physics Syllabus 2011-12
Class 11 Cbse Physics Syllabus 2012-13
5acd06cb-6042-40e1-b1bb-06db2f251836.pptx
1494Manual_SP12.pdf
Analog Communications Lab Laboratory Manual
Physics-practical-work.ppt practical in physics
2021 icse reducedsylabiix-physics
Experiment format
Alternativetopractical
Physics lab for btech engineering students
Science enginering lab report experiment 1 (physical quantities aand measurem...
International spec-physics
Physical world and units and measurment
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
3rd Neelam Sanjeevareddy Memorial Lecture.pdf
PDF
RMMM.pdf make it easy to upload and study
PDF
ANTIBIOTICS.pptx.pdf………………… xxxxxxxxxxxxx
PPTX
Pharmacology of Heart Failure /Pharmacotherapy of CHF
PDF
Chapter 2 Heredity, Prenatal Development, and Birth.pdf
PDF
O7-L3 Supply Chain Operations - ICLT Program
PPTX
IMMUNITY IMMUNITY refers to protection against infection, and the immune syst...
PDF
Computing-Curriculum for Schools in Ghana
PDF
Abdominal Access Techniques with Prof. Dr. R K Mishra
PPTX
Introduction-to-Literarature-and-Literary-Studies-week-Prelim-coverage.pptx
PPTX
Final Presentation General Medicine 03-08-2024.pptx
PDF
O5-L3 Freight Transport Ops (International) V1.pdf
PPTX
Tissue processing ( HISTOPATHOLOGICAL TECHNIQUE
PDF
Module 4: Burden of Disease Tutorial Slides S2 2025
PPTX
Cell Structure & Organelles in detailed.
PPTX
Microbial diseases, their pathogenesis and prophylaxis
PDF
Saundersa Comprehensive Review for the NCLEX-RN Examination.pdf
PDF
Microbial disease of the cardiovascular and lymphatic systems
PPTX
master seminar digital applications in india
PPTX
Pharma ospi slides which help in ospi learning
3rd Neelam Sanjeevareddy Memorial Lecture.pdf
RMMM.pdf make it easy to upload and study
ANTIBIOTICS.pptx.pdf………………… xxxxxxxxxxxxx
Pharmacology of Heart Failure /Pharmacotherapy of CHF
Chapter 2 Heredity, Prenatal Development, and Birth.pdf
O7-L3 Supply Chain Operations - ICLT Program
IMMUNITY IMMUNITY refers to protection against infection, and the immune syst...
Computing-Curriculum for Schools in Ghana
Abdominal Access Techniques with Prof. Dr. R K Mishra
Introduction-to-Literarature-and-Literary-Studies-week-Prelim-coverage.pptx
Final Presentation General Medicine 03-08-2024.pptx
O5-L3 Freight Transport Ops (International) V1.pdf
Tissue processing ( HISTOPATHOLOGICAL TECHNIQUE
Module 4: Burden of Disease Tutorial Slides S2 2025
Cell Structure & Organelles in detailed.
Microbial diseases, their pathogenesis and prophylaxis
Saundersa Comprehensive Review for the NCLEX-RN Examination.pdf
Microbial disease of the cardiovascular and lymphatic systems
master seminar digital applications in india
Pharma ospi slides which help in ospi learning

Physics lab manual

  • 1. Physics Laboratory Manual for Engineering Undergraduates Dr. P. K. Giri Department of Physics Indian Institute of Technology Guwahati A project completed under the Curriculum Development Cell, Quality Improvement Program (Q.I.P), IIT Guwahati, sponsored by A.I.C.T.E., India. July 2005
  • 2. CONTENTS Instructions for Laboratory ……….3 Bibliography ……….4 Experiment 1: Error Analysis and Graph Drawing ………..5 Experiment 2: Coupled Pendulum ……….15 Experiment 3: Study of Small Oscillation using a bar Pendulum ……….22 Experiment 4: Rotational Inertia of a Rigid Body ……….26 Experiment 5: Velocity of Sound (Appendix: CRO) ……….29 Experiment 6: Radiation from a black body: Stefan-Boltzmann Law ……….39 Experiment 7: Melting point of a solid ………42 Experiment 8: Measurement of e/m by Thomson’s Bar magnet method ……...45 Experiment 9: Measurement of e/m by Helical Coil method ……….54 Experiment 10: Charging and discharging of a capacitor ……….62 Experiment 11: Self inductance and resistance of a coil ……….70 Experiment 12: Resonance in LCR circuit ……….72 Experiment 13: Hysteresis Loop for a ferromagnetic material (M-B curve) ….81 Experiment 14: Electromagnetic induction ………...88 Experiment 15: Electrical resistivity of semiconductors ………..96 Experiment 16: Planck’s constant ………..100 Experiment 17: Magnetic field along the axis of a coil (Biot-Savart Law) …….107 Experiment 18: Study of Hall effect (Lorentz Force) ……….110 Experiment 19: I-V Characteristic of a Solar Cell ……….114 Experiment 20: Air wedge: Interference of light ……….123 Experiment 21: Newton’s Ring ……….125 Experiment 22: Diffraction at a single and double slit (Appendix : Lasers) …..131 Experiment 23: Diffraction Grating ………..144 Experiment 24: Speed of light in glass ………..153 Experiment 25: Polarization of light ………..157 2
  • 3. Instructions for Laboratory • The objective of the laboratory is learning. The experiments are designed to illustrate phenomena in different areas of Physics and to expose you to measuring instruments. Conduct the experiments with interest and an attitude of learning. • You need to come well prepared for the experiment • Work quietly and carefully (the whole purpose of experimentation is to make reliable measurements!) and equally share the work with your partners. • Be honest in recording and representing your data. Never make up readings or doctor them to get a better fit for a graph. If a particular reading appears wrong repeat the measurement carefully. In any event all the data recorded in the tables have to be faithfully displayed on the graph. • All presentations of data, tables and graphs calculations should be neatly and carefully done. • Bring necessary graph papers for each of experiment. Learn to optimize on usage of graph papers. For example, in Experiment 16 (Planck's constant) you do not need three separate sheets to represent the graphs of lnIph vs. T-1 for the three different filters. All the three graphs can be accommodated on a single graph sheet. • Graphs should be neatly drawn with pencil. Always label graphs and the axes and display units. • If you finish early, spend the remaining time to complete the calculations and drawing graphs. Come equipped with calculator, scales, pencils etc. • Do not fiddle idly with apparatus. Handle instruments with care. Report any breakage to the Instructor. Return all the equipment you have signed out for the purpose of your experiment. 3
  • 4. Bibliography Here is a short list of references to books which may be useful for further reading in Physics or instrumentation relevant to the experiments. Also included are some references to books of general interest with regard to science and experimentation. I "Fundamentals of Physics", 6th Ed., D. Halliday, R. Resnick and J. Walker, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, 2001. 2. "Physics", M. Alonso and E.J. Finn, Addison Wesley, .1992. 3. "The Feynman Lectures in Physics (Vols. 1, 11 and 111)", R.P. Feynman, R.B. Leighton and M.Sands, Addison Wesley, 1963. 4. "Fundamentals of Optics", 4th Ed., F.A. Jenkins and H.E. White, McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1981. 5. "Optics", A Ghatak, Tata-McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1992 6. "Vibration and Waves", A.P. French, Arnold-Heinemann, New Delhi, 1972. 7. "Students Reference Manual for Electronic Instrumentation Laboratories", S.E. Wolf and R.F.M. Smith, PHI, 1990. 8. "Basic Electronic Instrument Handbook", C.F. Coombs, McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1972. 9. "Laboratory Experiments in College Physics", C.H. Bernard and C.D. Epp, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, 1995. 10. "Practical Physics", G.L. Squires, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 1985. 11. "Great Experiments in Physics", M.H. Shamos, Holt, Rinehart and Winston Inc., 1959. 12. "Experiments in Modern Physics", A.C. Melissinos, Academic Press, N.Y., 1966. 13. "Reliable Knowledge", J.Ziman, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 1978. 14. "Introductory Readings in the Philosophy of Science", Edited by E.D. Klenke, R. Hollinger, A.D. Kline, Prometheous Books, Buffalo, New York, 1988. 4
  • 5. Experiment 1 Error Analysis and Graph Drawing I. Introduction: 1.1 It is impossible to do an experimental measurement with perfect accuracy. There is always an uncertainty associated with any measured quantity in an experiment even in the most carefully done experiment and despite using the most sophisticated instruments. This uncertainty in the measured value is known as the error in that particular measured quantity. There is no way by which one can measure a quantity with one hundred percent accuracy. In presenting experimental results it is very important to objectively estimate the error in the measured result. Such an exercise is very basic to experimental science. The importance of characterizing the accuracy and reliability of an experimental result is difficult to understate when we keep in mind that it is experimental evidence that validate scientific theories. Likewise, reliability and accuracy of measurements are also deeply relevant to Engineering. The complete science of error analysis involves the theory of statistics (see Ref. 1,2) and is too involved to present here. This short presentation is intended to introduce the student to some basic aspects of error analysis and graph drawing, which it is expected that the student will then put into practice when presenting his/her results of the coming experiments. I.2 When a measurement of a physical quantity is repeated, the results of the various measurements will, in general, spread over a range of values. This spread in the measured results is due to the errors in the experiment. Errors are generally classified into two types: systematic (or determinate) errors and random (or indeterminate) errors. A systematic error is an error, which is constant throughout a set of readings. Systematic errors lead to a clustering of the measured values around a value displaced from the "true" value of the quantity. Random errors on the other hand, can be both positive or negative and lead to a dispersion of the measurements around a mean value. For example, in a time period measurement, errors in starting and stopping the clock will lead to random errors, while a defect 5
  • 6. in the working of the clock will lead to systematic error. A striking example of systematic error is the measurement of the value of the electric charge of the electron 'e' by Millikan by his Oil Drop method. Millikan underestimated the viscosity of air, leading to a lower value for his result e = (1.591 ± .002) x 10-19 C ------------------------------------- (1) Compare this with a more modem and accurate value (Cohen and Taylor 1973, Ref. 3) e = (1.602 189 ± 0.000 005) x 10-19C. ---------------------- (2) Systematic errors need to be carefully uncovered for the particular experimental set- up and eliminated by correcting the results of the measurements. I.3 Random errors are handled using statistical analysis. Assume that a large number (N) of measurements are taken of a quantity Q giving values Q1, Q2, Q3…QN. Let Q be the mean value of these measurements N Q= 1 N Qi i=1 ---------------------------------- (3) i =1 and let 'd' be the deviation in the measurements N d= 1 N (Qi − Q ) 2 ----------------------------------------------- (4) i =1 The result of the measurement is quoted (assuming systematic errors have been eliminated) as Q =Q±d --------------------------------------------- (5) The error Q in the quantity is then taken to be the deviation d. (This is called the standard error in Q) In a single measurement of a physical quantity, the error can be estimated as the least count (or its fraction) of the instrument being used. As an example, the result of a measurement of the radius of curvature R, of a plano- convex could be quoted as R = 140 ± 0.2 cm. ------------------------------ (6) This means that we expect that the value of R being in the range 139.8 to 140.2 cm. Note however, that this does not mean that the “true” value of R necessarily lies in this range, only that there is a possibility that it will do so. 6
  • 7. The error in measurement can also be quoted as a percent error ∆Q d ×100 = ×100 ----------------------------------------- (7) Q Q For example, the percentage error in R is 0.143 %. I.4 Combination of errors: Many times the value of a measured quantity may depend on other intermediate measured quantities. For example we could have a quantity Q which is a function F of a number of independent intermediate variables say x, y and z i.e., Q = F(x,y,z)---------------------------------------------------(8) If the indeterminate errors related to x, y, z are ∆x, ∆y and ∆z respectively, then the error in Q can be calculated as ∆Q = (∂F / ∂x ) ∆x + (∂F / ∂y )∆y + (∂F / ∂z )∆z = a∆x + b∆y + c∆z ------------ (9) An important characteristic of errors is that the total error in a function, due to different variables is always additive. Therefore, more accurately, the error Q is calculated as ∂F ∂F ∂F ∆Q= ∆x + ∆y + ∆ z = a ∆ x + b ∆ y + c ∆ z -------------- (10) ∂x ∂y ∂z = QA + QB + QC As an example, consider the quantity Q= x + y . If the error in x (i.e., ∆x ) is negative and that in y (i.e., ∆y ) is positive, the total error in the quantity x+y will be ∆x + ∆y not ∆x + ∆y , which means combination of errors always lowers the quality of the experimental data. In fact, using statistical analysis (where the. error is defined as the root mean square deviation from the mean) the correct expression for the error in Q can be shown to be ∆Q = ( ∆x ) 2 + ( ∆y ) 2 . In general we have the rule that (following statistical analysis) if Q is a function of x, y, z,…., then ( ∆Q ) 2 = (∆Q x ) 2 + (∆ Q y ) 2 + (∆Q z ) ) 2 ............. -------------------------- (11) ∂Q ∂Q ∂Q where, ∆Q x = ( )∆x ; ∆Q y = ( )∆y ; ∆Q z = ( )∆z etc. ∂x ∂y ∂z The following table summarizes the results for combining errors for some standard functions. Try to derive some of these results. 7
  • 8. S.No Function Error in Q or Fractional error Q/Q 1. Q=x+y ∆Q = ( ∆ x ) 2 + ( ∆y ) 2 2. Q=x–y ∆Q = ( ∆ x ) 2 + ( ∆y ) 2 3. Q = xy 2 2 2 2 2 ∆Q ∆x ∆y ∆Q ∆x ∆y = + = + Q x y Q x y 4. Q = x/y 2 2 2 2 2 ∆Q ∆x ∆y ∆Q ∆x ∆y = + = + Q x y Q x y ∆Q ∆x 5. Q = xn =n Q x ∆x 6. Q = ln x ∆Q = x ∆Q 7. Q = ex =∆x Q II. Drawing of best fit straight line graph: To draw the best fit straight line graph through a set of scattered experimental data points we will follow a standard statistical method, known as least squares fit method. Let us consider a set of N experimental data points (x1,y1), (x2,y2), …….(xN,yN). It is well known that a straight-line graph is described by the equation y = mx + C. ---------------------------------------- (12) We ask the question: how are the slope 'm' and the y-intercept 'c' to be determined such that a straight line best approximates the curve passing through the data points? Let Si = yi - mixi - c be the deviation of any experimental point P (xi, yi), from the 8
  • 9. best fit line. Then, the gradient 'm' and the intercept 'c' of the best fit straight line has to be found such that the quantity S = ( yi − m x i − c )2 i is a minimum . We require ∂S ∂S =−2 x i ( y i − m x i − c) = 0 and =− 2 ( y i − m x i − c) = 0 , ∂m ∂c which give, m x i2 + c xi = x i yi and m x i + Nc = yi . 1 The second equation can be written as as y = m x + c , where y = y i and N 1 x= xi showing that the best fit straight line passes through the centroid N ( x , y ) of the points (xi , yi ) .The requires values of m and c can be calculated from the above two equations to be ( x i − x ) yi m= and c = y − m x ----------------------------------(13) ( xi − x )2 The best-fit straight line can be drawn by calculating m and c from above. A graphical method of obtaining the best fit line is to rotate a transparent ruler about the centroid so that it passes through the clusters of points at the top right and at the bottom left. This line will give the maximum error in m, ( m)1, on one side. Do the same to find out the maximum error in m, ( m)2 on the other side. Now bisect the angle between these two lines and that will be the best-fit line through the experimental data. What are the errors in the gradient and intercept due to errors in the experimental data points? The estimates of the standard errors in the slope and intercept are 1 Si2 1 x2 Si2 (∆m) 2 ≈ and (∆c) 2 ≈ + , D N−2 N D N−2 where D = ( x i − x ) 2 and Si is the deviation ,Si = yi – m xi – c . II.1. Presentation of error associated with experimental data in a graph. Let us consider a function, y = f(x), where x is an independent parameter which in the hand of the experimentalist during performing the experiments and y is the experimental data which is having a value depending upon the x and the instruments. Let the error associated with x be ±Ax and that for y be ±Ay. One can represent ±Ax 9
  • 10. and ±Ay with the experimental data point P(x,y) on the graph paper. To do that, first plot P(x,y) on the graph paper, then draw a vertical line parallel to y axis about the point P(x,y) of length 2Ay. So upper half of the line represents the error +Ay and the lower half represents -Ay error. To present ±Ax, draw horizontal lines at the two ends of the vertical line of length 2Ax each. The whole presentation is now giving the errors associated with the experimental point P(x,y). Figure 1 is an example of experimental data of resonance absorption of – ray experiment (Mössbauer spectroscopy) with error associated with each experimental data. The solid lines give the fitted curve through the experimental data. Note that the error in the variable along horizontal axis is not shown. Fig 1 II.2 Use of graphs in experimental physics: In practical physics, the graph of the experimental data is most important in improving the understanding of the experimental results. Moreover from the graphs one can calculate unknowns related to the experiments and one can compare the experimental data with the theoretical curve when they are presented on same graph. There are different types of graph papers available in market. So, one should choose the appropriate type of graph paper to present their experimental results in the best way depending upon the values of the experimental data and the theoretical expression of the functions. To understand all those some of the assignments are given below in addition to those we discussed before. 10
  • 11. III. Exercises and Viva Questions 1. What is the general classification of errors? Give an example of each. How are they taken care of? Radius of curvature(cm) 2. What is the meaning of standard error? Calculate the standard error for the hypothetical data given in the 130.121 130.126 adjacent table. Express the quantity as in eq(5) i.e. 130.139 R =R ±d 130.148 130.155 3. What is the percentage error in Millikan’s experiment of 130.162 the charge of the electron: e = (1.591± 0.002) x 10-19 C? 130.162 130.169 4. What is the error in the volume of a cube V=L3 if the error in L is 0.01m? If L is measured as L= 2 ± 0.01, express the value of V in a similar manner. 5. A small steel ball-bearing rests on top of a horizontal table. The radius (R) of the ball is measured using a micrometer screw gauge (with vernier least count 0.05 mm) to be 2.15 mm. The height of the table is found using an ordinary meter scale to be 90 cm. What is the height of the center of the steel ball from the floor (include the error)?. 6. Let Q = x - y, where x= 100 ± 2 and y = 96 ± 2 .Calculate Q (express the result with the error included) 7. Consider the quantity Q = x / y. If x = 50 ± 1 and y = 3 ± 0.2. Calculate Q (express the result with the error included) 8. In an experiment involving diffraction of sodium light using a diffraction grating, the double lines are unresolved at first order and a single spectral line is seen at an angle of 130. If the least count of the vernier of the telescope is 1/, what will be the error in the calculated value of the grating constant d? (Principal maxima of a grating occurs at angles such that d sin = m . The wavelength separation between the sodium 0 double slit lines is 6 A ) 9 Consider an experiment to measure the gravitational acceleration ‘g’ by measuring the time period of a simple pendulum. What are the possible sources of systematic error in this experiment? 10. “If there are always errors in any measurement then there is nothing like the ‘true’ value of any measured quantity “. Comment on this statement. In what sense then do you understand the values of ‘physical constants’ to be constants? 11
  • 12. References: 1. “Practical physics”, G.L.Squires, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 1985. 2. “Laboratory Experiments in College Physics”, C.H.Bernard and C.D. Epp, John- Wiley and Sons, Inc, New York, 1995. 3. Cohen, E.R and Taylor, B.N, J. Phys. and Chem. Reference data ,vol 2, page 663,1973 12
  • 13. Experiment 1 Error Analysis and Graph Drawing Assignments: 1. Experimental data (in arbitrary units) of some experiment is given below : x -10 4 10 16 20 35 40 32 40 45 53 60 65 70 80 85 y -17 -20 -30 -17 -35 -2 -19 -3 -4 10 11 24 20 30 37 47 x 100 115 120 122 129 133 140 141 150 151 154 157 160 170 172 183 y 50 80 77 79 80 83 80 100 90 113 102 110 100 106 101 200 (a) Assuming 10% of error in Y values, plot the data on preferred graph paper showing the errors in terms of error bars. (b) Calculate the slope and intercept of the best fit graph .Draw the best fit graph on the above graph. 2. The expression of refractive index of a prism id given by the following relation: A+D sin 2 = . Assuming the error of A and D as A and D, express the error of sin(A / 2) . Here ‘A’ is the angle of the prism and ‘D’ is the angle of deviation. 3. The relation between two independent variables X and Y is given as the empirical expression Y = a X + b X3 .The experimental data for X and Y are given below : X : 0.130 0.192 0.232 0.263 0.299 0.326 0.376 0.392 0.416 0.454 0.471 Y : 0.280 0.405 0.504 0.593 0.685 0.749 0.922 0.986 1.049 1.192 1.256 X : 0.492 0.533 0.541 Y : 1.332 1.51 1.531 Rearrange the equation to plot the graph in simpler form. (Hint: Plot Y/X vs X2). (Why?) .Then find out the constants ‘a’ and ‘b’ from the graph .Try to co-relate the 13
  • 14. expression with some practical experiment in physics and give your comments about the constants. 4. Expression of some function is given by, Y=a X b, where ‘a’, ‘b’ are unknown .Use the following experimental data to find out the constants by plotting an appropriate graph of Y vs. X. Try to co-relate the above expression with some practical experiment in physics and give your comments about the constants. X : 465 599 688 720 878 922 1025 1220 1311 1410 1509 Y : 2589 7106 12132 15680 25090 40616 60142 117626 168086 222876 287091 5. The ionic conductivity of (C) of a crystal is given as a function of temperature (T) by the equation, C = C0 exp (+ E/kT) where k is Boltzmann constant. (T is in Kelvin and C is in CX107 cgs unit) T : 746 805 825 853 875 885 915 952 965 990 CX107 : 1.82 2.90 5.85 8.40 19.1 32.7 66.1 120 245 418 Plot the experimental data on suitable graph paper and find out the value of C0 and E. (Four graph papers required). 14
  • 15. Experiment 2 Coupled Pendulum Apparatus: Two compound pendulums, coupling spring, convergent lens, filament bulb on stand, screen on stand, stop clock. Purpose of experiment: To study normal modes of oscillation of two coupled pendulums and to measure the normal mode frequencies. Basic Methodology: Two identical compound pendulums are coupled by means of spring .Normal mode oscillations are excited and their frequencies are measured. I. Introduction: I.1 The reason why the study of simple harmonic motion is important is the very general manner in which such a motion arises when we want the response of a system to small deviation from the equilibrium configuration .This happens for a wide variety of systems in Physics and Engineering. The response of a system to small deformations can usually be described in terms of individual oscillators making up the system. However, the oscillators will not have independent motion but are generally coupled to that of other oscillators. Think for example of vibrations in a solid. A solid can be thought of as being composed of a lattice of atoms connected to each other by springs. The motion of each individual atom is coupled to that of its neighboring atoms. The description of a system of coupled oscillators can be done in terms of its normal modes. In a coupled system the individual oscillators may have different natural frequencies. A normal mode motion of the system however will be one in which all the individual oscillators oscillate with the same frequency (called the normal mode frequency) and with definite phase relations between the individual motions. If a system has n degrees of freedom (i.e. has n coupled oscillators) then there will be n normal modes of the system. A general disturbance of the system can be described in terms of a superposition of normal mode vibrations. If a single oscillator is excited, then eventually the energy gets transferred to all the modes. I.2 In this experiment we will study some of the above features in the simple case of two coupled compound pendulums. The system studied in the experiment consists of two identical rigid pendulums, A and B. A linear spring couples the oscillations of the two pendulums. A schematic diagram of the system is given in Figure 1. The motion of the two pendulums A and B can be modeled by the following coupled differential equations ( A and B are the angular displacements of A and B, and I being their moments of inertia) 15
  • 16. Fig 1 The equations of motion of the two physical pendulums are easily obtained. Let A and B be the angular displacement, and xA and xB the linear displacements of the two pendulums respectively .The compression of spring will be l ( x A − x B ) = .where l is the distance between the point of suspension and the point L where the spring is attached and L is the length of the pendulum. The equation for pendulum A thus will be d2 A l I = − m g LC M sin A − k ( x A − xB ) l cos A ------------------------ dt 2 L (1) where the first term on the right hand side is the restoring torque due to gravity (LCM being the distance between the point of suspension and the position of the center of mass of pendulum A) while the second term that due to the spring force .Assuming the mass attached to the pendulum A to be sufficiently heavy we can equate LCM and L. We also consider small displacements A, so that sin A A and cos A 1. Substituting A = xA / L and using the above approximations, we obtain the following equation of motion for linear displacement xA: d 2 xA mgL l2 =− x A − k ( x A − xB ) ---------------------------------------- dt 2 I I (2) Like wise the equation for is d 2 xB mgL l2 =− xB − k ( x A − xB ) ---------------------------------------- dt 2 I I (3) 16
  • 17. Equations (2) & (3) are coupled, i.e. the equation for xA involves xB and vice – versa. Without the coupling, i.e. in the absence of the spring, xA and xB would be independent oscillations with the natural frequency 0 = (m g L ) / I . I.3 It is easy to find uncoupled equations describing the normal modes of the system. Define the variables x1 = xA + xB ; x2 = xA - xB ----------------------------------------(4) Adding and subtracting eqs(2) and (3) we obtain equations for the variables x1 and x2 as d 2 x1 mgL 2 =− x1 ---------------------------------------------------- (5) dt I d 2 x2 mgL k l2 =− x2 − 2 x 2 --------------------------------------------- (6) dt 2 I I Note that the equations for x1 and x2 are uncoupled .The variables x1 and x2 describe independent oscillations and are the two normal modes of the system .The general solution to these equations will be x1 (t ) = A1 cos( 1 t+ 1 ) ; x1 (t ) = A2 cos( 2 t+ 2 ) ---------------------- (7) (A1, A2 being the amplitudes of the two modes and 1 and 2 arbitrary phases).The corresponding natural frequencies are the normal mode frequencies: 2k l2 2k l2 1= 0 ; 2= 2 0 + = 0 1+ ------------------------- (8) I mgL mgL where 0 = is the natural frequency of each uncoupled pendulum. I It is instructive that to visualize the motion of the coupled system in these normal modes. If we excite only the first normal mode, i.e. x1(T) 0, but x2(t) = 0 at all times, the individual motions of pendulums A and B will be x A (t ) = 1 (x1 (t ) + x 2 (t ) ) = A1 cos ( 1t + ) = x B (t ) = 1 (x1 (t ) − x 2 (t ) ) ------------------ (9) 2 2 2 Note that in this mode xA = xB .This describes a motion in which both pendulums move in phase with the same displacement and frequency 1. On other hand if the second mode id excited, i.e. x1(t) = 0 for all times and x2(t) 0 the individual motions are x A (t ) = 1 (x1 (t ) + x2 (t ) ) = A1 cos( 2 t+ 2 ) = − x B (t ) = − 1 (x1 (t ) − x 2 ( t ) ) -------- 2 2 2 (10) 17
  • 18. In this mode the displacements of the pendulums are always opposite (x1(t) = - x2 (t) ). Their motions have the same amplitude and frequency (= 2) but with a relative phase difference of . Figure 2 shows the motions in the normal modes. I.4. A general motion of the coupled pendulums will be be a superposition of the motions of the two normal modes: 1 x A (t ) = [A1 cos ( 1 t+ 1 ) + A2 cos( 2 t+ 2 )] 2 1 x B (t ) = [A1 cos( 1 t+ 1 ) − A2 cos( 2 t+ 2 )] --------------------------------- (11) 2 For a given initial condition the unknown constants (two amplitudes and two phases) can be solved. Consider the case where the pendulum A is lifted to a displacement A at t = 0 and released from rest while B remains at its equilibrium position at t = 0. The constants can be solved (see Exercise 4) to give the subsequent motions of the pendulums to be − + x A (t ) = A cos 2 1 t cos 2 1 t 2 2 − + x B (t ) = A sin 2 1 t sin 2 1 t ----------------------------------- (12) 2 2 The motions of the pendulums A and B exhibit a typical beat phenomenon. The motion can be understood as oscillations with a time period 4 / ( 2 + 1) and a sinusoid ally varying amplitude A(t) with the amplitude becoming zero with a period of 4 / ( 2- 1). As an example, Figure 3(a),3(b) show plots of x(t)=sin(2 t)sin(50 t) and x(t)=cos(2 t)cos(50 t) vs. t respectively. 18
  • 19. II. Setup and Procedure: 1. Uncouple the pendulums. Set small oscillations of both pendulums individually. Note the time for 20 oscillations and hence obtain the average time period for free oscillations of the pendulums and the natural frequency 0. 2. Couple the pendulums by hooking the spring at some position to the vertical rods of the pendulums. Ensure that the spring is horizontal and is neither extended nor hanging loose to begin with. 3. Switch on the bulb and observe the spot at the centre of the screen. 4. Excite the first normal mode by displacing both pendulums by the same amount in the same direction. Release both pendulums from rest. The spot on the screen should oscillate in the horizontal direction. 5. Note down the time for 20 oscillations and hence infer the time period T, and frequency 1 of the first normal mode. 6. With the spring at the same position excite the second normal mode of oscillation by displacing both pendulums in the opposite directions by the same amount and then releasing them from rest. 7. The spot on the screen should oscillate in the vertical direction. Note down the time for 20 oscillations and hence infer the time period T2 and frequency 2 . 8. Repeat these measurements for the spring hooked at 3 more positions on the vertical rods of the pendulums. (Part B) 9. For any one position of the spring (already chosen in Part A), now displace any one pendulum by a small amount and (with the other pendulum at its equilibrium position) release it from rest. Observe the subsequent motion of the pendulums. Try to qualitatively correlate the motion with the graph shown in Fig. 3. Measure the time period T of individual oscillations of the pendulum A and also the time period T between the times when A comes to a total stop. Repeat these measurements three times for accuracy. Infer the time periods T1, and T2 of the normal modes from T and T and compare with earlier results. (Note: Your measurements will be more accurate only if you choose t somewhat smaller than the total length L, i.e. choose a position of the coupling spring which is intermediate in position). 19
  • 20. III. Exercises and Viva Questions 1. What are normal modes of a system? How many normal modes will a system posses? 2. Infer the normal mode frequencies for the coupled pendulum by directly considering the motion in the two modes as shown in fig 2. 3. Qualitatively explain why the first normal mode frequency is independent of the position of the spring while the second normal mode frequency increases with l, the distance of the spring from the point of support. 4. For the cases where pendulum A is lifted and released from rest derive unknown constants A1, A2 , 1 , 2 in equation (11) to obtain the solution equation (12). 5. Explain the effect of damping on the motion. Redraw figure 3 qualitatively if damping is present. 6. List all the approximations made in the theory of the double pendulum treated in the theory as against the actual apparatus used and estimate the error introduced. Also, consider possible sources of random errors while conducting the experiment. 7. Explain why the spot on the screen moves the way it does, i.e. horizontally when the 1st normal mode is excited and vertically when the 2nd normal mode is excited. 8. Describe and explain the motion of the spot on the screen when only pendulum is displaced. 9. In part B, derive the expressions for the normal modes 1 and 2 from the T and T .What is the reason that the procedure asks you to choose a value of l small compared to L for better accuracy? 10. Give some more examples of coupled oscillations from Physics or Engineering systems. References 1. “Vibrations and Waves”, A.P .French, Arnold-Heinemann, New Delhi, 1972. 2. “The elements of Physics”, I.S.Grant and W.R.Phillips ,Oxford University Press, Oxford 20
  • 21. Coupled Pendulums Observations and Results Position of Mode 1 Mode 2 spring from pivot Time(sec) Period T1 Angular Time(sec) Period T2 Angular l (cm) frequency frequency (for 20 (sec) (for 20 (sec) oscillations) 1 (sec -1 ) oscillations) 2 (sec -1 ) Table of Observations for Part B Position of spring l = __________________ cm (Note that this has to be one of the values Chosen in PART A) Time period Time Average Average Angular Angular S.No between period frequency frequency successive between T T oscillations successive (sec) (sec) 1 1 1 1 =2 − =2 + stops 1 T ∆T 2 T ∆T T (sec) T (sec) 1 2 3 Calculations and Graph 2 2 2 2 1. On the same graph paper plot 1 / 0 and 2 / 0 vs. l2 . 2 2 2. Obtain the slope of the graph of 1 / 0 vs. l2 and hence obtain the spring constant k of the coupling spring Slope = 2 k / (mgL) = _____________________ Spring constant k = _______________________dynes / cm Conclusions: (One graph paper required). 21
  • 22. Experiment 3 Study of Small Oscillations using a Bar Pendulum Apparatus: A bar pendulum with holes for hanging, Wall support for hanging, stop clock, meter scale, knife edge for measuring the center of mass of the bar. Purpose of experiment: To measure the acceleration due to gravity (g) by small oscillations of a bar pendulum. Theory The period of oscillations T of a body constrained to rotate about a horizontal axis for small amplitudes is given by the expression 1 I 2 T = 2π (1) mgd where m is mass of the body , d is the distance between center of mass (CM) and the axis of rotation and I is the moment of inertia ( MI) about the axis of rotation given by (from parallel axis theorem) I = I 0 + md 2 (2) where, Io is the moment of inertia about parallel axis through center of mass . If k is the radius of gyration ( i.e. I 0= mk2 ). Then from eqs (1) and (2) 4π 2 2 T 2d = g (k + d 2 ) (3) By recording the period of oscillations T as a function d we can determine the values of gravitational acceleration g as well as moment of inertia Io of the body . The plot of T Vs d , shows a minimum time period at d= K ,given by 1 2k 2 Tmin = 2π (4) g Experimental Set-Up In this experiment the rigid body consists of a rectangular mild steel bar with a series of holes drilled at regular interval to facilitate the suspension at various points along its length (see Fig.1). The steel bar can be made to rest on screw type knife-edge fixed on the wall to ensure the oscillations in a vertical plane freely. The oscillations can be monitored accurately using a telescope. The radius of gyration for this bar is 22
  • 23. l 2 + b2 k2 = (5) 12 where l & b are the length & breath of the bar respectively. Experimental Procedure: 1. Determine the center of mass (CM) by balancing the bar on a knife-edge. Measurement of d is made from this point to the point of suspension for each hole. 2. Suspend the bar by means of knife-edge. 3. Focus the telescope on to the marker marked on the pendulum. There should not be any parallax between the image of the marker and the cross wire in the eyepiece of the telescope. 4. Measure the time for 10 to 20 oscillations for different d (only on one side of CM). Repeat each observation several times. Plot T Vs d. Calculate k and g from this graph. Plot T2d Vs d2. Using linear regression technique fit the data and determines k and g from it. Estimate maximum possible error in g. 23
  • 24. Experiment 3 Bar Pendulum Observations and Results Least count of the measuring scale used = …………………. Least count of the stop watch used = …………………. Table I S. No. Distance from No. of Time period Time period (T) T2d d2 CM of axis oscillations for n for 1 oscillation (d) in cm (n) oscillations (Tn/n) (Tn) 1 (i) (ii) (iii) 2 (i) (ii) (iii) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Calculation: Tmin from the graph =….at d=…… At Tmin , d=k=… 24
  • 25. 2k Tmin=2π , so, g =……. g From the plot of T2d vs. d2 , find the slope and intercept from linear regression. From the Slope (4π2/g) , g can be calculated and from the intercept [(4π2/g)k2], k can be calculated. 1/ 2 l 2 + b2 k can be calculated using the formula and compared with the value derived 12 from the graph. Why are the two k values different? Results: ‘g’ value from T vs. d plot is …… ‘g’ value from T2d vs. d2 plot is ……. Average value of ‘g’ = ….. (Two graph papers required). References: 1. Haliday, Resnick and Walker, “Fundamentals of Physics”, 6th Ed. (John Wiley, Singapore, 2001), Chap. 16. 25
  • 26. Experiment No. 4 Rotational Inertia of a Rigid Body Apparatus Torsional pendulum, support for hanging the pendulum, regular circular body, irregular body, stop clock. Objective: To measure the rotational inertia of an object by dynamic method. Theory The equation of motion for small undamped rotational oscillations is d 2θ I + Cθ = 0 (1) dt 2 Where I is the rotational inertia of the body about the chosen axis, is the angular displacement and C is the restoring (controlling) torque per unit angular displacement. This controlling torque is provided by the elastic rigidity of the wire with which the rigid π r4 body is suspended. For a wire of radius r, length l and rigidity modulus G, C = G 2l (2) Equation (1) represents a simple harmonic motion with angular frequency ω given by C ω= I And time period of oscillations I T = 2π (3) C In this experiment the time period ( TO ) of the bare oscillating system is measured first and then with a regular body added to it. Since the rational inertia of regular body can be calculated from its dimensions and 26
  • 27. mass, we could use equation (3) in the two cases as follows : For the bare system I0 T0 = 2π (4) C Where I0 is the moment of inertia of the bare system. With the regular body added, the time period would become I0 + K T1 = 2π (5) C Where K is the rotational inertia of the regular body. One can solve equations (4) and (5) to get I0 and C using the two measured time periods T0 and Tl If the given irregular body replaces the regular body then equation (5) gets modified to I0 + X TX = 2π (6) C Where X is the rotational inertia of the irregular rigid body . Since I and C are known, X can be calculated from equation (6). Experimental Procedure 1. First ensure that the plate of the oscillating system is horizontal. You may have to adjust the leveling ring for this purpose. 2. Measure the frequency of oscillations of the system by timing about 30 oscillations or so. You may repeat the measurements a number of times to get a good mean value for the time period T0. Formulae used are applicable only for small oscillations. 3. Place the regular body at the center of the plate and measure the frequency of oscillations again, by timing the number of oscillations as before for measuring the time period Tl. 27
  • 28. 4. Replace the regular body by the given object (irregular body) and measure the time period of oscillation Tx.. Observation Table S. System Number of Time for 30 Time Average NO oscillations oscillations Period Time period (sec) (sec) (sec) 1. Bare system (Repeat T0 = several times) 2. With (Repeat T1= Reg.body Several times) 3. With Irreg. (Repeat TX= body Several times) Reference: Haliday, Resnick and Walker, “Fundamentals of Physics”, 6th Ed. (John Wiley, Singapore, 2001), Chap. 11. 28
  • 29. Experiment 5 Velocity of sound Apparatus: Audio frequency generator, speaker, microphone, Cathode Ray Oscilloscope (CRO), meter scale, large board (or wall), Thermometer (0-1000C) Purpose of experiment: i) To determine the Velocity of Sound ii) To understand the operation of a CRO Basic methodology: Sound waves produced by an audio frequency generator are made to reflect off a large reflecting board forming standing waves. A microphone connected to a CRO serves to measure the amplitude of the sound. The wavelength of sound waves is obtained from the positions of the nodes. I. Introduction: I.1. Standing waves are produced when two progressive sinusoidal waves of the same amplitude and wavelength interfere with each other. Consider two traveling waves traveling along the positive and negative x directions respectively y1 ( x , t ) = A sin ( kx − ω t ) ------------------------- (1) y 2 ( x , t ) = A sin (kx + ω t ) ------------------------- (2) where A is the amplitude of the waves, k = 2 is the wave number and = 2 f is the angular frequency. The quantity y(x,t) is the displacement of the medium at the point x and time t. When the two waves are made to interfere then by the principle of superposition, the net displacement is the sum of the individual displacements. Thus, y( x , t ) = y1 ( x , t ) + y 2 ( x , t ) = A sin (kx − ω t ) + A sin(kx + ω t ) y( x , t ) = (2 A sin kx ) cos ω t --------------------------------- (3) The resulting displacement, eq(3) , represents a wave of frequency , and an amplitude, 2Asin kx , which varies with the position x. The amplitude is zero for values of kx that gives sin kx = 0 . These values are kx = n for n =0,1,2,3………… Now k =2 / . Therefore, nπ x= , n = 0,1,2,3......... ----------------------- (4) 2 represents the positions of zero amplitude .These points are called nodes .Note that λ adjacent nodes are separated by , half of a wavelength. 2 29
  • 30. The amplitude of the standing wave has a maximum value of 2A, which occurs for values of ‘kx’ that give sin kx = 0 . These values are 1 kx = (n + )π , n = 0,1,2,3.......... ------------------------ (5) 2 The positions of maximum amplitude are called antinodes of the standing wave.The λ antinodes are separated by and are located half way between pairs of nodes. Now, 2 a sound wave is a longitudinal wave representing displacement of particles in the medium and the resulting pressure variations. Traveling sound waves can also be taken to be represented by eqs. (1) and (2) with y(x,t) denoting the longitudinal displacements of air particles. The velocity of the sound wave will be given by v= /k=f ---------------------------------- (6) In this experiment standing waves of sound are formed in air. The distance between successive nodes or antinodes is /2. By measuring the distance between the nodes, the wavelength can be determined and hence the velocity v of sound (knowing the frequency f). The apparatus of the experiment includes a cathode ray oscilloscope (CRO). One of the aims of the experiments is to provide a familiarity with the use of a CRO. The main features and controls of a CRO are described in the appendix to this experiment. II. Setup and Procedure Fig 1 shows the basic setup of the apparatus. PART A Connect the audio frequency generator to the loudspeaker (L) and adjust the controls of the generator so that the speaker produces a sound signal in the frequency range I - 10 kHz. Place the loud speaker facing a large board B (or a wall) at a distance of about one meter. Connect the small microphone (M) mounted on the bench. Connect the signal from the microphone to the y-channel of the CRT. Select a proper scale for the horizontal time base to observe a stationary sinusoidal trace on the screen of the CRT. Adjust the vertical and horizontal positions so that the trace is symmetrically positioned on the screen. Observe that the amplitude of 30
  • 31. the trace changes as the position of the microphone is varied along the bench. Measure the period of signal by reading the number of horizontal divisions separating the minima of the signal on the CRO screen. From the chosen scale for the time base determine the time interval between successive minima of the trace and hence calculate the frequency of the signal and compare with the frequency generated by the audio generator. Next place the microphone close to the wall and move it away from the wall. Note down the positions of the nodes, i.e. where the amplitude of signal on the CRT screen becomes minimum. Note down the positions of at least five successive nodes. Repeat this measurement for three different frequencies. PART A Set the Trigger source for the oscilloscope to external Trigger. Connect the output of the speaker to the X input of the scope. Observe the Lissajous pattern produced on the screen. Move the microphone along the bench and observe different Lissajous patterns. Sketch the observed patterns for the cases when the phase difference between X and Y signal are 00, 900, 1800, 2700. (Note: due to small amplitude of the signals the observed pattern may be small in size. Also due to attenuation of the reflected signals there can be distortion of the pattern). Select (say) the straight-line pattern for O' or 180' phase difference. Starting from the position nearest to the loudspeaker move the microphone outwards towards the wall and note the positions of where the selected pattern repeats. The distance between two successive such positions corresponds to the wavelength of the sound wave. Precautions: 1. The microphone should be moved along the axis of the loudspeaker. 2. It is advisable to measure the position of nodes rather than antinodes 3. To lower error in the velocity determination the position of the nodes should be accurately determined. 4. The intensity of the CRO spot / pattern should be set LOW especially when the spot is stationary to avoid damage to the fluorescent screen 5. Learn the functions of the various control knobs of the CRO before operating the CRO. III. Exercises and Viva Questions: 1. What is a traveling wave? Write down equations representing waves traveling along +ve and -ve x directions. 2. What is a standing wave? Explain by superposing appropriate traveling waves. 3. What are nodes and antinodes? Draw a rough diagram depicting the standing wave formed in the experiment. Is the point at the reflection board a node or an antinode? 4. On what factors does the velocity of sound depend? What is the effect of temperature, pressure and humidity on the velocity of sound? 31
  • 32. 5. What are Lissajous figures? Explain by construction how Lissajous patterns are produced when two perpendicular oscillations of phase differences O0, 900, 1800, 2700 are superposed. 6. List the different sub-systems of a CRO and explain their operation and function. 7. Explain how a CRO can be used for voltage, frequency and phase measurements? How can a CRO be used for current measurement? 8. A periodic signal of 400Hz is to be displayed so that 4 complete cycles appear on the oscilloscope screen, which has 10 horizontal divisions. To what settings should the Trigger source and sweep Time / div be set to allow this pattern to be displayed? 9. Explain what triggering, internal and external triggering mean. 10. List the possible sources of error in this experiment and quantitatively estimate References: 1. “Fundamentals of Physics”, D.Halliday, R.Resnick and J.Walker, 6th edition, John-Wiley & sons, New York. 2. “Physics”, M.Alonso and E.J.Finn, Addison-Wiley, 1942. 32
  • 33. Appendix: Cathode Ray Oscilloscope (CRO) A cathode ray oscilloscope (CRO) is a convenient and versatile instrument to display and measure analog electrical signals. The basic unit of a CRO is a cathode ray tube (CRT). The CRO displays the signal as a voltage variation versus time graph on the CRT screen. By properly interpreting the characteristics of the display the CRT can also be used to indicate current, time, frequency and phase difference. The basic subsystems of CRO are: 1. Display subsystem (CRT,) 2. Vertical deflection subsystem 3. Horizontal deflection subsystem 4. Power Supplies 5. Calibration circuits Fig.1 shows a schematic diagram block diagram of how the subsystems are interconnected to produce the observed signal. Fig. 1 The Signal is sensed at its source by the oscilloscope probe. The signal voltage is then transmitted to the oscilloscope along a coaxial cable and fed to the vertical display subsystem. After suitable amplification, the input signal is applied to the vertical deflection plates of the CRT. This causes the electrons emitted by the electron gun in the CRT to deflect vertically in proportion to the amplitude of input voltage. There is a simultaneous deflection of the electron produced by the horizontal deflection subsystem. The amplified input signal is also fed to the horizontal deflection subsystem. In order to produce a Y-t display a voltage that causes the horizontal position of the beam to be proportional to time must be applied to the 33
  • 34. horizontal deflection plates. The horizontal voltage called the sweep waveform is generally of a saw tooth form. Fig. 3 shows has the time variation of the input signal is displayed with help of the sweep waveform. The synchronization of the input signal with the sweep wave form is carried out by the time base circuitry. A triggering signal (which could be the input signal or an external signal) is fed to a pulse generator. The emitted pulses are fed to a sweep generator, which produces a series of sweep waveforms. Controls on the CRO front panel: A. General Intensity: Controls the intensity of the spot on the screen by controlling the number of electrons allowed to pass to the screen Focus: Controls the focusing of the electron beam. X Shift / Y Shift: Changes the deflection voltages by a constant amount to shift the signal vertically or horizontally. B. Vertical Deflections Subsystem Vertical sensitivity: Amplifier for the vertical deflection subsystem calibrated in ten-ns of sensitivity. The input voltage can be determined from the deflection of the signal. For eg., if the vertical sensitivity is set at 50 mV/div and the vertical deflection is 4 div, then the input voltage is 50 x 4 = 200 mV. Var (Vldir): Vernier control for continuous vertical sensitivity. 34
  • 35. C. Horizontal Deflection Subsystem Sweep Time (Time/dir): Controls the sweep time for the spot to move horizontally across one division of the screen when the triggered sweep mode is used. Var (Time/div): Vernier control for continuous change of sweep time. Trigger: Selects the source of the trigger signal, which produces the sweep waveform. Internal Trigger: The output of the vertical amplifier is used to trigger the sweep waveform. External Trigger: An external signal must be applied to the X inputs to trigger the sweep waveform. Sweep Magnifier: Decreases the time per division of the sweep waveform. Trigger Level: Selects amplitude point on trigger signal that causes sweep to start. Trigger Mod: AUTO provides normal triggering and provides baseline in absence of trigger signal. NORM permits normal triggering but no sweep in absence of triggering. TV provides triggering on TV field or TV line. References: 1. “Student Reference Manual for Electronic Instrumentation”, S.E.Wolf and R.F.M.Smith, PHI, New Delhi, 1990. 2. “Basic Electronic Instrument Handbook”, C.F.Coombs, Mc Graw Hill Book Co., 1972. 35
  • 36. Observations and Results PART A 1. Room Temperature = _________________________0C 2. Frequency of Audio signal = _________________________ 3. Time/div scale setting = _________________________ 4. Calculated frequency from CRO screen = _________________ Table 1 : Position of Nodes S.No Position of microphone at nodes(cm) Distance between successive nodes for the following frequencies(in cm) Frequency f1=______kHz f2=_____kHz f3=_____kHz f1=______kHz f1=______kHz f1=______kHz 1 2 3 4 5 Calculations: f1 = ____ kHz f2 = _____kHz f3 = _______kHz Average /2 (cm) Average (cm) Velocity of Sound , v = f 36
  • 37. Results: The velocity of sound in air at room temperature __________0 C is v = _________________________________ m/ sec. Estimate the error in your determination of velocity of sound: VEmp (T) = V0 T ; V0 = at 200 or NTP ∆V Then calculate VEMP ∆V = VEMP ~ Vtmp PART B 1. Sketch Lissajous pattern observed on the CRO screen for the phase differences of 00, 900, 1800, 2700 between X and Y signals. 37
  • 38. Table 2 Frequency of audio signal = …………………………………………. Phase difference for pattern selected = ………………………………. S. No. Position of microphone Difference between successive position λ (cm) 1 2 3 4 5 Average λ= ______________________________ cm Result: The velocity of sound v=f λ = ____________________________ m/s Do error analysis same as in part A. 38
  • 39. Experiment 6 Radiation from a Black Body: Stefan-Boltzmann Law Apparatus Blackened hemisphere (metal), heating coil, blackened silver disk, thermocouple, power supply, stop clock etc. Objective To determine the Stefan–Boltzmann constant by studying the radiation received from a black body radiator. Theory The total radiation from black body is given by Stefan-Boltzmann relation R = σT 4 (per cm2 per sec) ………………. (1) where R is the radiant energy per unit area per unit time and T is the absolute temperature of the body. This relation was empirically deduced by Josef Stefan from the experimental results of John Tyndall and was derived by Ludwig Boltzmann from theoretical considerations based on thermodynamics. Consider a black body radiator at temperature T1 and a metal disc at temperature T2 as the receiver of the radiation (fig 1.). If R1 and R2 be the radiation absorbed and emitted by the receiving metal disc respectively, then the energy gained per second by the disc is (R1- R2 )A ; where A is the area of cross-section of the disc. If m and s are the mass and specific heat of the disc, then dT2 (R1 − R2 ) σA 4 ms dt = J A= J (T1 − T24 ) Jms dT2 σ= (2) A(T1 − T2 ) dt 4 4 where dT2/dt is the rate of change of temperature of the disc. J=Joules’ equivalent (4.2×107 ergs/calorie). Experimental Setup The experimental Setup (Fig.1) consists of a blackened hollow hemisphere which could be heated to a uniform temperature (T1) by passing electric current through a nichrome heating element wounded over it. 39
  • 40. The black body could be maintained at any desired constant temperature up to about 2000 C by passing appropriate current through heating coil. A copper–constantan thermocouple 1 connected to outer surface of B is used to ensure that temperature of the body is constant before starting the experiment. A blackened silver disc S serving as the receiver is inserted into the hole in B. The thermocouple 2 connected to the disc is used to measure its temperature. Procedure: 1. Heat B to a uniform temperature (usually heating will be started before you come to the lab). Ensure that the temperature of the black body is constant by monitoring the thermo emf developed by thermocouple 1 for few minutes (ignore small fluctuations in micro voltmeter display). 2. Insert a thermometer through the hole provided for the disc S carefully and measure the temperature T1 of the black body. 3. Replace thermometer with the silver disc carefully and mount it properly (make sure that disc is at room temperature before inserting). 4. Record the thermo emf of thermocouple 2 developed as a function of time (say at 10 sec interval). 5. Note down the mass and diameter of the disc. 6. Convert the thermo e.m.f. to temperature (T2) by using the calibration chart for it (will be supplied to you). 7. Plot T2 as function of time, obtain dT2/dt from the data and calculate the value of σ. (Specific heat of the silver disc at room temperature s= 0.235Jg-1K-1 ) Observations: Mass of the disc: Diameter of the disc: Temperature of the black body (T1)= … Temperature of the disc (T2)=…. 40
  • 41. Table for recording thermo e.m.f. as a function of time: Sl. No. Time (sec) Thermo e.m.f. (mv) Temperature (K) 1 10 2 20 3 30 4 40 5 50 6 60 7 70 … 80 … 90 … …. Plot T vs. time and find the slope and use eqn. (2) to calculate σ. Result: Measured value of σ = ……. (Two graph papers required). References: 1. M. W. Zemansky and R. H. Dittman, “Heat and Thermodynamics, an intermediate textbook” (MGH, 6th ed, 1981), Chap. 4. 2. B. L. Worshnop and H. T. Flint, “Advanced Practical Physics for Students” (Khosla Publishing House, 1991). 41
  • 42. Experiment 7 Melting point of Solids Apparatus Electric oven/heater, glass tube, thermometer, thermistor, voltmeter, unknown solid for which melting point is to be found out. Objective To calibrate a thermistor using a thermometer and using the calibrated thermistor as temperature sensor find the melting point of a given chemical compound. Theory: Thermistors (the name originated from thermal resistors) are basically semiconductor devices with a characteristic negative temperature co-efficient of resistance. The temperature dependent resistance of the thermistor is exploited in its application as a temperature sensor. The sensitivity (>6% change in resistance per 0C rise in temperature) and its rugged construction made it suitable for precision temperature measurement in the temperature range –100°C to 300°C. Since thermistors are made up of a mixture of metallic oxides such as Mn,Ni,Co,Fe,U etc., their resistance could be tailored between 0.5 Ω to 75 MΩ. They can also be made in varying sizes(beads as small as 0.15mm dia.) and shapes. Thermally cycled thermistors give an extremely reproducible and reliable resistance value over the specified dependence of the resistance of a typical thermistor. Melting point of a solid: In a solid, the relative distance between two atoms is fixed and atoms occupy equilibrium positions. These atoms oscillate about their equilibrium positions. When the substance is heated, the energy is partially used to increase the amplitude of atomic oscillations. This results in thermal expansion of solid. At sufficiently high temperature the solid melts, i.e. the atoms leave their equilibrium position overcoming the binding energy and wander great distances through the resulting liquid. However, even just below the melting point the atoms are in the vicinity of their equilibrium positions. Hence substance must be supplied an extra energy required for melting process. This extra energy is called latent heat. If energy is supplied at uniform rate, the sample remains steady at melting temperature until it absorbs the latent energy. The typical plot of temperature variations of a solid across its melting point, with time is shown in fig.1. DVM Melting point Fig. 1 Fig. 2 42
  • 43. Experimental Set up: An electrical oven has been designed for this experiment. A heating element is wound a thin hard glass test tube. This test tube is thermally insulated from outer wall of the oven. This oven can heat the substances up to 110°C by passing appropriate amount of current. The thermistor resistance is measured using a Digital voltmeter (DVM). The schematic of the setup is shown in Fig. 2. Procedure: The thermistor and the thermometer put together in the oven and heat the oven by passing appropriate current through it. Measure the resistance of the thermistor from room temperature to about 80°C. Plot the graph for resistance Vs temperature.(Switch off the power supply immediately just after taking the readings). Now take the supplied chemical in a test tube with the thermistor and put it inside the oven (Make sure that initially inside of the oven is around the room temperature). Heat the oven and measure the resistance of the thermistor in a regular time interval beyond the melting point(as you know during melting resistance of the thermistor will be remain almost constant) Analysis: Plot the resistance Versus time. Calculate the melting point of the given sample using the characteristics shown in fig. 1. Observations: Calibration of thermistor : S. No. Temperature (oC) Resistance (Ω) 1 RT (25) 2 30 3 35 4 40 5 45 6 50 7 55 … … …. … …. … S. No. Time (sec) Resistance (Ω) 1 0 2 10 3 20 4 30 5 40 6 50 7 60 … … …. … …. … 43
  • 44. Analysis: Plot two graphs and find the melting point (temperature) from the flat region of the 2nd graph graph. Results: Melting point of the given solid is = …… oC (Two graph papers required). 44
  • 45. Experiment 8 e Measurement of by Thomson’s bar magnet method m Apparatus: Cathode ray tube (CRT) with power supply unit, one pair of bar magnets, high resistance voltmeter, magnetometer, and stopwatch. Purpose of the experiment: e To measure the specific charge, i.e. charge to mass ratio, of an electron using m Thomson’s bar magnet method. Basic Methodology: Electrons in a CRT are deflected in the vertical direction by applying a potential between the vertical deflection plates of the CRT. A magnetic field perpendicular to the deflecting electric field is produced using a pair of the bar magnets. The position of the magnets is adjusted so as to cancel the deflection of the electrons. The knowledge of the deflecting potential and the magnetic field of the bar magnets leads to a calculation of the specific charge. I. Introduction We have learnt that the electron has a negative charge whose magnitude e equals 1.6x10-19 Coulomb and mass (m) equal to 9.1 x 10-31 Kg. Millikan's Oil Drop method enables us to measure the electron charge but the mass of the electron can not be measured directly. It is calculated by measuring the value of e/m. The aim of this experiment is to determine value of e/m by Thomson's method. This involves the motion of an electron in a cathode ray tube (CRT). A simplified form of a cathode ray tube is shown in Fig. 1. The electrons are emitted from the cathode and accelerated towards the anode by an electric field. A hole in the accelerating anode allows the electrons to pass out of the electron gun and between the two sets of deflection plates. The metallic coating inside the tube shields the right end free of external electric fields and conducts away the electrons after they strike the fluorescent screen where they form a luminous spot. 45
  • 46. I.2 This experiment can be divided into the following parts: 1. The electric field (E) is applied alone. This produces a deflection of the electron beam. 2. A magnetic field is simultaneously applied along the electric field so that the deflection produced by the electric field is exactly counter-balanced by that produced by the magnetic field. As a result the spot made by the electron on the fluorescent screen returns back to the central position. Fig. 2 Let us consider an electron moving in the direction of magnetic meridian (say X- axis) with the velocity v0 m/s after passing through the accelerating anode. Under the action of the electrostatic field E = V/s ( s being the vertical distance between the plates VV/ and V the deflecting voltage)each electron ,as it passes between the plates , is acted upon by a perpendicular force eE. As a result the electron moves along a parabolic path AB(fig 2).The equation of motion is d2 y m = eE -------------------------------- (1) dt 2 which, upon integrating once with respect to time, gives dy eE v0 = t ------------------------------------ (2) dt m where v0 = dx / dt is the constant horizontal velocity .Here we also used the initial condition dy/dx = 0 at point A time t=0. At any point distant x(=v0 t) from point A in the field between the plates VV/, eq(2) gives dy eE = 2 x ------------------------------------- (3) d x m v0 On leaving the electrostatic field at point B (i.e. x=a), the electron moves along the tangential path BC with it’s velocity making an angle with the horizontal. Clearly, dy eE tan α = tan FBC = = 2 a ------------------------- (4) d x at po int B m v0 = Tangent to the curve AB at point B The electron finally strikes the screen at the point C (fig 2). The total vertical deflection of the electron y = CF + FO/ Now eEa L CF = BF Tan = L Tan = 2 --------------------------- (5) m v0 On the other hand, by eq (3), we have eEx eEa2 BD = 2 dx = 2 ------------------------------- (6) m v0 2 m v0 46
  • 47. Therefore the total displacement (y) in the spot position on the screen S due to the application of electric field between the plates VV/ is y = CF + FO/ = CF + BD eEa a y= 2 +L ----------------------------------- (7) m v0 2 Thus 2 e v0 y = ------------------------------------ (8) m a Ea +L 2 Hence, if the velocity of electron along the X-axis (v0) is known, the value of (e/m) can be calculated. I.3 Let B be the magnetic field produced by the two bar magnets placed symmetrically on either side of the cathode ray tube at a distance d from it. The magnetic field of the bar magnets will be in the east- west direction. The magnetic force in the electron ( ) is given by F = − e v × B . This step up a force Bev0 on the moving electron along the Y-direction. As a result, the electrons path becomes circular, with radius of curvature r given by 2 m v0 = B e v0 -------------------------------------- (9) r When the force on the electron beam due to crossed electric field and magnetic field is equal and opposite, the electron beam will be un deflected. For this we require E e E = ev 0 B or v0 = B The above analysis assumes that the magnetic field B is uniform. However the magnetic field produced by the bar magnet is non-uniform. Fig.3 shows the arrangement of the magnets with respect to the CRT. Fig.3 Note that the CRT is aligned along the magnetic meridian, i.e. S-N direction, which is the direction along which the horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic field, BE acts. Since BE and the electron velocity are parallel, there is no deflection produced by the earth’s magnetic field. The magnetic field produced by the bar magnet along the path of the electrons will be a function B(x) of the position of the element and will act in the EW direction as shown in fig 3. The deflection, y, due to the magnetic force will be in the negative y- direction. To calculate the total deflection of the electron as it moves from A (anode 47
  • 48. aperture) to S (screen) we proceed as follows. The radius of curvature r of the electron path y(x) in the presence of the magnetic field is related to the curvature of the path as 1 d2 y = r d x2 Of course, the radius of curvature will also change with position since the magnetic field changes, i.e. m v0 r = r(x) = by eq .(9). e B(x) Thus, d2 y e B( x ) 2 = -------------------------------- (10) dx m v0 which upon integrating gives, e B( x ) y(x) = dx dx m v0 The net displacement y at the position of the screen (i.e. x = L0 = L-a) is then L0 x e B( x ) eI y= dx dx = --------------------------- (11) 0 0 m v0 m v0 where we have denoted the double integral of the magnetic field as L0 x I= B( x ) dx dx ----------------------------- (12) 0 0 when the deflection due to the electric and magnetic field are the same then we can use eqs(7) &(11) and eliminate the unknown velocity v0 to obtain a +L aVy e 2 = ------------------------------- (13) m s I2 I.4. Approximate evaluation of: A calculation of the integral ‘I’ requires the knowledge of the magnetic field produced by the magnets along the path of the electron in the CRT. We now give an approximate calculation of I assuming that the magnets are very long compared to the length of the CRT (L0). (See fig 3). The effect of the distant poles can be ignored. The field at the point Q, which will be in a direction normal to the x-axis, is (m + m′) d B( x ) = 3 , (x 2 + d 2 ) 2 here, m and m/ are the pole strengths of the N and S poles . The maximum of the magnetic field, Bm occurs at x = 0. ( m + m ′) Bm = d2 Thus, we can write, Bm d 3 B( x ) = 3 ----------------------------- (14) ( x2 + d2 ) 2 48
  • 49. L0 x The integral I = d x d x B( x ) can be evaluated to give, 0 0 [ I = B m d d 2 + L20 − d 2 ] ------------------------------- (15) I.5. Determination of Bm: The value of Bm is determined from the period of oscillation of the magnetometer needle. The magnetometer is placed at the center in place of CRT so that the magnets are at a distance of d from it (see fig4). The magnetometer needle aligns itself along the resultant magnetic field fig 4 B = B 2 + B 2 where BE is the earth’s magnetic field acting towards south . E m A small disturbance of the needle about the equilibrium position causes it to oscillate. The angular frequency of small oscillations can be easily shown to be µB (Exercise 7) ω = , where is the magnetic moment of the needle and I it’s I I moment of inertia, and hence the time period of small oscillations T = 2 π . µB Now, the resultant magnetic field B = B 2 + B 2 = B m / sin θ 0 . Thus E m 4 π 2 I Sin θ 0 Bm = µ T2 In the absence of the magnets B=BE (due to the earth’s magnetic field) and the time I 4π 2 I period T0 = 2 π giving = T02 B E , µ BE µ Thus, T2 B m = 02 B E Sin θ 0 ------------------------------- (16) T With a determine of Bm the value of the eq(15) can be calculated and hence from eq(13) the value of (e/m). II. Setup and Procedure: PART A 1. Place the magnetometer on the wooden box enclosing the CRT. Rotate the dial so that 00-00 position is perpendicular to the length of the CRT. Next rotate the CRT with the magnetometer on it so that the magnetometer needle aligns along 00-00 position. In this position the CRT is aligned along the magnetic meridian (N-S position) while the scales attached perpendicular to the CRT (for magnetic mounting), are in E-W position. 2 Switch on the power supply and adjust the intensity and focus controls to obtain a fine spot on the CRT screen. (Note: the position of the spot may not be at the center of the CRT screen. Note down 49
  • 50. the initial position of the spot) 3. Choose a value of the deflection voltage and note down the deflection of the spot. (Note: the deflection has to be taken with respect to the initial spot position.) 4 Now extend the scales attached to the CRT and place identical bar magnets (as shown in Fig.3) and move the magnets symmetrically along the length of the scales until the spot deflection becomes zero (i.e. the spot returns to its initial position). Note the value d of the distance of the magnet poles from the center of the CRT. 5. Reverse the deflection voltage and (with magnets removed) note the deflection of the spot. 6. Place the magnets on the scale and find the value of d for which the spot returns to its 7. Repeat the above steps for three different spot positions (Note: The deflection voltage should not exceed 375 volts) PART B Determination of time period of oscillation of magnetometer needle: 1. Align the wooden arm on which the magnetometer is placed along the magnetic meridian and place the magnets along the scales in the EW direction at the same distance ‘d’ as in part A. 2. Note the equilibrium deflection 0. 3. With a third magnet, slightly disturb the needle from its equilibrium position and measure the time period of oscillations T. 4. Now remove the magnets and let the needle come to equilibrium at 00-00 position. 5. Disturb the needle about to this equilibrium position and measure the time period T0 of the oscillation. Precautions: 1. The Cathode ray tube should be accurately placed with its longitudinal axis in the magnetic meridian. 2. The spot on the screen should allowed to remain at a given position on the screen for a long time. 3. There should not be any other disturbing magnetic field near the apparatus. 4. While taking the observations for time periods, the maximum angular displacement of the magnetic needle should not exceed 40-50 degrees. III. Exercises and Viva Questions: 1. Study the working of a CRT. What is the typical value of accelerating voltage 50
  • 51. used in a CRT? Estimate the velocity ‘vo’ of the electron. 2. What will happen to the spot if a sinusoidally time varying voltage is applied to the deflecting plates VV/ or HH/? What will happen if such a voltage (of the same frequency) is applied simultaneously to the horizontal and vertical deflecting plates? 3. Draw a neat diagram showing the 3-dimensional orientations of vectors of the electron’s horizontal velocity, the electric field, the magnetic field the electric force on the electron and the magnetic force as the electron moves in the CRT. Orient your diagram according to the experimental set-up. 4. If the deflecting voltage is switched off but the bar magnets kept in place, will there be a deflection of the spot? Describe qualitatively the motion of the electron in the CRT from aperture to screen. 5. Describe the motion of the electron in the CRT in the presence of the deflecting voltage magnetic fields of the magnets 6. What is the effect of earth’s magnetic field on the electron motion? What would happen if the apparatus were rotated by 900 so that the CRT is along the EW direction? 7. Consider a dipole aligned with a magnetic field .If the dipole is given a small angular displacement, then it experiences a restoring torque ‘ ’ = Bsin , where ‘ ’ is the angle between the dipole and the magnetic field . Considering small displacements , show that the dipole will oscillate about the equilibrium B with angular frequency . Where ‘I’ is the moment of Inertia. I 8. Recalculate the integral ‘I’ (eq 12) assuming that the magnetic field of the magnet is a constant B=Bm. Use this to calculate the specific charge “e/m”. Does our approximate evolution of ‘I’ improve the evaluation of “e/m”? 9. What are the sources of error in this experiment? 10. How does your result compare with “e/m” measurement by Thomson’s method ? Which experiment is more accurate? References: 1. “Advance Practical Physics for Students”, B.L.Worsnop and H.T.Flint, Mentheum London, 1942. 2. “Physics”, M.Alonso and E.J.Finn, Addison-Wiley, 1942. 51
  • 52. Experiment 8 Measurement of e/m by Thompson’s bar magnet Method Observations and Results 1. Constant Values Length of plate, a = 2 cm Distance to screen from plate, L = 16.0 cm Distance between the plates, S = 0.4 cm Horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field BE = 3.53 X 10-5 T . PART A: Measurement of deflection y: Initial position of spot, yo = ____________________ cm (specify +ve or –ve) Table 1 Applied Displaced position of Displacement of spot y = Mean Position of magnet d Mean Voltage spot y1 (cm) y1 - yo Displacement (cm) d (cm) V(volts) Direct Reverse Direct Reverse y(cm) Direct Reverse 1 2 3 PART B Determination of Time period Table 2(all time measurements are in seconds) No. of Oscillations = ___________________ Without Magnet With Magnet S.No d = ____ cm d = ______ cm d = ______ cm = _____ deg = _____ deg = _____ deg Total To Total T Total T Total T time time time time Mean To Mean T 52
  • 53. Calculations: To2 Displacement Bm = T2 B E sin O [ I = B m d d 2 + L2o − d 2 ] a +L aVy e 2 = m s I2 1 2 3 Results: Calculated value of specific charge of electron (e/m) = __________________ C/Kg. Standard Value of (e/m) = _________________ C/Kg % error in e/m = _________________. 53
  • 54. Experiment 9 Measurement of “(e/m)” by helical coil method Apparatus: Cathode ray tube (CRT), CRT power supply, DC power supply (30V), solenoid, Rheostat, DC voltmeter, and connecting wires. Purpose of experiment: To measure the specific charge, i.e. .charge to mass ratio (e/m) of an electron. Basic methodology: Electrons are accelerated towards the screen of a CRT and also deflected by a transverse AC voltage. The CRT is placed in a magnetic field produced by a solenoid. The resulting motion of the electron is then helical .A measure of the pitch of the helix leads to a calculation of the e/m ratio . ________________________________________________________________________ Introduction 1.1 Electron are emitted at the cathode of a CRT and accelerated through an accelerating DC voltage Va towards the screen. In addition a small transverse (AC) voltage acts across the XX/ plates.. Once the electron leaves the plate region its velocity ‘v ‘is constant and makes angle with Z-axis. The component of it’s velocity along Z-axis is v|| =v cos When the AC deflecting velocity is switched on, different electrons receive varying velocity v and hence a line gets formed on the CRT screen. fig 1 I.2 When the CRT is placed along the axis of the solenoid then there is a magnetic field B= o n I (along the axis of the solenoid) which acts on the electron. Here n=number of turns per unit length of the solenoid and I=current in the solenoid, length of the solenoid and I=current in the solenoid. 54
  • 55. Fig 2 I.3 When the magnetic field is present the motion of the electron in the CRT is helical. This is seen as follows. Viewed along the Z-axis with the magnetic field coming out of the page, the magnetic field has the effect of making the electron move in a circular path (fig3). The centripetal force is 2 m v⊥ = e v⊥ B -------- (1) r Fig. 3 with v r ( is the angular velocity of circular motion =cyclotron frequency) eB gives = m 2 m The time period of evolution is T = ------------------------------------ (2) eB Note that T is independent of v Along with the circular motion the electron has a longitudinal velocity v|| v which transforms the purely rotational motion to helical path (fig 4) fig 4 I.4. The pitch of the helical motion is defined as longitudinal distance moved in one full rotational period i.e. 55
  • 56. I.4. The pitch of the helical motion is defined as longitudinal distance moved in one full rotational period i.e. 2 mv pitch = v||T -----------------(3) eB I.5. When the magnetic field is switched on the line on the CRT rotates and shrinks. The AC deflecting voltage produces a range of “v values (both +ve and –ve) for the transverse velocities of the electrons. The radii of different electrons will be different but all the electrons rotate through the same angle in the same time causing the line on the screen to rotate. (fig 5). From fig.5 , it is clear that if each electron rotates through a full circle then the line on the CRT screen will shrink to a point .For this purpose to happen the distance L (from plate to screen of the CRT )should at least equal to one pitch of the helix . By adjusting B the pitch of the helix can be made equal to L and the lines becomes a point .This is called fig.5 focusing action of the magnetic field. I.6 At this value of magnetic, we have 2 mv L= pitch = ---------------------- (4) eB The velocity ‘v’ of the electron can be estimated using the accelerating Va , by 2 e Va (½) m v2 = e Va > ----------------------------- (5) m Thus, 2 2 Va m L= B e giving, e 8 Va = --------------------------- (6) m L2 B 2 The value of the ratio (e/m) can be calculated knowing the accelerating voltage Va the distance L and the magnetic field of the solenoid B . II. Setup and procedure: 1. Insert the CRT in the solenoid approximately at the middle position. Place the axis of the solenoid parallel to the magnetic meridian. (This is to counter balance the effect of the Earth’s magnetic field). 2. Insert the plug of the CRT to the base of the power supply. 3. Connect the DC power supply, rheostat & solenoid in series as shown in fig.6 56
  • 57. Fig 6 4. Let the DC power supply to solenoid be switched off to begin with. Switch on the power supply to the CRT. Select the AC supply in the ‘Off’ position .Use the intensity & the focus controls to obtain a point –like spot at the center of the screen. Next select the AC supply in the ‘X’ position and adjust the voltage using the control to get a line on the screen about 1.5 cm long .Using a voltmeter across the terminals of the accelerating voltage supply adjust the control to set the voltage Va=250 V. 5. Switch on the DC power supply to the solenoid .As you increase the voltage the line on the screen shrinks and also rotates. Increase the voltage so that the line shrinks to a point on the screen. This is the focusing effect. If the does not completely shrink to a point in the voltage range available adjust the rheostat position till this is possible. Note down the current I1 through the solenoid at this point. 6. Keeping all settings same, interchange the contact at A&B (fig 6). This reverses the direction of the current in the solenoid. Adjust the DC supply till a point like image is again obtained on the screen and record the current I2. 7. Repeat step 4 & 6 for accelerating voltages Va=275V & 300V. III. Error analysis: 1. One of the major sources of error in the experiment is the horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field BE=3.53 x 10-5 T. This has partly been taken care of by our averaging procedure. Assuming that in the forward position the Bo adds to the solenoid field and that in the reverse position BE reduces the solenoid field 8 2 Va 8 2 Va Then (e / m )1 + (e / m )2 = 2 + 2 L ( B1 + B E ) 2 L (B1 − B E ) 2 Assuming BE << B1 & B2 , one can Taylor expand the RHS to get the following 8 2 Va 8 2 Va 16 2 Va − B E B E RHS ≅ + 2 2 + + 3 L2 B1 2 L B2 L2 3 B1 B2 The third term is negligible if B1=B2. Thus the average of (e/m)1 & (e/m)2 gives a value for e/m corrected for the earths magnetic field(BE). 57
  • 58. 2. Another source of error in our expression (eq 6) for e/m is that we have used a 2 e Va constant value v = for the velocity of the electron. This may be all right if m the acceleration is completed before the electron starts traveling the distance L. However if the acceleration extends beyond the edge of the X plates, then our use of constant ‘v’ will lead to an over estimate of e/m. 3. A further source of error is due to fact that the solenoid is of a finite length. The magnetic field along the axis of the solenoid varies with position. The value B= on I is strictly valid only for an infinite solenoid (see exercise 5) 4. General error analysis: Take a variation of eq (6) for e/m as a function of Va , L & B . Add the magnitude of all the terms in the variation and divide the expression by e/m .this leads to the estimation of the fractional error as ∆ (e / m ) ∆ Va ∆L ∆B = +2 +2 ----------------------------- (7) (e / m ) Va L B Va & L can be taken to be the least counts of the respective measuring instruments .The error in B i.e. B = ( o n I) can arise due to error in the current measurement and error in counting the number of turns. IV. Exercises and Viva Questions: 1. What will be the effect of the earth’ s magnetic field on the experiment? How is the effect accounted for in the experiment? 2. What will be the effect of keeping the solenoid axis perpendicular to the magnetic meridian? 3. Why does the line on the CRT screen rotate and shrink as the magnetic field is turned on? 4. What will be the difference in the experiment if the transverse deflecting voltage is DC instead of AC? 5. Evaluate the magnetic field on the axis of a solenoid of finite length (at point ‘p’ as shown in figure) and show that it is given by B=( on I / 2)(cos + cos ) 6. Derive equation (7). ∆ ( e / m) 7. Estimate the error in your experiment. ( e / m) 58
  • 59. 8. Refine the error estimate for the magnetic field by using exercise 5 and ∆ ( e / m) recalculate . ( e / m) 9. What happens to the pattern on the screen if the solenoid current is continuously increased? 10. Compare this experiment with the Thomson’ s bar magnet method for measuring e/m. References: 1. “ Fundamentals of Physics” , D.Halliday, R.Resnick and J.Walker, 6th edition, John- Wiley & sons, New York. 2. “ Electricity & Magnetism” , A.S .Mahajan and A.A.Rangwalla ,Tata –McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 59
  • 60. Experiment 9 Measurement of (e/m) by helical coil method. Observations and Results Constant values: 1. Distance between the edge of X deflecting plates and fluorescent screen, L = 9cm. 2. Total number of turns in the solenoid, N = 3350. 3. Length of the solenoid, l = ____________ cm. 4. Magnetic permeability of free space, o = 4 x 10-7 Nm2 / Amp2. Observation table : I1= Solenoid current I2 = Solenoid current (forward direction) (reverse direction) 1. Va = 250V 2. Va = 275V 3. Va = 300V Solenoid current and accelerating voltage at focusing Calculations and results: 1. B1 = ( oN I1) /( l ) 8 2 Va Va = 250V (e/m )1 = ---------- (e/m)avg = L2B12 = B2 = ( oN I1) /( l ) 8 2 Va (e/m)2 = ---------- L2B22 = 2. B1 = (e/m)1 = (e/m)avg = Va = 275 V B2 = (e/m)2 = 3. B1 = (e/m)1 = (e/m)avg = Va = 300 V B2 = (e/m)2 = 60
  • 61. Results: The calculated value of e/m =____________________C/kg. The standard value of e/m =_____________________C/kg. % Error in e/m =_____________________ 61
  • 62. Experiment 10 Charging and Discharging of a Capacitor Apparatus: Ballistic galvanometer, lamp, and scale, capacitor, resistor, solar cell, light filters, stop watch, two way switches, damping key , connecting wires . Purpose of experiment: i) To study the charging and discharging of a capacitor ii) To measure the time constant characterizing charging / discharging process iii) To understand the working of a ballistic galvanometer. Basic Methodology: A capacitor is charged by a solar cell and discharged (for different times) through a resistor and ballistic galvanometer .The deflection of the galvanometer is in proportion to the amount of charge that passes through it .A lamp and scale arrangement is used to measure the deflection. I. Introduction: I.1 The basic circuit for charging and discharging a capacitor is shown in fig 1. If switch S1 is closed keeping S2 open, then the battery charges the capacitor and current flows through the resistor R1 until the capacitor is fully charged. If the charge on the capacitor at time t is q(t) , then the voltage across the capacitor C is q/C .and the current through R1 is i = dq/dt . By applying Kirchoff’ s second law, fig.1 iR1 + (q/C) = R1 (dq/dt)+(q/C) = . -------------------- (1) which has the solution q(t) =C (1 – exp(-t / R1 C ) ) = qo(1 – exp(-t / R1C ) ) -----------------(2) where qo = C The quantity =R1C is the charging time constant which characterizes the rate at which charge is deposited on the capacitor .As t , eq (2) shows that q C In practice the capacitor charges to its maximum value qo after a time interval equal to a few time constants. Once the capacitor is fully charged then the current i through the resistor become zero. I.2 At this point if the switch S1 is opened and S2 is closed the charge in the capacitor discharges through the resistor R2 62
  • 63. By Kirchoff’ s second law dq q R2 + = 0 --------------------------------------- (3) dt C with the solution (taking q=qo at t=0) −t q ( t ) = q 0 exp ---------------------------------------(4) R2 C Thus the charge on the capacitor decays exponentially with time. In fact after a time t=R2 C (equal to the discharging time constant ) the charge drops from it’ s initial value qo by a factor of e-1 . II.2 In this experiment we will measure the quantity of charge present in the capacitor by discharging it through a ballistic galvanometer . The circuit for the experiment is shown in fig.2. fig 2. A solar cell generates emf upon being illuminated by a light source. The ballistic galvanometer is a sensitive detector of small quantities of charge. Thus, it is sufficient to charge the capacitor with solar cell, which typically produces an output of about 0.1 – 0.3 V. When the switch S1 is in the position L M and the switch S2 is in the position A B, then the capacitor gets charged. The time constant for charging is 1=R1C.If the switch S1is in the position L N, then the capacitor discharges through the resistor R2. The time constant is 2=R2C. At any point of time the charge residing on the capacitor, can be measured by changing S2 to the position A D, discharging the capacitor through the ballistic galvanometer (BG). II.3. Ballistic galvanometer: A galvanometer is an instrument, which uses magnetic effects for detecting and measuring currents or electric charge. In a moving coil galvanometer, a flat conducting coil is suspended between the poles of a permanent magnet (fig 3). The coil consists of an insulated wire wound on light brass or aluminum frame. The coil is usually suspended by a phosphor bronze strip, which also serves as the current lead for the current to the coil and is finally connected to a terminal at the base of the instrument. The other end of the coil is connected to a light spring, which provides the restoring couple. The other end of the spring is attached to the other 63
  • 64. terminal. A ballistic galvanometer is used for the purpose of measuring the total charge in an impulse current as against measurement of a steady current. For this we require that the period of oscillation of the moving coil be large compared to the time for the current pulse passing through it. This is achieved by loading the coil so as to increase its moment of inertia. Thus when the current pulse passes through it , the coil receives a kick due to an impulse torque. Subsequently the coil oscillates freely due to the restoring torque provided by the suspension. The maximum deflection amplitude (called first throw position) is reached long after the current is passed. A necessary requirement is also that damping is small. The fact that the coil is kicked from rest (much like a bullet is shot of a gun) leads to the nomenclature ballistic galvanometer for the instrument. The first throw position (maximum amplitude of deflection) is proportional to the total charge q = i dt in the current i passing through the coil. If A is the area of the coil , n is the number of turns of the coil and B is the magnetic field of the permanent magnet .Then the impulse on the coil is G = n (i A) B leading to an initial angular momentum ( I is the moment of inertia of the coil ) , I = G dt = n A B q ----------------------------(5) If the restoring torque provided by suspension is k then equating the initial kinetic energy To the work done by the restoring torque , we get 1 2 1 I ω = k θ 02 --------------------------------- (6) 2 2 which leads to (using eq 5 ), 1 q= Ik θ0 n AB I I Substituting T = 2 π , the period of free oscillations, we get k T k θ0 q= ----------------------------------- (7) π nAB 2 showing the proportionality relationship between q and 64
  • 65. The deflection of the coil is measured by the deflection of a light beam by the mirror attached to the coil (fig 4). This deflection is recorded as the linear deflection of the spot, X, that the reflected beam makes on the scale. Clearly X will also be directly proportional to the charge q discharged through the ballistic galvanometer. Thus, if the capacitor is discharged through the galvanometer after different charging / discharging times, the relation of X with time will be given by equations analogous to eqs (2) & (4). Note the damping key S in fig (2). When passed, this simply shorts the two ends of the galvanometer coil. fig 4 The oscillations of the coil get severely damped (why?). The damping key thus can used to stop the motion of the coil. . II. Set - up and Procedure: Part A: Measurement of time constant for charging of capacitor. 1. Connect the circuit as given in fig.2 with R1 = 0 (i.e. without the resistance R1). (This is to ensure that the charging of the capacitor by the solar cell is almost instantaneous) 2. Choose a filter for the light illuminating the solar cell. (The voltage output of the solar cell will depend on the intensity of the light illuminated it). 3. Switch on the lamp of the lamp and scale arrangement and adjust the arrangement so that a bright spot is obtained on the scale. Use the damping key S to bring the bright spot to rest. Note down the initial rest position of the spot. 4. Switch on the illumination to the solar cell with the key S1 in the L M position. The solar cell will then charge the capacitor. 5. After fully charging the capacitor (this should happen in the less than a minute), press the key S2 to the A D position. This will cause the capacitor to the discharge through the ballistic galvanometer. Note the deflection Xo of the first throw position of the spot. (Caution: The deflection should not be larger than about 20 cm. Causing too large to discharge through the galvanometer will cause a large and uncontrolled deflection of the coil which can damage the instrument. Choosing darker filter colours for the solar cell illumination can moderate the charge on the capacitor) 6. Depress the key S2 so that it is in the A B position and also set the key S1 so that it is in the L M ( charging ) position .Again fully charge the capacitor . 7. Set the key S1 to the L N position so that the capacitor discharges through the resistor R2. Discharge the capacitor for a time t (t can be measured with the help 65
  • 66. of a stop watch). At the end of the time t press S2 to the A D position and note the first throw position X . Repeat for t = 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 seconds. 8. Repeat the measurement for two different filters. Part B: Measurement of time constant for charging of capacitor. 1. Add the resistance R1 ( R1 2 M ) to the circuit as in fig 2 .Also remove the resistance R2 from the circuit leaving the node N unconnected. 2. Choose a filter and switch on the solar cell and set the key S1 in L M position to charge the capacitor. 3. At the end of a time interval t (measured by stop watch) turn the switch S1 to the L N position. This halts the charging of the capacitor. Now depress S2 to connect A D discharging the capacitor through the galvanometer and note the first throw deflection X. (Note: You will need to take a large number of measurements (about 10 – 15) to get proper results .Also make sure there are sufficient measurements for times smaller than and for times greater than the time constant .You could choose the following measurements : t = 5 , 10 , 15 , 20 , … … .60 seconds ) III. Exercises and Viva Questions: 1. Plot qualitatively the curves q(t) describing charging and discharging of a capacitor and explain these curves physically . 2. What is the physical meaning of the time constant = RC? Explain for both the cases of charging and discharging. 3. Estimate total charge deposited by the solar cell on the capacitor. Why do we need to use solar cell in the experiment? 4. What is the effect of changing the filter? Look at your observations and verify your expectations. 5. How does a ballistic galvanometer work? Why it is called so? Why do we need to use a ballistic galvanometer in this experiment? 6. Why is it necessary in a ballistic galvanometer, to have a relatively large moment of inertia for the moving coil and small damping ? 7. What is the effect on the galvanometer deflection on pressing the damping key? Explain why the damping is produced? 66
  • 67. 8. What would be the effect on the experiment if resistances of the order of 100 or 1 k were used? 9. By what percentage (with respect to the maximum charge on the capacitor C ) , does the capacitor charge / discharge in a time interval t = ,t = 2 ( = time constant )? 10. Estimate the width of the current pulse that passes through the ballistic galvanometer when the capacitor is discharged through it .You may need to have an idea of the intrinsic resistance of the galvanometer. References: 1. “ Physics” , M.Alonso and E.J.Finn, Addison-Wiley, 1992 2. “ Fundamentals of Physics” , D.Halliday, R.Resnick and J.Walker,6th edition, John- Wiley & sons, New York 2001. 67
  • 68. Experiment 10 Charging and Discharging of a Capacitor Observations and results Part A: Measurement of time constant for discharging of a capacitor R2 = ________________________ C = ________________________ PART A : Measurement of time constant for discharging of capacitor Table 1 Rest position of spot on the scale = ______________________ S.No Discharging First throw position X (cm) ln X time t (sec) Red Green 1 0 2 10 3 20 4 30 5 40 6 50 7 60 Calculations: Plot the graph of ln X vs. t and draw a best fit straight line .Obtain the time constant from slope ( = - 1 / R2 C ) of the line . Slope = 68
  • 69. = - (1 / slope) = Results: The value of time constant measured = __________________ sec The value of time constant calculated =___________________ sec Part B: Measurement of time constant for charging of capacitor Table 2 Rest position of spot on scale =___________________ S No Charging time t (sec) First throw position X (cm) 1 0 2 5 3 10 4 15 5 20 6 25 7 30 8 35 9 40 10 45 11 50 12 55 13 60 14 65 15 70 Calculations: Plot the graph X vs. t and fit a smooth curve. Draw an asymptote to the graph for large values of t. Estimate the asymptotic value Xo for X for large values of t. From the graph estimate the time at which X = Xo (1- e-1) = 0.63 Xo. This time is an estimate of the charging time constant = R 1 C. Explicitly Show the procedure on the graph. Results: 1. Estimated value of time constant = _______________ 2. Calculated value of time constant = R1C = ______________ (Two graph papers required). 69
  • 70. Experiment 11 Self Inductance and resistance of a coil Objective : To determine the self inductance and resistance of a coil with air core and iron core. Theory: Let us consider an R-L circuit connected to an ac supply as shown in Fig 1. Practically it is not possible to have an ideal inductor at room temperature. The present inductor coil has a self inductance of ' and resistance '. Let V 1 be the voltage drop L' r' across the coil which is the combination of voltage drop due to inductance ' and L' resistance '. Let VL and Vr be the voltage drop due to the inductive and resistive parts of r' the coil. From Fig.2 V 1= √ (VL2 + Vr 2) --------------------------------(1) Let V2 be the voltage drop across the resistor ' and ' be the total voltage drop across R' V' the R-L Circuit. The complete phase diagram is shown in Fig 3. From Fig.3, V 2 = V12 + V22 − 2V1V2 Cos (π − θ ) Or V 2 = V12 + V22 + 2V1V2 Cos(θ ) … (2) Vr = V1 Cos θ --------------------(3) V L = V1 Sin θ-------------------- (4) Also VL = I.L.ω ------------------(5) and Vr = I r--------------------- (6) 70
  • 71. By measuring the voltage V across resistor R, current I in the circuit can be determined. Measure V1, V2, and V to determine L and r using equations (2) to (6). Procedure: 1. Connect the R-L circuit to the oscillator using the given resistor and inductor coil (Fig. 1). 2. Set the oscillator frequency to 2 KHz and set the voltage amplitude in the oscillator such that the voltage drop across the inductor does not exceed certain Volts (… .). 3. Measure the voltage drops V 1 , V 2 and V for different values of R (Table 1). 4. Repeat the experiment by inserting an iron rod into the inductor coil. From eq (2) to eq (6) calculate the inductance L and resistance r of the coil for air core and iron core and plot them as a function of current in the circuit. Table1 Sl No. R(ohms) V(volts) V1(volts) V2(volts) Table2 Sl No R(ohms) I(amps) L(mH) R(ohm) 71
  • 72. Experiment 12 Resonance in LCR circuits Apparatus: Oscillator (1 to 150 kHz), variable capacitor, resistance, resistance box, AC mill voltmeter. Purpose of the experiment: To study resonance effect in series and parallel LCR circuit. This experiments also enables study of forced damped oscillation. Basic methodology: In the series LCR circuit, an inductor (L), capacitor (C) and resistance(R) are connected in series with a variable frequency sinusoidal emf source and the voltage across the resistance is measured. As the frequency is varied, the current in the circuit (and hence the 1 voltage across R) becomes maximum at the resonance frequency ν 0 = . In the 2π L C parallel LCR circuit there is a minimum of the current at the resonance frequency. I. Introduction: I.1 There is in general an analogy between resonating mechanical systems (like a driven spring mass system) and electrical systems involving inductors, resistor and capacitors. In the electrical case it is the charge q(t) on the capacitor (or the current I= dq/dt ) that satisfies a differential equation analogous to the displacement of the mass in the familiar spring mass system. Consider the circuit fig 1 consisting of an inductor (L) , capacitor (C) and a resistance(R) connected in series with a source of sinusoidally varying emf (t) = o cos t . Equating the voltage drops across the resistor and capacitor to the total emf, we get, RI + ( q / C ) = VL+ o cos t Fig.1 = - L (dI / dt ) + o cos t --------------(1) Differentiating the equation with respect to time and rearranging, we get L ( d2 I / dt ) + R (dI / dt) + ( I / C ) = - o sin t -----------------------(2) which is analogous to the equation of motion for a damped oscillator . The current I(t) has the solution I(t)= Io cos ( t – ) --------------------------------------(3) 72
  • 73. where Io exhibits resonance behaviour . The amplitude Io is given by ε0 I0 = 1 ----------------------(4) 2 2 1 R2 + ω L− LC 1 ω L− ωC Tanα = -------------------------------(5) R Gives the phase of the current relative to the applied emf. We can write Io = o/ Z where , 1 2 2 1 Z= R2 + ω L− ------------------------(6) ωC is the impedance of the circuit .The reactance X of the circuit is 1 X =ω L − , ---------------------------(7) ωL so that the impedance Z is given by Z= ( R2 + X2 ) 1/2 Clearly the impedance will be minimum (and Io will be maximum) at resonance condition when the reactance vanishes, i.e.. at the angular frequency (known as resonance frequency ) 1 ω0 = -------------------------------(8) LC which is the natural frequency of electromagnetic oscillations in LCR circuit without an external source of emf . I.2 Resistance, Capacitance and Inductance in AC circuits: Consider a resistor with a voltage drop VR = VRO cos ( t) across it (fig 2a). By Ohm’ s law the current through resistor is VR VR 0 IR = = cos ω t --------------(9) R R The current and the voltage across a resistor are in phase. In the case of a capacitor (fig 2b) the current IC = dQ/dt where q is the charge on the capacitor .If the potential drop across the capacitor is VC = VCO cos t, the charge q 73
  • 74. = CVC = CVCO cos t fig2 π I C = − ω C VCO sin ω t = ω C VC O cos ω t + -------------10) 2 Thus the current through the capacitor is ahead of voltage by phase angle /2. Consider now an inductor (fig 2c) with current IL (t) =ILO cos t . Assume that the current flows and increases in the direction shown. The back emf induced in the inductor opposes the current and the potential drop across the inductor is VL = L (dI / dt ) = — L ILO sin t = L ILO cos ( t + /2 )----------(11) The voltage across the inductor is ahead of the current in phase by an angle /2 I.3 Complex Impedance: It is convenient to use complex phasors to represent the current and voltage in an AC circuit. For example, the phasor V = Vo e i ω t = Vo (cos ωt + j sin ωt ) represents a sinusoidal varying voltage Vo cos t which is its real part .For any component A we define its complex impedance by VA = Z A I A . We write Z = R + jX , Where the real part of Z is the resistive impedance (R) , while the imaginary part of Z is the reactive impedance (X). The complex impedances of the resistor, capacitor and the inductor can be obtained by generalizing eqs (9) ,(10) & (11) to phasor equations : 1 I R = VR ZR = R ----------------------------------------(12) R j t+ 1 I C = CVCO e 2 = j CVC ZC ZC = --------------------(13) j C j t+ VL = L I L e 2 = + j L IL ZL = j L ---------------------------------(14) Thus the impedance of a resistor is its resistance itself, while the impedance of a capacitor and inductance are reactive with XC = 1/ ( C ) and XL = L . It can be shown from Kirchoff’ s rules that complex impedances in series or parallel combine just like resistors in series or parallel. Thus, for the series LCR circuit fig 1, the net impedance of the circuit is 1 Z = Z R + ZC + ZL = R + j L − --------------------------------------(15) C The current flowing in the circuit is then j t o e I= = = I o e j ( t − ) --------------------------------(16) Z 1 R + j L− C From eq (16) it can be easily seen that 74
  • 75. IO = O ( = Re I ) 2 1 R2 + L− C 1 L− C and = Tan −1 R which clearly reproduces eqs (4) & (5) . The physical current in the circuit is, of course, the real part of the phasor I in eq (16). I.4. Parallel LCR circuit : Fig 3 Consider now the parallel LCR circuit shown in fig 3. The current through the resistor can be found by calculating the equivalent impedance of the circuit. L 1 Z Z C Z = ZR + = R+ L C = R−j --------------------(17) 1 1 ZC + ZL 1 + L− ZC ZL C Thus ej t = I O e j( ) O t+ I= = ---------------------------------(18) Z L/C R−j 1 L− C The magnitude of current IO is given by IO = O ---------------------------------(19) 2 L/C R2 + 1 L− C Viewed as a function of , it is clear that IO is now a minimum (the impedance in the denominator is maximum ) when L = 1 / ( L) , or ,where 75
  • 76. 1 = = O -----------------------------------------------(20) LC and is known as “ resonance frequency” even though it corresponds to an amplitude minimum . 1 (Note: The amplitude of current in eq (19) strictly falls at = since the LC denominator tends to infinity. This is because we have considered idealized (i.e resistance less) capacitor and inductor. A finite value of current amplitude at resonance will be obtained if resistive impedance is included for these components) I.5. Power Resonance: The power dissipated at the resistor is P = I V = I2 R = V2 / R. From eq (3) for the series resonance circuit, the power dissipated at the resistor is P = I 2 R cos 2 ( t − ) ------------------------------------(21) O where IO is given by eq (4) . The average power dissipated over one cycle is 2 I2 R O R P= O = ------------------------------(22) 2 1 2 2 R2 + L− C Fig 4 shows graph of P as a function of the driving frequency . The maximum power value Pm occurs at the resonating frequency 1 O = . It can be shown that to LC a good approximation, which the power falls to half of the maximum value, Pm / 2 at =± .O 2 Here is related to damping in the electrical circuit and is given by = R / L . Fig .4 The width or range of over which the value of P falls to half the maximum at the resonance is called the Full Width Half Maximum (FWHM). The FHWM is a characteristic of the power resonance curve and is related to the amount of damping R in the system. Clearly FWHM = = . One also define the quality factor Q as L 1 L Q= O = which is also a measure damping. Large Q(small R) implies R C small damping while small Q(large R) implies large damping . Clearly we have R FWHM = = -------------------------------(23) L Thus, the quality factor Q can be determined from the FWHM of the power resonance graph. 76
  • 77. II. Set-up and Procedure: 1. The series and parallel LCR circuits are to be connected as shown in fig 1 & fig 3. 2. Set the inductance of the variable inductance value and the capacitances the variable capacitor to low values ( L ~ 0.01H , C ~ 0.1 F ) so that the resonant frequency 1 O = is of order of a few kHz . 2 LC 3. Choose the scale of the AC mill voltmeter so that the expected resonance occurs at approximately the middle of the scale. 4. Vary the frequency of the oscillator and record the voltage across the resistor. 5. Repeat (for both series and parallel LCR circuits) fir three values of the resistor (say R = 100 ,200 & 300 ). III. Exercises and Viva Questions: 1. Write down the Newton’ s law for a forced damped harmonic oscillator and map the electrical quantities appearing in eq (2) with corresponding mechanical quantities. 2. Verify that the solution, eq (3) satisfies the differential equation (2). 3. Distinguish between resistive impedance and reactive impedance. What is the effect of reactive impedance on the current and voltage in an AC circuit? In a DC circuit? 4. For the circuit shown with emf (t) = o cos t , determine the current I(t) = IO cos ( t – ) . (i.e. determine the amplitude IO and phase ). 5. Calculate the (resistive or reactive) impedance of the components L, C and R at resonance for series and parallel circuits , for your experiment . 6. Why does the series circuit give a power maximum at resonance while the parallel circuit lead to a power minimum ? 7. The AC mill voltmeter gives the ‘rms’ value of the voltage across the resistor, i.e. Vrms . If V = VO cos t , what is Vrms ? Show that the average power P = Vrms / R . 2 77
  • 78. 8. Show that eq (22) can be written as 2 RL 1 P= O 2C 2 Q2 + − O O 9. Qualitatively plot the power resonance curve for increasing values of Q .Show that the FWHM of the power resonance curve is approximately given by = O . Q 10 Argue why the power maximum(minimum) for the series (parallel)LCR circuit increases. Reference: 1. “ Physics” , M.Alonso and E.J.Finn, Addison-Wiley, 1992 2 “ Linear Circuits” , M.E.Van Valkenburg and B.K Kinariwala , Printice Hall, Englewood Cliffs ,NJ ,1982. 78
  • 79. Experiment 12 Resonance in LCR circuits Observations and results Part A: Series LCR Circuit. L = _______________________ mH C = _______________________ F. Table 1 Frequency S.No (kHz) R1 = ___________ R2 = ____________ R3 = _______________ V P = V2 / R V P = V2 / R V P = V2 / R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Part B: Parallel LCR Circuit L = _________________ mH C = _________________ F. Table 2 Frequency S.No (kHz) R1 = ___________ R2 = ____________ R3 = _______________ 79
  • 80. V P = V2 / R V P = V2 / R V P = V2 / R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Calculations and Results: 1. Plot the graph of frequency ( ) vs P (average power ) for series and parallel cases. 1 2. Read off the resonant frequency O = by locating the maxima / 2 LC minima in the graphs i). Resonance frequency for series LCR circuit =________________kHz ii) Resonance frequency for parallel LCR circuit =________________kHz iii). Calculate the value of resonance frequency =________________kHz Results : Estimated value of Q for series resonance from graph : (1) (2) (3) 1 L Calculated value of Q = = (1) (2) (3) R C % errors in Q (1) (2) (3) (One graph paper required). 80
  • 81. Experiment 13 Hysterisis loop for a ferromagnetic material (M–B curve) Apparatus: Two solenoid coils, S and C, ferromagnetic specimen rod, reversible key (R), ammeter, magnetometer, battery, solenoid, rheostat and transformer for demagnetizing set up. Purpose of experiment: i) To study the magnetization (M) of a ferromagnetic material in the presence of a magnetic field B and to plot the hysterisis (M vs. B) curve . ii) To calculate the retentivity and coercivity of the material. Basic Methodology: A ferromagnetic rod is magnetized by placing it in the magnetic field of a solenoid. The magnetized rod causes a deflection ( ) in a magnetometer .The deflection is recorded as the current in the solenoid (I) is varied over a range of positive and negative values . I. Introduction: I.1 The magnetic field of a solenoid at a point on its axis is B= O n I ----------------------------(1) -7 2 2 where O = 4 x 10 Nm / A is the magnetic permeability of vacuum , n is the number of turns per unit length in the solenoid and I is the current in the solenoid . I.2. The specimen rod is placed along the axis of the solenoid acquires a magnetization M along its axis. (Magnetization is defined as the magnetic dipole moment per unit volume). The magnetic dipole moment ‘m’ of the rod is m = M (l ) --------------------------(2) where l = length of the rod and = cross-sectional area of the rod . I.3. The magnetic field produced by the rod at the position of the magnetometer (r) is 2mr Bm = O ------------(3) 4 l2 r − 2 4 I.4. The apparatus is aligned so that the fig 1 horizontal component of the earth’ s magnetic field BE , which is along South – North direction , is perpendicular to the axis of the rod (which is along the East –West direction ). The magnetometer needle aligns along the resultant magnetic field making an angle with BE as in fig 2. 81
  • 82. Clearly, BM Tan = B M = B E Tan ------- BE (4) I.5 Using eqs 2, 3 & 4 we can write M= 4 (r 2 − l2 / 4 ) 2 B E Tan ------- O (2 l ) r (5) Hence M ∝ Tan . Also from eq 1, B∝ I . Therefore a plot of Tan vs. I reproduces the fig .2 features of M vs. B curve . I.6 Hysterisis: A ferromagnetic material whose atoms behave like magnetic dipoles produced by the spins of unpaired electrons. Domains form in the interior of the material with in which the dipoles align in a given direction but the domains themselves randomly oriented. (Fig 3) In the presence of an external magnetic field the different domain moments tend to align producing a net magnetization in the direction of the magnetic field. The variation of the magnetization M as the magnetic field B is varied gives rise to a characteristic curve called the hysterisis loop. Figure 4 shows a typical curve obtained. (The axes are taken to be Tan & I as is to be done in the experiment). As the magnetic field is increased the magnetization of the sample increases as more and more domains align along the direction of the magnetic field. With further increase in B, the magnetization M saturates to a maximum value (point b). If the current I (field B) is decreased the magnetization M decreases. Fig 4 When the current is made zero (point c ) the magnetization M however does not fall 82
  • 83. to zero. At this point the material has a residual magnetization and behaves like a permanent magnet. To make the magnetization zero (point d) requires a non-zero current in the reverse direction. As I is increased in the reverse direction, M saturates to a maximum negative value (point e). Further increase in the current brings the magnetization to zero (point g) and eventually to saturation (point b). I.7 Retentivity & Coercivity: Retentivity (MO) is the residual magnetization in the sample when the external magnetic field is zero . This is calculated as MO = 4 (r 2 )2 −l2 / 4 BE Tan ------------------------(6) O O 2l r cf Where, Tan O = (c & f are the points in the graph, fig 4) ---------------(7) 2 Coercivity BO is the external magnetic field required to reduce the residual magnetization in the sample to zero. dg IO = ; BO = O n IO -------------------------------(8) 2 (d & g are the points in the graph , fig 4 ) II Set-up and procedure: 1. Complete the wiring of the apparatus according to the circuit diagram, fig 5 2. Alignment of apparatus: Rotate the dial of the magnetometer until 00 – 00 position is aligned with the axis of the solenoid. Rotate the wooden arm, containing the solenoid, magnetometer and compensating coil, until the magnetic pointer coincides with the 00 – 00 position. In this position the wooden arm is along the E – W position .The horizontal component of earth’ s magnetic field BE (along S-N direction) is then perpendicular to the wooden arm. 83
  • 84. 3. Demagnetization of specimen: Complete the wiring of the demagnetizing apparatus according to circuit Fig 6. Insert specimen rod in the solenoid and vary the AC current in the solenoid using rheostat. This procedure should take 2-5 minutes. 4 Positioning of the Compensating Coil: Pass current (say 1A) through the coils S & C. Vary the position of C along the wooden arm until the deflection of the needle is zero. Fig 6 The magnetic field of solenoid S is then nullified (at the position of magnetometer) by the magnetic field of C . 5. Begin Measurement: i). To begin with, the current in the solenoid should be switched off. ii). Insert specimen rod so that it’ s leading tip is at the edge of the solenoid. (Note: There should be no deflection of the needle at this point .If deflection is observed, repeat step 3 for demagnetizing rod). iii). Keep the reversing key R in a position so that current flows in a given direction. The rheostat position should correspond to maximum resistance. iv). Switch on the current. (Caution: From now on the current variation sequence has to be followed strictly Any change or back tracking of measurement will lead to incorrect results). v). Vary the current using the rheostat from 0A – 1.5A and back 1.5A – 0A insteps of 0.1A and note the deflections 1 & 2 for each setting of current. (Caution: To get strictly zero current you will have to switch off the battery) vi). Reverse the position of the reversible key R and vary the current in the reverse direction 0A – 1.5A ,and back 1.5A – 0A .Note the deflections 1 & 2 vii). Reverse the position of the key R and vary the current from 0 – 1.5A. Again note the deflections 1 & 2 84
  • 85. III. Exercises and Via Questions: 1. Define paramagnetic, diamagnetic & ferromagnetic substances. Give one example of each. 2. Why the M vs. B curve called the hysterisis curve? 3. Derive eq (6). 4. What is the need to align the solenoid along the E – W direction? 5. Will the hysterisis curve be different if this alignment were not done? If yes why? 6. How does the demagnetization setup demagnetize the rod? 7. It is said that dropping the specimen rod on a hard surface also serves to remove any small residual magnetization . Is it true ? If so give reason. 8. Draw a small figure showing how the hysterisis curve would develop over many cycles of the current. 9. How would the retentivity & coercivity change with temperature? Do you think that they should depend on the geometry of the sample? 10. Identify the main sources of error in your experiment. References: 1. “ Fundamentals of Physics” , D.Halliday, R.Resnick and J.Walker, 6th edition, John-Wiley & sons, New York 2001. 2. “ Physics” , M.Alonso and E.J.Finn, Addison-Wiley, 1992. 3. “ Introduction to Electrodynamics” , D.J.Griffiths ,PHI, 1998. Observations and results 1. Distance, r = __________________________ m 2. Length of specimen, l = __________________ m 3. No. of turns per unit length of solenoid , n = 1600 turns/m . 4. Area of cross-section of rod , S = 1.84 x 10-5 m2 . 5. Horizontal component of earth’ s magnetic field ,BE = 3.53 x 10-5 T . 85
  • 86. Table : Current through S & deflection Current Deflection (forward current) Deflection (reverse current) Deflection (forward current) I (A) Degree. Degree 1 2 avg Tan 1 2 avg Tan 1 2 avg Tan 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.4 1.3. 1.2 1.1 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 86
  • 87. Calculations: 1. Attach graph of Tanθ vs. I. 2. cf = _____________________ dg = ____________________ 3. Calculation of retentivity MO : Calculation of coercivity BO : Results: Retentivity MO = _______________ Coercivity BO = ________________ (One graph paper required). 87
  • 88. Experiment 14 Electromagnetic Induction Apparatus: Metallic semi–circular arc (radius 40 cm), supporting frame, movable weights, bar magnets measurement board consisting of voltmeter, milli – ammeter, resistance condenser and diode. Purpose of experiment: To verify Faraday’ s laws of electromagnetic induction. Basic Methodology: A bar magnet is made to pass through a coil .The resulting emf produced by Faraday’ s effect charges a capacitor .The voltage of the capacitor is a measure of the induced emf . I. Introduction I.1 Faraday’ s law states that a charge in magnetic flux ( ) through a closed conducting circuit induces an electro motive force (emf) in the circuit . dΦ = − --------------------------------(1) dt The emf is proportional to the rate of change of the flux through the coil. The minus sign is related to the fact that the induced emf opposes the change in the flux linking the circuit .In MKS system has units of Volts (V), while units of Weber (W) .In this experiment we will measure certain effects leading from Faraday’ s law and will hence indirectly verify the law. The setup (fig1) basically consists of a bar magnet attached to a metallic arc. The frame the arc is suspended at the center so that the whole frame can freely oscillate in its plane. Movable weights are provided on the diagonal arm whose position is can be altered, leading to a variation of the period of oscillation from about 1.5 sec to 3 sec. As it oscillates the magnet passes through two copper coils. (Connected in series) of about 10,000 turns. fig 1 As the magnet passes through the coils the flux through the coils changes with time as shown in fig 2. The induced emf is generated in the coils in the form of two pulses with opposite sign for each swing .The pulse width is the time over which the flux through the coil changes during a swing. The maximum value of o of emf corresponding to the maximum value of 88
  • 89. . This is related to the maximum velocity vrms of the magnet. dt I.2. Calculation of vrms : The maximum velocity of the magnet is clearly obtained at the equilibrium point i.e. at the bottom of the swing .The velocity vrms can be easily calculated. If M is the mass of the frame and magnet, l is the distance of the center of mass from the point of suspension of frame and magnet , and O is the initial release angle , then by conservation of energy, we have 1 2 I 2 max = Mg l ( 1 − cos O ) = 2 M g l sin 2 O 2 --------------------(1) Thus M gl max = 2 sin O ----------------(2) I 2 M gl Thus the quantity is actually the natural fig 2 I frequency of small oscillations .Thus if T is the time period of small oscillations , then I T =2 --------------------------------------------------(3) M gl Using eq (3) and vmax = R max (R is the radius of the arc) we get 4 R v max = sin O ------------------------------------(4) T 2 I.4. We now give a rough argument that the maximum value of the emf max = o is proportional to vmax . As the magnet moves, the flux through the coil changes. Clearly = ( ) ,where is the angular position of the magnet . Hence dΦ dΦ d dΦ = − = − = − -----------------(5) dt d dt d Thus, is also a function of , i.e. dΦ ( ) ( ) = − ( ) --------------------------------------(6) d dΦ At the equilibrium point = max but = 0 hence eq = 0 . The maximum of the d emf max occurs at and angle max slightly before the equilibrium point dΦ max = O = − ( max ) ----------------------------------------(7) d max v Since the point max is close to the equilibrium = 0, ( max) ≈ max = max . Hence R 89
  • 90. 1 dΦ max = O ≈ − v max -------------------------------------(8) R d max Thus o ∝ = v max approximately and the constant of proportionality depends only on the geometry of the apparatus and is independent of the angle O .Hence a graph of o vs. vmax is expected to approximate a straight line. I.4 In this experiment we will measure o by charging a capacitor by the induced emf . The capacitor is connected in series with the coil along with a diode and a resistance R. The resistance Rint is the internal resistance of the coil and forward resistance of diode and is about 500 Ω .The diode allows current to flow only in one direction and hence the capacitor charges only during one swing of the complete oscillation .If the time constant RC is small compared to the pulse width τ then the capacitor gets fully charged to the maximum voltage o in the swing. However if RC > τ then the capacitor gets fully charged only after several swings . fig 3 The voltage across the capacitor after n swings can be measured by closing the switch S and discharging the capacitor through a voltmeter. The total charge delivered to the capacitor during each swing is final ε dt f 1 dΦ q= =− dt initial R i R dt = 1 (Φ1 − Φ 2 ) = ∆ Φ -------------------------------------- (9) R R I.5. Electromagnetic damping in an oscillating system Successive Oscillations of the metal arc do not have the same amplitude . This is due to damping whose primary sources are i) air friction ii) friction at the point of suspension iii) electromagnetic damping due to Lenz’ s law . The damping oscillation of the system can be modeled by the differential equation (assuming small damping ) d2 θ ωO d θ 2 + + ω 2 θ = 0 ---------------------------------------(10) dt Q dt 90
  • 91. M gl where ωO = 2 . The third term arises from the restoring force while the second I dθ term proportional to represents damping . The strength of the damping is dt characterized by the parameter Q , called the quality factor of the system .Small Q implies large damping, while large values of Q (Q>1) represents small damping . The solution θ(t) to eq (10) can be shown to be oscillatory but with an amplitude which decreases with time as ωt − θ A ( t ) = θ AO e 2Q ------------------------------------- (11) 2π Thus after n oscillations i.e . t = n T = n the amplitude decreases from the initial ωO amplitude θAO by πn − θAn = θAO e Q -------------------------------------- (12) π Thus ln θ A n = ln θ AOn − --------------------------------------------- (13) Q A plot of ln θAn vs n is expected to be a straight line . The quality factor can be read off from the slope . II. Setup and Procedure: Part A: Measurement of time period T for small oscillations 1 Make sure that the equilibrium position of the metal arc + magnet is at = 00 . If not adjust the position of the weights to ensure this. 2. Check that the oscillation of the arc through the coils are free and that the arcs does not touch the sides of the coils when oscillating . 3. Displace the metal arc by a small angle (50 - 100) and measure the time taken for a few (say5) oscillations .The time period T can be obtained . Repeat step 3 for different angles. Part B: Measurement of o . 1. Connect the circuit as in fig 3. Take C = 100 F and R to be small (~ 100 ). Connect the two coils in series. 2. Keep the switch in the off position. 3. Choose an initial displacement o (say 400) and release the magnet. As the induced current flows in the circuit the millimeter registers kicks. The kicks stop after a few oscillations when the capacitor has become fully discharged. 4. Flip the switch to the ON position and measure o as the maximum voltage recorded by the voltmeter. 5. Repeat for different values of o = 400, 350, 300, 250, 200, 150, 100. 91
  • 92. 6. Calculate vmax for each case and plot o vs. vmax . Part C: Charge delivered to the capacitor. 1. Choose a large value of R(say 1k ) in the circuit of fig 3. The time constant RC is thus greater than ( is the approximately estimated by dividing the magnet length by vmax). 2. With a given release angle o , measure the voltage V across the capacitor after n complete oscillations , n = 1, 2, 3, … … … 6. (Caution: Each time, i.e. after n oscillations, prevent further oscillations by stopping the frame by hand and measure V.Also make sure that the capacitor is completely discharged each time before making a new measurement ) . 3. Repeat for three different values of R. 4. Calculate q = CV for the charge depositing in the capacitor and plot qn vs. n. Part D: Electromagnetic damping 1. Let the coils be open. There will be no electromagnetic damping during the oscillations. Give a small (~ 200) displacement to the metal arc and measure the amplitude An after n swings (n = 1, 2, 3… ..) Plot ln An vs n and calculate the quality Q0 (without EM damping) .Repeat for another initial displacement. 2. Now connect the coils in series (B to C) and short the ends A & D. Measure for amplitudes An ( n =1,2,3… … ) for the same two values of initial displacement as in step 1. Plot ln An vs. n ( it will be useful to plot all the four graphs on the same graph sheet) and obtain the value of quality Q with electromagnetic damping . Note: Since damping is small you may have to take measurement for a large (~ 10) number of swings. III. Exercises and Viva Questions 1. What is the advantage in having a large number of turns in the coil? What is the effect of connecting the two coils in series or in parallel? 2. Show that the angular frequency for small oscillations of the metal frame is given M gl by I 3. What is the effect of moving the weights closer to the point of suspension? Would the emf be the same for the same release angle? 4. Find a way of estimating the angle/ position at which the maximum emf occurs 5. Estimate the pulse width for a given 0 (from your observation). Would the emf be the same for the same release? 92
  • 93. 6. The charge deposited per swing (eq 9) appears to be constant (depending only on total change flux and not on the velocity or o). Does your observation of q depend on o? If so why? 7. What is the function of the diodes in this experiment? What would happen if the diode were absent in the circuit? 8. Give reasons why the graph ln 0 vs n (Part D) could deviate from a straight line? ω0 t − 1 9. Verify by substitution that θ( t ) = θ 0 e 2Q cos (ωt + α ) ( ω = ω0 1 − ) is 4Q2 a solution of the differential eq(10). 10. Give some practical applications of Faraday’ s law. References: 1. “ Physics” ,M.Alonso and E.J.Finn, Addison-Wiley, 1992 2. “ Introduction to Electrodynamics” , D.J.Griffiths ,PHI, 1998. 93
  • 94. Observations and Results Radius of Arc = 40 cm Part A (Time period T) S.No No. of Oscillations Time (sec) T(sec) Mean T(sec) 1 2 3 Part B : Measurement of 0 C= ________________________ F 0 (degrees) vmax (cm/sec) (calculated) 0 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 Plot the graph of 0 vs vmax Part C : Charge delivered to the capacitor C = ____________________________ F 0 = ___________________________ Table I No.of R1 = R2 = R3 = swings q = CV q = CV q = CV N V -C V -C V -C 1 2 3 4 5 94
  • 95. 6 7 8 9 10 Plot the graph of q vs n . Part D : Electromagnetic Damping Table II No . of swings 1 = ___________ Amplitude An 2 = ___________ Without With EM Without EM With EM EM damping damping damping damping 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Plot the graph of ln An vs n Discuss briefly how this experiment has verified Faraday’ s law . (Three graph papers required). 95
  • 96. Experiment 15 Electrical Resistivity of Semiconductors Apparatus Four probe assembly with oven, semiconducting sample, current source, voltmeter etc. Objective: To study the temperature variation of electrical resistivity of a semiconducting materials using four-probe technique and determine the bandgap of the semiconductor. Theory The Ohm' law in terms of the electric field and current density is given by the relation, s → → E=ρJ (1) where ρ is electrical resistivity of the material. For a long thin wire-like geometry of uniform cross-section or for a long parellelopiped shaped sample of uniform cross-section, the resistivity ρ can be measured by measuring the voltage drop across the sample due to passage of known ( constant) current through the sample as shown in Fig. 1a . This simple method has following drawbacks: • The major problem in such method is error due to contact resistance of measuring leads. • The above method cannot be used for materials having random shapes. • For some type of materials soldering the test leads would be difficult. • In case of semiconductors, the heating of samples due to soldering results in injection of impurities into the materials thereby affecting the intrinsic electrical resistivity. Moreover, certain metallic contacts form schottky barrier on semiconductors. To overcome first two problems, a collinear equidistant four-probe method is used. This method provides the measurement of the resistivity of the specimen having wide variety of shapes but with uniform cross-section. The soldering contacts are replaced by pressure contacts to eliminate the last problem discussed above. l/a +I +V -V -I I I 1 2 3 4 (a) r r’ (b) 96
  • 97. Fig 1 In this method, four pointed, collinear equispaced probes are placed on the plane surface of the specimen (Fig.1b). A small pressure is applied using springs to make the electrical contacts. The diameter of the contact (which is assumed to be hemispherical) between each probe and the specimen surface is small compared to the spacing between the probes. Assume that the thickness of the sample d is small compared to the spacing between the probes s (i.e., d << s). Then the current streamlines inside the sample due to → ∂V ∧ a probe carrying current I will have radial symmetry, so that E = − r and from ∂r eqn.(1), ∂V ∧ → r = −ρ J (2) ∂r If the outer two probes (l and 4) are current carrying probes, and the inner two probes (2 & 3) are used to monitor the potential difference between the inner two points of contact, then total current density at the probe point ‘2’ which is at a distance r from probe ‘1’ and r’ from probe ‘4’ can be written as, (3) ∧ ^ → I r r′ J= − 2πd r r ′ From eqns. (2) and (3) potential difference between probes (2) and (3) can be written as, Iρ 2s 1 1 I V= + dr = ρ ln 2 2πd r 3s − r πd s (4) Vπd ∴ ρ= I ln 2 Now temperature variation of resistivity is given by: ρ = ρ 0 exp( E g / kT ) , where Eg is the bandgap of the semiconductor. A plot of ln(ρ) vs. 1/T would be a straight line with a slope of E g / k . Hence bandgap Eg can be determined from the slope of the straight line. For convenience, usually ln(ρ) is plotted as a function of 1000/T (instead of 1/T) and Eg is calculated by taking into account the 1000 factor.. Experimental Set-up: The four-probe assembly consists of four spring loaded probes arranged in a line with equal spacing between adjacent probes. These probes rest on a metal plate on which thin slices of samples (whose resistivity is to be determined) can be mounted by insulating their bottom surface using a mica sheet. Black leads are provided for carrying current and red leads for voltages measurements. The sample, usually, is brittle, hence do not attempt to mount the sample yourself. This assembly is mounted in a lid of an oven, so that the four probes and the sample can be kept inside the oven and sample can be heated up to a temperature of 200° C. The temperature inside the oven can be measured by inserting a thermometer through a hole in the lid. The constant current is supplied through probes 1 and 4 by a constant current source. The value of the current can be read from the LED display on the unit. The digital voltmeter is used to measure the voltage drop between probes 2 and 3. It uses the same LED display through a toggle switch. It operates in two modes xl and x10 with maximum of 199.9 mV and 1.999 V, respectively. Oven can be heated to low (L) or high (H) temperatures through the electric supply for it. There is an indicator LED which glows 97
  • 98. when the oven is turned on Milli-Ammeter Constant Milli-Voltmeter Current source V I 1 2 3 4 Probes S S S Fig. 2 Procedure: 1. Make the connections as shown in Figure 2. 2. Set some suitable low value of current (2 to 4 mA) from the constant current source. Note down this reading. 3. Switch the LED display to milli-voltmeter mode. Note the temperature and voltage between probes 2 and 3 (V1). 4. Switch on the oven supply. Record the voltage between the inner probes as a function of temperature using the method described in the previous step. 5. Determine the experimental resistivity as a function of temperature using equation (4) and the measured voltage and current. 6. Express your resistivity data in Ohm-cm unit and temperature in Kelvin(K). Plot ln(ρ) vs. 1000/T(K) and see that it is a straight line. From the slope of the line (choose only the linear portion of the curve), calculate Eg (bandgap of the Eg semiconductor) using the relation: ρ = ρ 0 exp( ) , where k = 8.617 x10 −5 eV/K. 2kT 7. Estimate error in measured resistivity Observation Table: Set Current I= Sl Temperature 1000/T(K-1) Voltage Rsistivity ln(ρ) no. in C (V) ρ Useful data: Distance between probes, s=2 mm, Thickness of the sample, d=0.5mm Calculation: Plot ln(ρ) vs. 1000/T and use the straight line portion of the graph to calculate the slope of 98
  • 99. the straight line. Slope = Eg/2k*1000 which yields Eg in eV for the semiconductor material under study. (One graph paper required) . Reference: D. K. Schroder, “ Semiconductor Material and Device Characterization” , John Willey & Sons Inc. 1990, Chap 1. Appendix: Electrical conductivity of materials The electrical resistance of matter changes with temperature. The number of quasi-free electrons increases with rising temperature which causes the current to increase and the resistance to decrease. On the other hand, the ions of the crystal lattice oscillate more strongly with increasing temperature, thus hindering the electron movement, so that the current decreases and the resistance increases. In conductors (e.g. metals such as Cu, Ag, Al) the second effect dominates, since at room temperature nearly all conduction electrons are quasi-free and contribute to the electron gas. A rise in temperature does not considerably influence their number, so the resistance of metals increases with temperature. Generally this is only a small effect, which can be the other way round in some special alloys! In semiconductors and isolators the first effect dominates, as a rise in temperature can increase the number of quasi-free electrons considerably: Due to the stronger atomic binding only few quasi-free electrons exist at room temperature. Rising temperature thus leads to a decrease of the electrical resistance. Electrical conductors show an approximately linear dependence between temperature and resistance. Let R0 and Rt be the resistances at temperatures t0 and t1 respectively. Then R t = R 0 (1 + β(t1 − t 0 )) (1) The temperature coefficient β characterizes the relative change in resistance per 1 ° or K. C Semiconductors show an approximately exponential temperature dependence: b R( T ) = a ⋅ e T , where a and b are empirical constants. (2) Table 1: Data of typical materials used for resistors. Material Resistivity ρ at 20° /Ωm C Ω Temperature coefficient α at 20° / K-1 C Silver 1.6 . 10-8 3.8 . 10-3 Copper 1.7 . 10-8 3.9 . 10-3 Aluminum 2.8 . 10-8 3.9 . 10-3 Iron 10 . 10-8 5.0 . 10-3 Mercury 96 . 10-8 0.9 . 10-3 Nichrome 100 . 10-8 0.4 . 10-3 Carbon 3500 . 10-8 - 0.5 . 10-3 Silicon 640 - 7.5 . 10-2 99
  • 100. Experiment 16 Planck’s constant Apparatus: Photoelectric cell, DC source, DC millimeter, Variac (AC) (0-260V), AC ammeter, Tungsten filament lamp (60 W), Monochromatic filters. Purpose of experiment: To measure the value of Planck’ s constant ‘h’ . Basic methodology: Light from a tungsten filament lamp (assumed to be a black body source) is passed through a Monochromatic filter and made to fall on a photoelectric cell. The slope of the graph ln Iph 1 vs. , leads to a determination of Planck’ s constant. T I Introduction: I.1 The electromagnetic radiation emitted by a black body ( a perfect absorber and emitter of electromagnetic radiation ) is spread continuously over the entire electromagnetic spectrum. It was Planck who first gave the law for black body radiation based on the idea that electromagnetic radiation is composed of quanta called photon of energy = h , where is the frequency of radiation and h is Planck’ s constant. I.2 Planck’ s law for radiation from a black body gives the energy of the radiation in the frequency range to + d . This is denoted as U( ) d and is given by 8 π h ν3 1 U ( ν ) dν = 3 hν dν --------(1) c e k T −1 In eq. (1), c = 3 X 108 m/s is the speed of light, K = 1.38 X 10-23 J/K is the Boltzman Constant. Fig. 1 shows a graph of U ( ) vs. for given temperature T. hν In the high frequency region, where >>1, eq. (1) can be approximated as kT hν 8πhν 3 − kT U (ν) = e -----------------------------(2) c3 Showing an exponential decrease in the energy density with frequency. 100
  • 101. I.3 In this experiment, a tungsten filament lamp is taken to be a black body radiator. Using a monochromatic filter, radiation with frequency in the visible region is selected. For the range of temperatures of the tungsten filament, the energy density can be taken to be given by eq. (2). The energy density at the chosen frequency is indirectly measured by measuring the photocurrent Iph generated upon exposing a photocell to the radiation. From the properties of the photoelectric effect, it is known that the photocurrent is proportional to the intensity of the radiation. Thus hν 8πhν 3 − kT I ph ∝ U (ν ) ≈ e ------------------------------------ (3) c3 hν 8πhν 3 hν or ln I ph = − + ln 3 = − + cons tan t ------------------(4) kT c kT Hence the graph of ln Iph Vs 1/T will be a straight line of slope of magnitude h /K. I.4 The temperature of the tungsten filament can be varied by changing the current through it. The temperature of the filament can be estimated by measuring the resistance R of the filament. The variation of R with temperature for tungsten is given by the empirical formula (T is expressed in oC ) R = Ro ( 1 +αT +βT2 ) ----------------------------(5) Where R34oC = Resistance at 34oC = 57Ω and 64Ω for set 1 and set 2 = 5.24 X 10-3 (oC)-1 β = 0.7. X 10-6 (oC)- 2 A calibration graph can be obtained by drawing the graph of eq. (5).Then, knowing the resistance R = V/I of the filament the temperature T (oC) can be obtained from the calibration graph. II. Set-up and Procedure 1. Complete the circuit with Tungsten lamp and photocell as shown in Fig. (2) 2. Choose and set the colour of the monochromatic filter (say red). 3. Using the variac, vary the AC voltage to the tungsten filament from 80V to 220V In steps of 20V. 4. Measure the AC current to the tungsten and the DC photocurrent Iph. 5. Repeat the measurements for three filters in all (say red, blue and green). 6. Prepare the calibration graph of R (resistance of filament) by using eq. (5) to calculate R for value of T (oC) = 400, 600, 800, 1000 … 2000. Plot and find the calculated value of R vs. T by a best fit straight line. 101
  • 102. 7. Calculate the resistance R = V/I from your measurement and use the calibration graph to read off temperature of the filament, against the value of the resistance Fig. 2 III. Exercise and Viva Questions: 1. What is the meaning of the quantity U( ) in the Planck’ s black body radiation law? 2. Give the approximate form of the energy density for (h /KT) <<1 and (h /KT) >>1. 3. What is the purpose of using a photocell in this experiment? 4. Use the energy density expression to argue how the photocurrent should change upon varying the frequency, keeping the variac voltage same. How will Iph change if the frequency is kept constant but the variac voltage is varied? Verify your expectations from your observations. 5. Argue how Iph would change as the variac voltage is changed if the tungsten lamp were allowed to illuminate the photocell without using a filter in- between. What frequency would contribute most to the photocurrent? 6. Study the photoelectric effect and list the characteristics of the photoelectric effect which can only be explained by the quantum nature of light. 7. Is our assumption that Iph U( ) always right ? Is it true that radiation of any frequency will give rise to a photocurrent? 102
  • 103. 8. Look up the value of work function of tungsten and calculate the cut off frequency o for tungsten. 9. We have taken the tungsten filament to be a black body radiator. What qualitative change would we expect if it were taken to be an imperfect black body? 10. What is the significance of the Planck’ s constant in physics? References: 1. “ Physics” , M. Alonso and J. Finn, Addison Wesley 1992. 2. “ Modern Physics “ , A. Beiser, McGraw Hill Inc., 1995. 103
  • 104. Experiment 16 Planck’s constant Observations and Results 1. Calibration of R Vs T : Ro (calculated) = _____________________Ω Table 1. T (oC) R(Ω) Plot a graph of R Vs T and fit a straight line. 104
  • 105. 2. Verification of photocurrent (Iph) with variac voltage (V) Table 2. Photocurrent Variac Iph (mA) ln Iph Voltage (V) Filter 1 Filter 2 Filter 3 Filter 1 Filter 2 Filter 3 =_____ =_____ =_____ =_____ =_____ =_____ 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 3. Calculation of temperature (T) of filament Table 3. Filament Resistance Variac Current I R = V/I T (oC) T (K) 1/T (K-1) Volatage(V) (A) (Ω) Calculated 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 105
  • 106. 4. Plot graphs of ln Iph Vs 1/T (K-1) for the three filter colours. 5. Calculate the Planck’ s constant from the slope of the graphs. Calculation: Results: The measured value of Planck’ s constant h = ______________________ The known value of Planck’ s constant h = ______________________ % error in the experiment: 106
  • 107. Experiment 17 Study of magnetic field along the axis of a coil Apparatus: Circular coil, power supply, switching keys, magnetic needle, sliding compass box etc. Objective To measure the magnetic field along the axis of a circular coil and verify Biot-Savart law. Theory For a circular coil of a n turns, carrying a current I, the magnetic field at a distance x from the coil and along the axis of the coil is given by µ 0 nIR 2 1 B( x) = (1) 2 (R 2 + x2 ) 32 where R is the radius of the coil. In this experiment, the coil is oriented such that the plane of the coil is vertical and parallel to the north-south direction. The axis of the coil is parallel to the east-west direction . The net field at any point x along the axis, is the vector sum of the fields due to the coil B(x) and earth’ s magnetic field BE (Fig 1). B( x) ∴ tan θ = BE θ BE B(x) Fig 1. Procedure The appratus consists of a coil mounted perpendicular to the base. A sliding compus box is mounted on aluminium rails so that the compus is always on the axis of the coil. 1. Orient the apparatus such that the coil is in the north-south plane. 2. Adjust the levelling screws to make the base horizontal . Make sure that the compus is moving freely. 3. Connect the circuit as shown in the figure. 4. Keep the compus at the center of the coil and adjust so that the pointers indicate 0-0. 5. Close the keys K and KR ( make sure that you are not shorting the power supply) and adjust the current with rheostat, RH so that the deflection is between 50 to 60 degrees. The current will be kept fixed at this value for the rest of the experiment. 6. Note down tha readings 1 θ θ and 2 . Reverse the current and note down 3 and 4θ θ .7. Repeat the experiment at intervals of 1cm along the axis until the value of the field drops to 10% of its value at the center of the coil. Repeat on both sides of the coil. 8. Draw following graphs: . B(x) as a function of x. 2 . log(B(x)) as a function of log R +x 2 Find slope and y-intercept from the graph and verify results with the expression for B(x). 107
  • 108. Observations/Calculations Parameters and constants . Least count for x measurement= . Least count for θ measurement= 6v 1 . No of turns of the coil,n=.. 1 . Radius of the coil,R=10cm mA k 2 KR 2’ . Current in the coil,I=.... 2 . Permeability of air, µ0 =4π × 10 −7 N/A 2 P.S ckt Rh 1’ 1 . Earth’ s magnetic field, BE =0.39×10-4 T To mA Fig 2. Observations i. Least count of x-measurement= … ii. Least count for θ measurement = … iii. No. of turns of the coil (n) = … iv. Radius of the coil = … v. Current in the coil = … ..A vi. Permeability of air (µo) = 4π×10-7 N/A2 vii. Earth’ s magnetic field BE = 0.39×10-4 Tesla. Table I X θ1 θ2 θ3 θ4 θ (average) Tan θ log(tanθ ) 2 2 B(x)= Log B(x) (cm) 4 4 log(R +x ) BE tanθ (T) (10-4) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 … …. Table II For other side of the scale … … X θ1 θ2 θ3 θ4 θ (average) Tan θ log(tanθ ) 2 2 B(x)= Log B(x) (cm) 4 4 log(R +x ) BE tanθ (T) (10-4) 1 2 3 4 108
  • 109. 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 … …. Calculation: From the graph of B(x) vs. log (R2+x2), find the slope and intercept from regression analysis. Slope should be -1.5 according to Biot-Savart law, and intercept value should match with the value calculated using µo, n, I, and R. Results: Experimental value of exponent (slope) = … . Theoretical value of slope = -1.5 Experimental value of intercept = … . Theoretical value of intercept = … . (Two graph papers required). References: David J. Griffiths, “ Introduction to Electrodynamics” , Prentice Hall, 2000, Chap. 5. 109
  • 110. Experiment 18 Study of Hall Effect Apparatus Commercial setup with the following components: electromagnet with power supply, Hall probe, Semiconductor sample, arrangement for pressure contact, current supply with meter, voltmeter etc. Objective: To study Hall effect in extrinsic semiconducting samples and determine the type and density of majority charge carriers. This experiment demonstrates the effect of Lorentz force. Introduction: Consider a rectangular slab of semiconductor with thickness d kept in XY plane [see Fig. 1(a)]. An electric field is applied in x-direction so that a current I flows through the sample. If w is width of the sample and d is the thickness, the current density is given by Jx=I/wd. Y Jx q W VH X Z d B Fig. 1 Now a magnetic field B is applied along positive z axis (fig. 1). If the charge carriers are positive (negative) and are moving with velocity v along positive (negative) x-axis then the direction of force experienced by the charge carriers in presence of magnetic field is along negative y direction. This results in accumulation of charge carriers towards bottom edge (fig1.). This sets up a transverse electric field Ey in the sample. The potential, thus developed , along y-axis is known as Hall voltage VH and this effect is called Hall effect. Assuming Ey to be uniform the Hall voltage is given by VH = E y w (1) and the hall coefficient RH is given by Ey V d RH = = H (2) JxB IB The majority carrier density n is related to the Hall coefficient by the relation 110
  • 111. 1 RH = (3) qn where q is the charge. From Equation (3), it is clear that the sign of charge carrier and density can be estimated from the sign and value of Hall coefficient RH. RH can be obtained by studying variation of VH as a function of I for given B. Experimental Set-up Sample is mounted on a sunmica sheet with four spring type pressure contacts. A pair of green colour leads are provided for current and that of red colour for hall voltage measurement. Note the direction of current and voltage measurement carefully. Do not exceed current beyond 10 mA. The unit marked "Hall Effect Set-up" consists of a constant current generator (CCG) for supplying current to the sample and a digital milli voltmeter to measure the Hall voltage. The unit has a digital display used for both current and Hall voltage measurement. For applying the magnetic field an electromagnet with a constant current supply is provided. It is capable of generating a magnetic field of 7.5 Kgauss between its pole pieces. The magnetic field can be measured by gauss meter along with the hall probe based on the Hall effect. Procedure 1. Connect the leads from the sample to the "Hall effect Set-up" unit. Connect the electromagnet to constant current generator. 2. Switch on the current through sample and measure the hall voltage without any magnetic field. There may be some voltage due to misalignment of pressure contacts on the sample. This error must be subtracted from the readings. 3. Switch on the electromagnet and set suitable magnetic field (<3 Kgauss). You can measure this using Hall probe. (Set magnetic field B=2 kG and B=3 kG for the experiment). 4. Insert the sample between the pole pieces of the electromagnet such that I, B and V are in proper direction (Fig.1). 5. Record the hall voltage. Also record voltage by reversing both the current and magnetic field simultaneously. (Note down data for the first two columns with +B for all I’s and then reverse the field (-B) to record data for the next two columns) 6. Keeping the magnitude of magnetic field constant, measure hall voltage as a function of I. 7. Repeat step 5 and 6 for various magnetic fields. Plot VH as a function of I using the averaged data and find the value of Hall coefficient from the slope of the graph. Hence determine charge carrier density and type of majority carrier in the given material. Note down the sample number or details of the sample. 111
  • 112. Observation Table: Sample number: Thickness of the sample: Magnetic field: B= 2000 Gauss Sl. I VH1(+I,+B) VH2(-I,+B) VH3(+I,-B) VH4(-I,-B) VH avg No. (mA) 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 Magnetic field: B= 3000 Gauss Sl. I VH1(+I,+B) VH2(-I,+B) VH3(+I,-B) VH4(-I,-B) VH avg No. (mA) 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 Plot two graphs and from the slope, calculate Hall coefficient RH. From the sign of the Hall voltage with the given current and field direction, determine the type of conductivity in the semiconductor material. Calculate free carrier density (n) = 1/(q RH) = … . m-3 112
  • 113. Results: For the given sample, RH = … … .. n=……. Type of majority carrier = … … (Two graph papers required). Reference: D. K. Schroder, “ Semiconductor Material and Device Characterization” , John Willey & Sons Inc. 1990, Chap 5 113
  • 114. Experiment 19 I-V Characteristic of Solar Cell Apparatus: Solar cell, rheostat, ammeter, voltmeter, illumination source, varic and connecting wires. Purpose of experiment: To study illuminated characteristics of a solar cell for different illumination levels. Basic methodology: A solar cell is illuminated by light having photon energy greater than the band gap energy of the solar cell. Then, using a proper circuit, the open circuit voltage, short circuit current and power drawn from the solar cell are measured. I. Introduction I.1 Solar cell is basically a two terminal p-n junction device designed to absorb photon absorption through the electrical signal or power in the external circuits. Therefore it is necessary to discuss the physics of semiconductor p-n junction diode, which converts the optical energy into electrical signals. I.2 It is well known that doped semiconductors are of two types, p and n- types semiconductors depending upon the nature of the charge carriers. In n-type semiconductor the free carriers are electrons and in p-type semiconductor, the positive charge carriers are holes. Since the semiconductors are electrically neutral, in a doped semiconductor the number of free carriers is equal to the lattice ions present in the semiconductor. The nature of the semiconductor can be defined from the location of Fermi energy level (EF) in the band structure of the semiconductor as shown in Fig.1. (The Fermi energy level is defined as the highest filled energy level at 0 K). In p-type semiconductor the Fermi level lies just above the valence band (EV) and in n-type semiconductor it lies just below the conduction band (EC) as shown in Fig. 1. When these two types of semiconductors come in contact, the free carriers flow in opposite direction and neutralize each other. This process will continue until the Fermi energy levels of the two semiconductors come to the same level as shown in Fig. 2. The region surrounding the junction thus only contains the uncovered positive ions in n-side and uncovered negative ions in p-side. This region is known as the depletion region (W) and there are no free carriers available in this region (Figure 3a). In the depletion region, the nature of Fermi energy level is most important from device point of view. The variation of different parameters across the depletion region are also shown in Fig. 3(b-e). _______________________EC _________________________EC -------------------------------------EF ----------------------------------EF _______________________EV _________________________EV 114
  • 115. p-type semiconductor n-type semiconductor Figure 1. Location of Fermi energy level in p and n type semiconductors. Figure 2. Energy bend band diagram of p-n junction diode under no bias condition. Vo is the potential difference at the depletion region. I.3 A p-n junction semiconductor can be used in forward as well as in the reverse biasing mode. If V is the applied reverse voltage across the junction then the current in the external circuit can be expressed as follows: Lp Ln qV I = qA pn + np e kT − 1 (1) τp τn Where, Lp,n = Recombination length of holes and electrons in semiconductors. τp,n = Life time of holes and electrons. A = Surface area of the junction in p-n semiconductor diode. pn , np = minority carrier density in n and p sides. V = is the applied reverse bias voltage across the junction. For a combination of two particular semiconductors, the quantity Lp Ln qA pn + n p = Cons tan t = I rs . τp τn and is known as the reverse saturation current ( Irs ). I.4 When a radiation of photon energy greater than the band gap energy of the semiconductor falls up on the surface across the junction (i.e., region surrounding the depletion region), it produces new electron – hole (e-h) pairs. Since there exists a junction potential difference as shown in Fig 3, the new carriers flow in opposite directions depending on their nature of charge. Under this condition eq. (1) can be modified as follows: 115
  • 116. Lp qV I = qA τp pn + Ln τn np ( e kT − 1 − Aqg op L p + L n ) ( 2) Where, gop is the optical generation rate of e-h pairs per (cm3- sec) and V is the applied Figure 3. Schematic diagram of p-n junction showing different parameters exist across the junction [Taken from reference 2]. reverse bias across the p-n junction diode. The second part of the equation is the current due to optical generation of e-h pairs (Iop). So, the above equation could be written as 116
  • 117. qV I = I rs e kT − 1 − I op (3) Following eq.(2), when the device is short circuited (V=0), there is a short – circuit current from p to n equal to Iop. The usual (i.e., under dark conditions) V-I characteristic for diode is shown in Fig. 4 by the dashed line that passes through the origin (see eq. (1)). Figure 4. V-I characteristic curves of a photo-diode under dark (------) and illuminated ( ___ ) conditions. When the optical generation current, Iop is introduced , the nature of the characteristic curve is modified. In the illuminated condition, the curve passes through the fourth quadrant also. When the circuit is open, I=0, using applied reverse bias is also zero, the potential across the junction due to optical generation of electron – hole pairs, become Voc ( as like V) and one can write from eq. (2), kT (L p ) + L n g op Voc = ln +1 ( 4) q Lp Ln pn + np τp τn Under this condition the Fermi levels will again change the nature in depletion region. From the difference of the Fermi levels in n and p-type semiconductors one can express the open circuited voltage as shown in Fig . 5. 117
  • 118. Figure 5. Illuminated I-V characteristics for solar cell for two different illuminations I.5 When we need to use the photodiode as detector application, we usually operate it in the 3rd quadrant. If power is to be extracted from the device, the fourth quadrant is used. The equivalent circuit for the purpose is shown in Fig. 6. in the experimental section. The maximum power delivered through the load RL is when the series resistance RS is equivalent to the value of RL as given in the procedure. Again to receive maximum power from solar cell, it is designed with large surface area coated with appropriate materials to reduce the reflection of the incident light and to reduce the recombination. Therefore in solar cell device the junction depth from the surface must be less than the recombination length of electron and holes from both sides, so that the optically generated carriers can reach the depletion region before recombination with the majority carriers in the semiconductors. In most of the cases the incident photons penetrate the n and p regions and are absorbed in the depletion region. II. Set-up and procedure: 1. Complete the circuit as shown in circuit diagram (figure 6.) Figure 6. Circuit diagram of performing the solar cell experiment 2. Illuminate the solar cell. Adjust the rheostat position for resistance so that the volt meter reads zero. This is the short circuit connection. Adjust the variac 118
  • 119. (maximum up to 230 V) such that ammeter reads a value of about 500 mA. Note down the value of the current as short circuited current, Isc . 3. Increase the resistance by varying the rheostat slowly and note down the readings of current and voltage till a maximum voltage is read. Ensure to take at least 15 – 20 readings in this region. 4. Disconnect he rheostat and note down the voltage. This is the open circuit voltage, Voc. 5. Repeat the experiment for another intensity of the illumination source. 6. Tabulate all readings in Table 1. Calculate the power using the relation, P = V x I. 7. Plot I vs. V with Isc on the current axis at the zero volt position and Voc on the voltage axis at the zero current (see Figure 5.) 8. Identify the maximum power point Pm on each plot. Calculate the series resistance of the solar cell using the formula as follows : RS = [ ∆V/∆I ]. 9. To see the performance of the cell calculate fill factor (FT) of the cell, which can be expressed by the formula, FF = [ Pm/Isc Voc ]. III. Exercise and Viva Questions: 1. What is a semiconductor? What are p and n type semiconductors? Give one example of each. 2. What are the advantages of using doped semiconductor rather than pure semiconductors? Why are semiconductor diodes preferred to valve diodes? 3. What is the meaning of valence and conduction band in semiconductor? How is the Fermi energy level in a semiconductor defined? 4. Why do the Fermi energy levels come to the same level when p and n-types of semiconductors come in contact? 5. What is the depletion region? Assuming majority carrier concentration in n-type semiconductor is higher than p-type, discuss about the width of the depletion region about the physical contact layer. 6. What is the meaning of recombination, recombination length, and life time of carriers in doped semiconductor? 7. What is reverse saturation current in p-n diode? If you increase the reverse bias voltage, what will be the nature of the 3rd quadrant part of the dotted line in figure 4? 8. Try to deduce equation 4 from equation 2 under proper assumption. 119
  • 120. 9. Discuss the curve in the 4th quadrant of Fig 4. 10. Give some practical uses of the solar cell. References: 1. “ Solid State Electronics Devices “ , B.G.Streetman, Prentice-Hall of India Private Limited, Third Edition, 1993. 2. “ Integrated Electronics “ , J.Millman and C.C.Halkias, McGraw-Hill Kogakusha Ltd., International Student Edition. 120
  • 121. Experiment 19 I-V Characteristic of Solar Cell Observations and Results Table 1 S.No. Illumination 1 : Variac Voltage Illumination 2 : Variac Voltage Volts Current Power Volts Current Power (mV) (mA) (mW) (mV) (mA) (mW) Calculations : 1. Fill up Table 1 and identify the maximum power point for both illumination levels [Pm1 and Pm2 ] 2. Plot I vs. V for both illumination levels. 3. Mark Pm1 and Pm2 on the plots. 121
  • 122. 4. Note down V and I (as in Fig. 5). 5. Calculate the series resistance and fill factor. Results: 1. The I-V characteristic was drawn for given solar cell for two illumination levels. 2. The open circuit voltages and short circuit currents for two different illuminations are measured as : Voc1 = ___________;Voc2 = ____________; Isc1 = _____________ and Isc2 = ____________ 3. The series resistance of the cell calculated using the two plots is ______________________. 4. Fill factor : (One graph paper required). 122
  • 123. Experiment 20 Air wedge: Interference of light Apparatus Glass plate, thin wire, beam splitter, light source, traveling microscope etc. Objective: To measure the diameter of a given thin wire using interference patterns formed using an extended source, at the air wedge between two glass plates. Theory: Interference effects are observed in a region of space where two or more coherent waves are superimposed. Depending on the phase difference, the effect of superposition is to produce variation in intensities which vary from a maximum of ( a1 + a 2 ) 2 to a minimum of ( a1 − a 2 ) 2 where a1 and a2 are amplitude of individual waves. For the interference effects to be observed, the two waves should be coherent. Interference patterns can be observed due to reflected waves from the top and bottom surfaces of a thin film medium. Because of the extended source, the fringes are localized at or near the wedge. Fig (1) shows the cross sectional view of the two flat glass plates kept on each other and separated by a wire at the rightmost end. There is a thin air film between the two glass plates due to the wire kept at the right end. The path difference between the two rays r1 and r2 is 2t cos r , where ‘t’ is the air thickness as shown in the figure The condition for dark band is, 2tCosr = mλ If the incident ray is close to normal , 2t = mλ (1) For m=N, the maximum order of the dark band the path difference will be maximum and this correspond to the position where the wire is kept .Moreover, here the fringes are equal thickness fringes. So Eqn (1) can be written as 2d = Nλ (2) 123
  • 124. The length ‘L’ shown in the figure can be written as L = Nβ (3) where β is the fringe width. From eq (2) and (3), d=Lλ/2β----------------------------(4) Procedure: 1. Place the two optically flat glass plates one over the other , so that they touch each other at the left end and are separated at the right end by the given thin wire . The length of the wire should be perpendicular to the length of the glass plate. 2. Place this assembly on the platform of the microscope such that the length of the glass plate is parallel to the horizontal traverse of the microscope. 3. Illuminate the assembly by sodium light. Adjust the glass plate G, such that incident light is almost normal to the glass plate wire assembly. 4. Focus the microscope to observe the interference patterns 5. Measure the horizontal positions of the dark bands in the order of say, m, m+5, m+10,......... by traversing the microscope horizontally. 6. Determine the length ‘L’ with the help of microscope. 7. Plot a graph of horizontal positions versus order of dark band. Find out the mean fringe width β from the graph and calculate the thickness of the given wire. Results: Thickness of the wire = … … … … … … … . (One graph paper required). Wavelength of the source: 5893 A References: 1. F. A. Jenkins and H. F. White, “ Fundamentals of Optics” (McGraw Hill, 1981), Chapter 14. nd 2. E. Hecht and A. Zajac, “ Optics” , (Addision Wesley, 2 Ed. 1987). 124
  • 125. Experiment 21 Newton’s Rings Apparatus: Traveling microscope, sodium vapour lamp, plano-convex lens, plane glass plate, magnifying lens. Purpose of the experiment: To observe Newton rings formed by the interface of produced by a thin air film and to determine the radius of curvature of a plano-convex lens. Basic Methodology: A thin wedge shaped air film is created by placing a plano-convex lens on a flat glass plate. A monochromatic beam of light is made to fall at almost normal incidence on the arrangement. Ring like interference fringes are observed in the reflected light. The diameters of the rings are measured. I. Introduction: I.1 The phenomenon of Newton’ s rings is an illustration of the interference of light waves reflected from the opposite surfaces of a thin film of variable thickness. The two interfering beams, derived from a monochromatic source satisfy the coherence condition for interference. Ring shaped fringes are produced by the air film existing between a convex surface of a long focus plano-convex lens and a plane of glass plate. I.2. Basic Theory: When a plano-convex lens (L) of long focal length is placed on a plane glass plate (G) , a thin film of air I enclosed between the lower surface of the lens and upper surface of the glass plate.(see fig 1). The thickness of the air film is very small at the point of contact and gradually increases from the center outwards. The fringes produced are concentric circles. With monochromatic light, bright and dark circular fringes are produced in the air film. When viewed with the white light, the fringes are coloured. A horizontal beam of light falls on the glass plate B at an angle of 450. The plate B reflects a part of incident light towards the air film enclosed by the lens L and plate G. The reflected beam (see fig 1) from the air film is viewed with a microscope. Interference takes place and dark and bright circular fringes are produced. This is due to the interference between the light reflected at the lower surface of the lens and the upper surface of the plate G. 125
  • 126. Fig 1 For the normal incidence the optical path difference between the two waves is nearly 2 t, where is the refractive index of the film and t is the thickness of the air film. Here an extra phase difference occurs for the ray which got reflected from upper surface of the plate G because the incident beam in this reflection goes from a rarer medium to a denser medium. Thus the conditions for constructive and destructive interference are (using = 1 for air) 2t=m for minima; m =0,1,2,3… … … … … .. ------------ (1) 1 and 2 t = m+ λ for maxima; m = 0,1,2,3… … … … … . -------------(2) 2 Then the air film enclosed between the spherical surface of R and a plane surface glass plate, gives circular rings such that (see fig 2) Fig. 2 126
  • 127. rm2 = (2R-t)t where rm is the radius of the mth order dark ring .(Note: The dark ring is the mth dark ring excluding the central dark spot). Now R is the order of 100 cm and t is at most 1 cm. Therefore R>>t. Hence (R − t ) 2 + rm = R 2 2 rm = (2R − t ) t 2 2 (neglecting the t term ), giving r2 2t ≈ m R Putting the value of “ 2 t” in eq(1) gives r2 mλ ≈ m rm ≈ m λ R , m =0,1,2,3… … ----------------(3) 2 R and eq (2) gives (for the radius rm of mth order bright ring ) 2 rm 1 1 = (m + ) λ rm = m + λ R 2 ----------------------(4) R 2 2 Hence for dark rings rm = m λ R --------------------------(5) while for bright rings 1 rm = m+ λR ; m =0,1,2,3… … ------------------------(6) 2 With the help of a traveling microscope we can measure the diameter of the mth ring D order dark ring = Dm . Then rm = m and hence, 2 D2 = 4 m λ R m -----------------------(7) So if we know the wavelength , we can calculate R(radius of curvature of the lens). II. Setup and Procedure: 1. Clean the plate G and lens L thoroughly and put the lens over the plate with the curved surface below B making angle with G(see fig 1). 2. Switch in the monochromatic light source. This sends a parallel beam of light. This beam of light gets reflected by plate B falls on lens L. 3. Look down vertically from above the lens and see whether the center is well illuminated. On looking through the microscope, a spot with rings around it can be seen on properly focusing the microscope. 4. Once good rings are in focus, rotate the eyepiece such that out of the two perpendicular cross wires, one has its length parallel to the direction of travel of the microscope. Let this cross wire also passes through the center of the ring system. 127
  • 128. 5. Now move the microscope to focus on a ring (say, the 20th order dark ring). On one side of the center. Set the crosswire tangential to one ring as shown in fig 3. Note down the microscope reading . fig 3 (Make sure that you correctly read the least count of the vernier in mm units) 6. Move the microscope to make the crosswire tangential to the next ring nearer to the center and note the reading. Continue with this purpose till you pass through the center. Take readings for an equal number of rings on the both sides of the center. Precautions: Notice that as you go away from the central dark spot the fringe width decreases. In order to minimize the errors in measurement of the diameter of the rings the following precautions should be taken: i) The microscope should be parallel to the edge of the glass plate. ii) If you place the cross wire tangential to the outer side of a perpendicular ring on one side of the central spot then the cross wire should be placed tangential to the inner side of the same ring on the other side of the central spot.(See fig 3) iii) The traveling microscope should move only in one direction. III. Exercises and Viva Questions: 1. What is the medium that causes the interference in this experiment? Why are the interference effects due to the glass plate and the lens ignored? 2. Explain why the interference rings are circular in shape. 3. Why do the rings get closer as the order of the rings increases? 4. Show that the difference in radius between adjacent bright rings is given by 1 λR ∆ r = rm + n − rm ≈ for m >>1. 2 m 5. Show that the area between adjacent rings is independent of m and is given by A= R, for m >>1. 6. Why is the central spot dark? What would be the reason for not obtaining a dark central spot in the experiment? 7. What would be the shape of the rings if a wedge shaped prison went kept inverted on the glass plate? 8. What will be the effect of using a plano-convex lens in the experiment? Derive an expression for the radius of bright and dark rings. 128
  • 129. 9. What would be effect of using white light instead of monochromatic light? 10. Why is it necessary to use a lens of large value of R in this experiment? Reference: 1. “ Physics” ,M.Alonso and E.J.Finn, Addison-Wiley, 1992 2. “ Fundamentals of Physics” , D.Halliday , R.Resnick and J.Walker, 6th edition ,John-Wiley & sons , New York 2001. 129
  • 130. Observations and results 1. Least count of vernier of traveling microscope = ___________________mm 2. Wave length of light = _______________________ m Table 1: Measurement of diameter of the ring S.No Order Microscope reading Diameter of ring(m) Left side Right side MS VS Net(cm) MS VS Net(cm) D(cm) D2(cm2) 1 20 2 18 3 16 4 14 5 12 6 10 7 8 8 6 9 4 10 2 Calculations: Plot the graph of D2 vs. m and draw the straight line of best fit. Give the calculation of the best fit analysis below. Attach extra sheets if necessary. From the slope of the graph, calculate the radius of curvature R of the plano convex lens as 1 R = ( slope) × = ____________________________ cm. 4λ Results: … … … … … … … … … . (One graph paper required). 130
  • 131. Experiment 22 Diffraction at a single and double slit Apparatus: Optical bench, He-Ne Laser, screen with slits, photo cell, micro meter. Purpose of the experiment: To measure the intensity distribution due to single and double slits and to measure the slit width (d) and slit separation (a). Basic Methodology: Light from a He-Ne Laser source is diffracted by single and double slits. The resulting intensity variation is measured by a photo cell whose output is read off as a current measurement. I. Introduction: I.1 Single slit diffraction We will study the Fraunhofer diffraction pattern produced by a slit of width ‘a’ . A plane wave is assumed to fall normally on the slit and we wish to calculate the intensity distribution produced on the screen. We assumed that the slit consists of a large number of equally spaced point sources and that each point on the slit is a source of Huygen’ s secondary wavelets which interfere with the wane lets emanating from other secondary points. Let the point sources be at A1, A2, A3… ..and let the distance between the consecutive points be .(see fig 1). Thus, if the number of point sources be n, then a = (n-1) . ---------------------------------------(1). We now calculate the resultant field produced by these n sources at point P on the screen. Since the slit actually consists of a continuous distribution of sources , we will in the final expression, let n go to infinity and go to zero such that n tends to a. Fig 1. 131
  • 132. Now at point P the amplitudes the disturbances reaching from A1, A2, … .. will be very nearly the same because the point at a distance which is very large in comparison to a. However, because of even slightly different path lengths ti the pint P, the field produced by A1 will differ in phase from the field produced by A2. For an incident plane waves, the points A1, A2.. are in phase and, therefore, the additional path traversed by the disturbance emanating from the point A2 A2/. This follows from the fact the optical paths A1B1P and A2/ B2P are the same. If the diffracted rays make an angle with the normal to the slit the path difference would be A2 A2/ = sin --------------------------------(2) The corresponding phase difference, φ , would be given by 2π φ= ∆ sin θ ----------------------------------- (3) λ Thus, if the field at the point P due to the disturbance emanating from the point A1 is a cos(ω t ) then the field due to the disturbance emending from A2 would be emanating a cos (ω t − φ) . Now the difference in phases of the disturbance reaching from A2 and A3 will also be φ and thus the resultant field at the point P would be given by E = E 0 [cos(ω t ) + cos(ω t − φ) + ......... + cos(ω t − (n − 1)φ)] ----------- (4) Because cos(ω t ) + cos(ω t − φ) + ......... + cos(ω t − (n − 1)φ) nφ sin 2 1 = cos ω t − ( n − 1)φ ----------------------- (5) φ 2 sin 2 1 Thus, E = E θ cos ω t − ( n − 1)φ --------------------------- (6) 2 Where the amplitude E0 of the resultant field would be given by nφ E 0 sin 2 Eθ = --------------------------------------- φ sin 2 (7) In the limit of n and 0 in such a way that n a, we have nφ n 2π π = ∆ sin θ → a sin θ 2 2 λ λ 2π 2π a Further φ = ∆ sin θ = sin θ would tend to zero and we may therefore, λ λ n 132
  • 133. π a sin θ E 0 sin sin 2 = nE λ sin β write E θ = =A ------------------------- (8) φ 0 π β a sin θ 2 λ where, π a sin θ A = n E0 and β = ----------------------------- (9) λ sin β thus, E=A cos(ω t − β) ----------------------------(10). β The corresponding intensity distribution is given by sin 2 β I = I0 --------------------------------- (11) β2 where I0 represent the intensity at = 0. I.2. Positions of the maxima and minima: The variation of the intensity with is shown in fig 2a. From eq(11) it is obvious that the intensity is zero when =m , m 0 --------------------------------- (12) or a sin = m ; m = ±1, ±2, ±3 (minima) In order to determine the position of the minima, we differentiate eq(11) wrt. and set it equal to zero. This gives Tan = (maxima) ---------------------------- (13) The root = 0 corresponds to the central maximum. The other roots can be found by determining the points of intersections of the curves y = and y = tan (fig 2 b,c). The intersections occur at = 1.43 , = 2.46 etc. and are known as the first , 2 sin (1.43 π) second maximum etc. Since is about 0.0496, the intensity of the first 1.43 π maximum is about 4.96% of the central maxima. Similarly the intensities of the second and third maximum are about 1.88% and 0.83% of the central maximum respectively. 133
  • 134. Fig 2 I.3. Double slit diffraction pattern: In this section we will study the Fraunhofer diffraction pattern produced by two parallel slits (each of width a) separates by a distance d. We would find that the resultant intensity distribution is a product of single slit diffraction pattern and the interference pattern produced by two point sources separated by a distance d. In order to calculate the diffraction we use a method similar to that used for the case of a single slit and assume that the slits consists of a large number of equally spaced point sources and that each point on the slit is a source of Huygen’ s secondary wavelets. Let the point sources be at A1, A2, A3,… .(in the first slit) and at b1, b2, b3… (in the second slit)(see fig3). As before, we assume that the distances between two consecutive points in either of the slit is . Then the path difference between the disturbances reaching the point P from two consecutive point in a slit will be sin . The field produced by the first slit at the point P will, there fore, be given by (see eq 134
  • 135. 10) Fig 3 sin β E1 = A cos(ω t − β) ------------------------------------ (14) β Similarly, the secondary slit will produce a field sin β E2 = A cos(ω t − β − Φ1 ) ------------------------------ (15) β 2π at the point P, where Φ 1 = d sin θ represents the phase difference between the λ disturbances from two corresponding points on the slits; by corresponding points we imply pair of points like (A1 ,B1), (A2 ,B2)… … ., which are separated by a distance d. Hence the resultant field will be sin β E = E1 + E 2 = A [cos(ω t − β) + cos(ω t − β − Φ1 )] β sin β which represents the interference of two waves each of amplitude A and β differing in phase by 1. Above equation can be written as sin β Φ E =A cos γ cos( ω t − β − 1 ) β 2 Φ π where = 1 = d sin θ . 2 λ The intensity distribution will be of the form sin 2 β I = 4 I0 cos 2 γ ----------------------------------- (16) β 2 135
  • 136. sin 2 β where I 0 represents the intensity distribution produced by one of the slits. As β2 a can be seen, the intensity distribution is a product of two terms, the first term sin 2 β represents the diffraction produced by a single slit of width a and the β2 second term (cos2 ) represents the interference pattern producedby two point sources separated by a distance d(see fig4) Fig 4 I.4. Positions of Maxima & Minima: Equation (16) tells us that the intensity is zero wherever = , 2 , 3 … π 3π 5π or when γ = , , ..... 2 2 2 The corresponding angles of diffraction will be given by a sin = m ; (m = 1,2,3..) and 1 d sin θ = n + λ ; (n = 0, 1, 2, 3… ) ----------------- (17) 2 Interference maxima occur when = 0, , 2 , 3 … .. or when d sin = 0, , 2 , 3 … .. 136
  • 137. II. Setup and Procedure: 1. Switch on the laser source about 15 minutes before the experiment is due to start. This ensures that the intensity of light from the laser source is constant. 2. Allow the laser beam to fall on a slit formed in the screen provided. 3. The intensity distribution in the diffraction pattern is measured with the help of a photo cell. The photo cell is secured to a mount and is kept as far behind the slit as possible. A screen with a slit (0.3mm wide) is fitted in front of the photocell. The photo current is measured with a multimeter( A) range and is approximately proportional to intensity of the incident light. 4. Repeat the same procedure for double slit and record the diffraction pattern on both the sides of central maximum. The interval between two consecutive minima positions of the photocell should be small enough, so that adjacent maxima/minima of the intensity distribution are missed. Precautions: 1. The laser beam should not penetrate into e yes as this may damages the eyes permanently. 2. The photo cell should be as away from the slit as possible. 3. The laser should be operated at a constant voltage 220V obtained from a stabilizer. This avoids the flickering of the laser beam. III. Exercises and Viva Questions: 1. What are the characteristics of light produced by a laser? Can this experiment conducted by using any other source? 2. Verify eq(4). 3. For a traveling wave, derive the relation between path difference and phase differences. 4. What is the effect on the intensity distribution if the slit with ‘a’ is changed ? If the slit separation‘d’ is changed? 5. What would be the result if the experiment were to be carried out with white light? 6. What is the intensity distribution for a double slit ignoring diffraction effects? 7. Count the number of interference fringes observed with in the envelope of central diffraction maximum. Give an example based on the experiment for the number of fringes seen. 8. What is the effect on the intensity pattern if the distance D between slit and photocell is changed? 137
  • 138. 9. How much D change for a bright fringe at the photocell should be replaced by dark fringe? 10. What will be the intensity pattern for a 3-slit interference? Reference: 1. “ Fundamentals of Optics” , F.A.jenkins and H,E.white, McGraw-Hill International(4th edition),1976. 2. “ Optics” , A.Ghatak, Tata McGraw-Hill(2nd edition), 1992. 3. “ Fundamentals of Physics” , D.Halliday, R.Resnick and J.Walker, 6th edition John-Wiley & sons , New York 2001 138
  • 139. Appendix: Lasers Introduction: The light emitted from a conventional light source is(like sodium lamp) is said to be incoherent because the radiation emitted from different atoms do not, in general, bear any definite phase relationship with each other. On the other hand, the light emitted from a laser has a very high degree of coherence and is almost perfectly collimated. Laser is an acronym for Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation. The basic principle involved in lasing action is the phenomenon of stimulated emission, which was predicted by Einestein in 1917. Einestein argued that when an atom is in the excited state, it can make a transition to a lower energy state through the emission of electromagnetic radiation; however, in contrast to the absorption process, the emission ca be occur in two different ways: i). The first is referred to as spontaneous emission in which an atom in the excited state emits radiation even in the absence of any incident. It is thus not stimulated by any incident signal but occurs spontaneously. ii) The second is referred to as stimulated emission in which an incident signal of appropriate frequency triggers an atom in an excited state to emit radiation. Using the phenomenon of stimulated emission, C.H. Townes and A.H. Schawlow, in 1958, worked out the principle of the laser. Stimulated Emission: Consider a gas enclosed in a vessel containing free atoms having a number of energy levels, at least one of which is metastable. By shining white light into this gas many can be excited, through resonance, from the ground state to excited states. As the electron drop back, many of them will become trapped in the metastable states. If the pumping light is intense enough we may obtain a population inversion, i.e. more electrons in the metastable state than in the ground state. When an electron in one of these metastable states spontaneously jumps to the ground state, it emits a photon. As the photon passes by another nearby atom in the same metastable state, it stimulates that atom to radiate a photon of the exact same frequency, direction, and polarization as the primary photon and exactly the same phase. Both of these photons upon passing close to other atoms in their metastable states, stimulates them to emit in the same direction with the same phase. However, transitions from the ground state to the excited state can also be stimulated thereby absorbing the primary photons. An excess of stimulated emission gives population inversion. Thus, if the conditions in the gas are right, a chain reaction can be developed, resulting in high intensity coherent radiation. Laser Design: In order to produce a laser, one must collimate the stimulated emission, and this is done by properly designing a cavity in which the waves can be used over and over again. For this, a cavity is attached with two end mirrors with high reflecting power and into this cavity is introduced an appropriate solid, liquid, or gas having metastable states in the atoms or molecule. The electrons in these atoms are excoted and produce a population inversion of atoms in a metastable state, which spontaneously radiate. Photons moving at an appreciate angle to the walls of the cavity will escape and be lost. Those photons emitted parallel to the axis will reflect back and forth from end to end. Their chance of stimulating emission will now depend on the high reflectance at the end mirror and a high population density of metastable atoms within the cavity. If both these conditions are satisfied the build-up of photons surging back and forth through the cavity can be self sustaining and the system will oscillate or lase, spontaneously. 139
  • 140. Helium – Neon Gas Laser: The He – Ne laser was first fabricated by A I Jaran and Harriot in 1961 at Bell Telephone laboratories in USA. This consists of a mixture of helium and neon gases in a ratio of about 10 : 1, placed inside a long narrow discharge tube.(see fig.5). The pressure inside the tube is 1 mm of Hg. The gas system is enclosed between a pair of plane mirrors. One of the mirror is of high reflectivity while the other is partially transparent so that the energy may be out of the system. Fig 5 All the lower energy levels of He and Ne are shown in an energy level diagram in fig 6. The normal state of helium is 1S0 level arising from two valence electrons in 1s orbits. The excitation of either one of these electrons to the 2s orbit finds the atom in a 1S0 or 3S1 state, both quite metastable, since transitions to the normal state are forbidden by selection rules. Neon, with Z = 10, has 10 electrons in the normal state and is represented by the configuration, 1s2, 2s2, 2p6. when one of the six 2p electrons are excited to the 3s, 3p, 4s, 4p, 4d, 4f, 5s, etc., orbit, triplet and singlet energy levels arise. A sub shell like 2p5, containing one 2p5 electron. The number and designations of the levels produced are therefore the same as for two electrons, all triplets and singlets. As free electrons collide with helium atoms during the electric discharge, one of the two bound electrons may be excited to 2s orbits, i.e., to the 3S1 or 1S0 states. Since downward transitions are forbidden by radiation selection rules, these are meta stable states and the number of excited atoms increases. We therefore have optical pumping, out of the ground stae 1S0 and in to the metastable states 3S1 and 1S0 . When one metastable helium atom collides with a non atom in its ground state, there is a high probability that the high excitation energy will be transferred to the neon, raising it to one of the 1P1 or 3P0, 3P1, or 3P2 levels of 2p55s. The small excess energy is converted in to kinetic energy of the colliding atoms. In this process each helium atom returns to the ground state as each colliding neon atom is excited to the upper level of corresponding energy. The probability of a neon atom being raised to the 2p53s or 2p53p levels by collision is extremely small because of the large energy mismatch. The collision transfer therefore selectively increases the population of the upper levels of neon. Since selection rules permit transitions from these levels downward to the 10 levels of 2p53p and these in turn to the 4 levels of 2p53s, stimulated emission can speed up the process of lasing . Lasing requires only that the 4s and 5s levels of the neon be more densely populated than the 3p levels. Since the 3p levels of neon are more sparsely populated, lasing can be initiated with out pumping a major of the atoms out of the ground state. 140
  • 141. Light waves emitted with in the laser at wavelengths such as 6328,11,177 and 11,523 A0 will occasionally be omitted parallel to the tube axis .Bouncing back and forth between the end mirrors, these waves will simulate emission of the same frequency from other excited neon atoms , and the initial wave with the stimulated wave will travel parallel to the axis. Most of the amplified radiation emerging from the ends of the He – Ne gas laser are in the near infrared region of the spectrum , between 10,000 and 35,000 A0, the most intense amplified wavelength in the visible spectrum being the red line at 6328 A0. 141
  • 142. Experiment 21 Diffraction at a single and Double slit. Observations and Results Wavelength of He-Ne laser = 623.8 nm. Distance D between slit and photocell = _______________________ cm. Least count of screw gauge = _______________________________ cm. Table 1 : Single slit diffraction S.No Position of photocell (mm) Main Scale + Vernier = Net Current µA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 142
  • 143. Table 2: Double Slit diffraction S.No Position of photocell (mm) Current Main Scale + Vernier = Net µA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 143
  • 144. Calculations & Results: 1. Determination of width od single slit ‘a’ Plot a graph of current Vs position of the photocell. Using data from Table1. Measure the distance x from center of diffraction pattern to the first minimum of the graph paper. Calculate the slit width ‘a’ using (m=1 in eq. 12). X a sin θ = a =λ X 2 + D2 2. Determination of a & d for double slit Plot a graph of current Vs position of the photocell using data of Table 2. Measuer the distance X of the first minimum of the diffraction envelope from the center of the diffraction pattern ( see Fig 4). Measure also the distance y between two consecutive minima of the interface pattern with the diffraction envelope (see Fig 4). Calculate a and d using the following relations. aX = λ ( m = 1 in eq.12 ) X 2 + D2 y d 2 λ = ( n = 1 in eq. 17 ) y 2 2 D + 2 4 Results 1. The width of the single slit = ___________________________ mm. 2. For the double slit a = ________________________________ mm. b = ________________________________ mm. (Two graph papers required). 144
  • 145. Experiment 23 Diffraction Grating Apparatus Spectrometer, grating, sodium lamp, mercury lamp, power supply for spetral lamps, magnifying glass. Objective of the experiment: a. To calibrate the grating spectrometer using the known source (Hg source) of light and to calculate the grating constant. b. Using the same grating, to calculate the wavelength of sodium –D lines Basic methodology: Light from a mercury lamp source is made to fall normally on a grating mounted on a spectrometer. The diffraction angle of the diffracted light is measured for each spectral line of the Hg-source. Likewise for sodium source, the diffraction angle and angular separation ∆θ of the sodium doublet is measured. I. Introduction I.1 Diffraction grating A diffraction grating is a very powerful and precise instrument for the study of spectra and is widely used in a large number of fields from Astronomy to Engineering, wherever there is a need for detection of the presence of atomic elements. A diffraction grating can be simply thought of as a set of identical and equally spaced slits separated by opaque strips. In reality gratings are made by ruling fine grooves by a diamond point either on a plane glass surface to produce a transmission grating or on a metal mirror to produce a reflection grating. In a transmission grating the grooves scatter light and so are opaque while the unruled surfaces transmit and act like slits. Typically a high quality grating (used for studying spectra in the visible range) has about 15000 grooves per inch, which gives a slit spacing of the order of a micron. The chief requirement of a good grating is that the lines be equally spaced over the width of the ruled surface, which can vary from 1-25 cm. After each groove has been Fig. 1 145
  • 146. ruled, the machine lifts the diamond point and moves the grating forward by a small rotation of a screw. For rulings of equal spacing the screw must have a constant pitch. Replication gratings are also used, in which a cast of the ruled surface is taken with some transparent material. Replication grating give satisfactory performance where very high resolving power is not required. A typical groove profile is the triangular blazed profile shown in Fig. 1. The angle ϕ is called the blaze angle. I.2 Basic Theory When a wave front is incident on a grating surface, light is transmitted through the slits and obstructed by the opaque portions. The secondary waves from the positions of the slit interface with one another, similar to the interference of waves in Young’ s experiment. If the spacing between the lines is of the order of the wavelength of light then an appreciable deviation of the light is produced. Consider the diffraction pattern produced by N parallel slits, each of width b; the distance between two consecutive slits is assumed to be d (See fig. 2). The field at any arbitrary point P will essentially be a sum of N turns (recall the Fig. 2 derivation for the double slit), sin β sin β sin β E=A Cos (ωt − β ) + A cos(ωt − β − φ1 ) + ....... + A cos(ωt − β − ( N − 1)φ1 ) β β β --------------------(1) sin β sin Nγ E=A cos[ωt − β − 1 ( N − 1)φ1 ] , ------------------(2) β sin γ 2 πb sin θ φ1 πd sin θ where β = and γ = = λ 2 λ and ϕ1 is the phase difference between the light rays emanating from successive slits. The corresponding intensity distribution will be sin 2 β sin 2 Nγ I = I0 ------------------(3) β 2 sin 2 γ As can be seen, the intensity distribution is a product of two terms, the first term 146
  • 147. sin 2 β represents the diffraction pattern produced by a single slit and the second term β2 represents the interference pattern produced by N equally spaced slits. For N=1 eqn. (3) reduces to the single slit diffraction pattern and for N=2, to the double slit diffraction pattern. I.3 Principal Maxima When the value of N is very large, one obtains intense maxima at γ=mπ i.e. when d sin θ = m λ , m=0, 1, 2, … … … (Maxima) … … … (4) Thus it can be easily seen by noting that sin Nγ lim N cos Nγ lim = = ±N γ →mπ sin γ γ →mπ cos γ Thus, the resultant amplitude will be sin β E (θ ) = NA β and the corresponding intensity distributions are given by sin 2 β πb sin θ πbm I = N 2 I0 , where β = = β 2 λ d Such maxima are known as principal maxima. Physically, at these maxima the fields produced by each of the slits are in phase and therefore, thay add up and the resultant fields is N times the field produced by each of the slits. I.4 Minima and secondary maxima To find the minima of the function sin Nγ 2 we note that the numerator becomes sin 2 γ zero at Nγ = 0, π ,2π or in general, pπ where p is an integer. In the special case when p=0, N, 2N … ., γ will be 0, π, 2π; … . For these values the denominator will also vanish, and we have the principal maxima descrined above. The other values of p give zero intensity since for these the denominator does not vanish at the same time. Hence, the condition for minima is γ = pπ N , excluding those values of p for which p=mN, m being the order. These values of γ corresponds to λ 2λ 3λ ( N − 1)λ ( N + 1)λ d sin θ = , , ,… … , , … … … … … … .(5) N N N N N 147
  • 148. Nλ 2 Nλ Omitting the values 0, , ,...... for which d sin θ = m λ and which corresponds to N N principal maxima. Thus, between two principal maxima we have (N-1) minima. Between two such consecutive minima the intensity has to have a maxima; these maxima are known as secondary maxima. These are of much smaller intensity than principal maxima. The principal maxima are called spectrum lines. Fig. 3 The intensity distribution of the screen is shown in Fig. 3. P corresponds to the position of the central maxima and 1, 2 etc on the two sides of P represents the 1st, 2nd etc principal maxima. a, b, c etc are secondary maxima and e, f, etc are the secondary minima. The intensity as well as the angular spacing of the secondary maxima and minima are so small in comparison to the principal maxima that they can not be observed. This results in uniform darkness between any two principal maxima. I.5 Dodium D lines The sodium doublet is responsible for the bright yellow light from a sodium lamp. The doublet arises from the 3p→3s transition, in the sodium atom. The 3p level splits into two closely spaced level with an energy spacing of 0.0021 eV. The splitting occurs due to the spin orbit effect. This can be crudely thought of as arising due to the internal magnetic field produced by the electron’ s circulation around the nucleus and Fig. 4 the splitting takes place anologus to the Zeeman effect. Fig. 4 shows the 3p and 3s levels their splitting and the radiative transition that produces the sodium doublets or D lines. II. Set-up and procedure: PART A: Calibration of diffraction grating: 1. Adjust telescope for parallel rays i.e. focus telescope on the object at infinity. Here we 148
  • 149. can adjust telescope on an object which is at very large distance. Level the spectrometer and prism table on which grating is mounted using a spirit level. Fig. 5 schematically shows the arrangement of the grating and the spectrometer. 2. Switch on the power supply for spectral lamp. 3. Place the grating on the prism table such that the surface of the grating is approximately perpendicular to the collimator of the spectrometer (i.e. perpendicular to the incident slit falling on the grating). Fix the prism table in this position. With the Hg source observe first order spectrum on left hand side and right hand side. Measure the angle of diffraction of each line by rotating telescope so that cross-wire coincides with particular spectral line. Note down each measurement on the observation table I. The diffraction angle is equal to difference between LHS and RHS observation divided by two for a particular spectral line. (See Fig. 5). The wavelength of the main spectral lines of Hg in the visible region are given in Table I. PART B: To measure the wavelength of second sodium light (D2) 4. Repeat step 2 and 3 with sodium source. In first order spectrum of sodium measure the angular position θL of yellow 1 (D1) on the left side. Use the micrometer screw to turn the telescope to align the crosswire at the second yellow line (D2) and read its angular position θL. 5. Likewise measure θR on the RHS for D1 and D2. Precautions: 1. The experiment should be performed in a dark room. 2. Micrometer screw should be used for fine adjustment of the telescope. For fine adjustment the telescope should be first licked by means of the head screw. 3. The directions of rotation of the micrometer screw should be maintained otherwise the play in the micrometer spindle might lead to errors. 4. The spectral lams (mercury source) attain their full illuminating power after being warmed up for about 5 minutes, observation should be taken after 5 minutes. 5. One of the essential precautions for the success of this experient is to set the grating normal to the incident rays (see below). Small variation on the angle of incident causes 149
  • 150. correspondingly large error in the angle of diffraction. If the exact normally is not observed, one find that the angle of diffraction measured on the left and on the right are not exactly equal. Read both the verniers to eliminate any errors due to non- coincidence of the center of the circular sale with the axis of rotation of the telescope or table. Method to make light fall normal to the grating surface: a) First mount grating approximately normal to the collimator. See the slit through telescope and take reading from one side of vernier window. Note down the reading. b) Add or subtract (whichever is convenient) 900 from reading taken in step (a) and put telescope to this position. In this position telescope is approximately perperdicular to the collimator. c) Now rotate prism table until the slit is visible on the cross-wire of the telescope. At this position the incident light from the collimator falls at an angle 450 with the plane of the grating. Note down this reading. d) Next add or substract 45o to step (c) reading and rotate the prism table so as to obtain this reading on the same window. In this situation, light incident in the grating surface is perpendicular. III. Exercise and viva questions: 1. What is a diffraction grating? How are they made? Name three different types of gratings. 2. Can a gratingbe used for studying spectra in the UV or infrared region? If so, what should be its characteristic? Can a prism be so used? What are the advantages of a grating over a prism? 3. The dispersion of a grating is defined as D=∆θ/∆λ where ∆θ is the angular separation of the principal maxima of two linees whose wavelengths differ by ∆λ. Show that the dispersion of a grating is D=m/(dcosθ) at the m-th order. Calculate D for the sodium doublet at the first order for your experiment. 4. The resolving power of a grating is defined as R=λavg/∆λ where λavg is the mean wavelength and ∆λ the difference in the wavelength of two spectral lines which can just be resolved into two lines. It can be shown that R=Nm, where N is the total number of ruling on the grating and m is the order at which the two spectral ines can be resolved. Calculate the number of rulings required to resolve the sodium doublet at the first order. 5. Use Bohr model for the frequency of light emitted in atomic transitions to calculate the wavelengths foe the sodium doublet, using Fig. 4. 6. In the Hg spectrum which lines are prominent and which are weak? What could be the reason for variation in intensities of spectral ines? 7. What would be the advantages and disadvantages of looking at the second order spectra in this experiment? 8. What is the mechanism by which the emission spectrum is produced in the spectral lamps 9Na or Hg)? Look up Ref. 2 for details. 9. What will happen if the incident light does not fall normally on the grating? Show that if φ is the angle of incidence w.r.t. the normal to the grating, then the principal maxima occur at angles θ w.r.t. normal such that d (sin θ + sin φ ) = m λ . References: 1. “ Advanced Practical Physics for students” , B. L. Worsnop and H.T. Flint, Metheun 150
  • 151. London, 1942. 2. “ Fundamentals of Optics” , F.A. Jenkins and H.E. White, 4th edition, McGraw-Hill Inc, 1981. 3. “ Fundamentals of Physics” , D. Halliday, R. Resnick and J.A. Walker, 6th Ed. John Willey and Sons, New York, 2001. 4. “ Optics” , A. Ghatak, 2nd Ed, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi 1992. 151
  • 152. Experiment 22 Observations and Results Table I S.No. Spectral Wavelength in Position of Telescope θ L −θ R Sinθ line Α° Left side θL (degree Right side θR (degree θ= minutes) minutes) 2 Main Vernier Total Main Vernier Total 1 Volet- 4047 I 2 Violet-II 4078 3 Blue 4358 4 Bluish- 4916 green 5 Green 5461 6 Yellow I 5770 7 Yellow II 5791 Table II S.No. Spectral Wavelength in Position of Telescope θ L −θ R Sinθ line Α° Left side θL (degree Right side θR (degree θ= minutes) minutes) 2 Main Vernier Total Main Vernier Total 1 Volet- 5890 I 2 Violet-II 5896 1. Angular position θ of yellow line in first order = … … … … … . 2. Angular separation ∆θ between two yellow lines in first order = … … … … … … Calculations: 1. Using data of Table I, plot a graph between sinθ and λ , determine the grating constant d from the slope of the graph. 2. Using above graph, find out the values of λ corresponding to the values of sinθ quoted in Table 2. These are the wavelengths of spectral lines of sodium. Determine the wavelength separation ∆λ. 3. Differentiate eqn. (4) for first order, (d cos θ )∆θ = ∆λ Use above equation to calculate the wavelength separation between two yellow lines since d, θ, and ∆θ are known from table 2. Results: 1. Wavelength of the spectral lines of Hg are given in table I. 2. The grating constant d is found to be … … … … … … . 3. The wavelengths of spectral lines of sodium are … … … .. 4. The wavelength separation between the sodium doublet lines (found from graph) is ∆λ= … … … … … … … … … … … .Å. 5. The wavelength separation between sodium doublet lines (calculated as in step 3 above) is ∆λ= … … … … … … … … … … … .Å. (One graph paper required) 152
  • 153. Experiment 24 Speed of light in glass Apparatus Prism, spectrometer, monochromatic light source, spirit level. Objective To determine the speed of propagation of light waves in glass. Theory Light travels with the speed c = 2.998 × 108 m s-1 in vacuum. In a material medium its speed (v) is less. As a result, light waves undergo refraction at the interface of two media. In this experiment, we take the material of the medium in the form of a glass prism. A parallel stream of waves traveling from a medium 1 (here air) is incident on the interface of air and glass (of the prism), at the angle incidence θ1. The angle of refraction is θ2 . Snell’ s law connects the two by the relation, n1sinθ1 = n2 sin θ2 … … … ..… … (1) where n1 and n2 are the refractive indices of the two media 1 and 2 respectively. Since the medium 1 here is air (n1 ≅1.000), the speed of light in the second medium is given by ν=c(sinθ2 /sinθ1 ) ……………… (2) We know that for a certain direction of incidence, the ray travels parallel to the base of the prism and the angular displacement of the final ray that emerges from the second interface of the prism has the lowest possible value. For this minimum angular deviation, δm, and the corresponding incidence angle θ1, the geometry of symmetric propagation inside the medium leads to the equation for ν sin(α/2) ν = c --------------- … … … … … … … .(3) sin(α+∂m)/2 where α is the angle of the prism. Thus, from a measurement of the angle of the prism and the value of the minimum angular displacement δm, the speed of light in the material can be determined. Procedure A spectrometer is used to measure the necessary angles. The spectrometer consists of three units: (1) collimator, (2) telescope, and (3) prism table. The prism table, its base and telescope can be independently moved around their common vertical axis. A circular angular scale enables one to read angular displacements (together with two verniers located diametrically opposite to each other). 153
  • 154. In the experiment, we need to produce a parallel beam of rays to be incident on the prism. This is done with the help of a collimator. The collimator has an adjustable rectangular slit at one end and a convex lens at the other end. When the illuminated slit is located at the focus of the lens (See Fig. 1), a parallel beam of rays emerges from the collimator. We can test this point, with the help of a telescope adjusted to receive parallel rays. We first prepare the telescope towards this purpose as follows: • Setting the eyepiece: Focus the eyepiece of the telescope on its cross- wires (for viewing the crosswires against a white background such as a wall) such that a distinct image of the crosswire is seen by you. In this context, remember that the human eye has an average “ least distance of distinct vision” of about 25 cm. When you have completed the above eyepiece adjustment, you have apparently got the image of the crosswire located at a distance comfortable for your eyes. Henceforth do not disturb the eyepiece. • Setting the Telescope: Focus the telescope onto a distant (infinity!) object. Focusing is done by changing the seperation between the objective and the eyepiece of the telescope. Test for the absence of a parallax between the image of the distant object and the vertical crosswire. Parallex effect (i.e. separation of two things when you move your head across horizontally) exits, if the cross-wire and the image of the distant object are not at the same distance from your eyes. Now the telescope is adjusted for receiving parallel rays. Henceforth do not disturb the telescope focusing adjustment. • Setting the Collimator: Use the telescope for viewing the illuminated slit through the collimator and adjust the collimator (changing the separation between its lens and slit) till the image of the slit is brought to the plane of crosswires as judged by the absence of parallax between the image of the slit and crosswires. • Optical leveling of the Prism: The prism table would have been nearly leveled before use have started the experiment. However, for your experiment, you need to do a bit of leveling using reflected rays. For this purpose, place the table with one apex at the center and facing the collimator, with the ground (non-transparent) face perpendicular to the collimator axis and away from collimator. Slightly adjust the prism so that the beam of light from the collimator falls on the two reflecting faces symmetrically (Fig. 2) When you have achieved this lock the prism table in this position. Turn the telescope to one side so as to receive the reflected image of the slit centrally into the field of view. This may be achieved by using one of the leveling screws. The image must be central whichever face is used as the reflecting face. Similarly, repeat this procedure for the other side. 154
  • 155. Finding the angle of the prism (α): With the slit width narrowed down sufficiently and prism table leveled, lock the prism table and note the angular position of the telescope when one of the reflected images coincides with the crosswires. Repeat this for the reflected image on the otherside (without disturbing the prism and prism table). The difference in these two angular positions gives 2α. • Finding angle of minimum deviation (δm): Unlock the prism table for the measurement of the angle of minimum deviation (δm). Locate the image of the slit after refraction through the prism as shown in Fig. 3. Keeping the image always in the field of view, rotate the prism table till the position where the deviation of the image of the slit is smallest. At this position, the image will go backward, even when you keep rotating the prism table in the same direction. Lock both the telescope and the prism table and to use the fine adjustment screw for finer settings. Note the angular position of the prism. In this position the prism is set for minimum deviation. Without disturbing the prism table, remove the prism and turn the telescope (now unlock it) towards the direct rays from the collimator. Note the scale reading of this position. The angle of the minimum angular deviation, viz, δm is the difference between the readings for these last two settings. ∝ δm Fig 3. Minimum deviation geometry 155
  • 156. Observation tables: 1. For angle of the prism: Vernier A Vernier B Telescope Reading 2α α Telescope Reading 2α α Face I Face II Face I Face II 2. For angle of minimum deviation: Vernier A Vernier B Direct Minimum δm Direct Minimum δm Reading Deviation Reading Deviation Calculation: Use eqn. (3) to calculate the speed of light in the glass medium. Result: Sped of light in glass = … … .. References: 1. F. A. Jenkins and H. F. White, “ Fundamentals of Optics” (McGraw Hill, 1981), Chapter 2. 2. E. Hecht and A. Zajac, “ Optics” , (Addision Wesley, 2nd Ed. 1987). 156
  • 157. Experiment 25 Polarization of light Apparatus Laser source, polarizer, analyzer, photodiode, battery, multimeter, glass slab, optical table and stand. Objective To study the polarization of light, to verify Malus law and to find the Brewster angle for glass. Theory There are a number of ways an unpolarised light can be converted into a plane polarized light. You are given two polarising sheets (polaroids). The light passing out of a polarizer is linearly polarized with the electric field E fixed in one direction in space as determined by the orientation of the polarizing sheet. If this light passes through a second polarizer (analyser), then the light output depends on the relative orientation of the two polarizers. If the pass plane of the second polarizer is making an angle θ with respect to the electric field E, then the magnitude of the field in the output wave is cosθ and the output intensity is proportional to cos2 θ Thus the output intensity I of the light transmitted by the analyser is given by I=I0 cos2 θ (1) Where I0 is the intensity of the polarized light incident on analyser. This is known as Malus law. Alternatively one can obtain polarised light by using a beam that is reflected at an interface at a particular angle called Brewster angle. Consider a polarised beam falling on an interface YZ (fig. 1). The beam is in XY plane and the polarisation of the light is in the plane of incidence (electric field EI is in XY plane) . The magnitude of the reflected electric field is given by α−β ER = EI (2) α+β Where α =cosθT/cosθI and β =µ1n1/µ2n2. µ is the magnetic permeability of the material and n is the refractive index of the material. Thus the reflectivity (ER /EI) depends on angle of incidence for the inplane polarisiation and goes to zero at a certain angle of incidence called Brewster angle θB given by tanθB = n1/n2 This fact can be used to get a polarised beam from an unpolarised beam. An unpolarised 157
  • 158. beam is made to incident at an interface at Brewster angle. The reflected beam will contain the perpendicular component only. Experimental Setup The set-up consists of a laser light source (partially polarised), polariser, analyser, and a photodiode (Fig. 2). The analyser unit is fitted with a circular scale to record the angular readings. Photodiode is used to measure the intensity of light. All the components can be mounted on an optical bench for proper alignment µ1n1 Y µ2n2 kR ER ET kT X EI kI Fig. 1 Procedure Part A 1. Assemble the photodiode circuit (reverse bias) in photoconductive mode as shown in fig 3. In this configuration photocurrent will be directly proportional to the intensity of light falling on to it. 2. Align the light source and two polaroid sheets so that the beam passes through both the polarisers and falls on to the detector. The plane of polaroids must be perpendicular to the beam. 3. Remove the polariser from the path of the beam and rotate the analyser to get the maximum photocurrent (as the source is partially polarised). Now insert the polariser in between laser and the analyser and rotate ithe polariser to get again maximum current. This will ensure that the pass plane of polariser and analyser are parallel and along the larger component of the field. 4. Now rotate the analyser in small angular steps and record the photocurrent current as a function of θ. Part B 1. Remove the polariser from the path of the beam. 2. Place the glass slab on a horizontal table and align it with light source so that the incident beam is normal to the glass surface. Note this angular reading. Angle of incidence can be changed by rotating the glass plate about vertical axis. 3. Set the analyser such that it passes only horizontal polarised light. 4. Record the intensity of reflacted beam as a function of angle of incidence. 158
  • 159. Observation Table: Part A: θ = angle between Polaroid sheet IT= Total current IS=Stray light current Table I S. no. θ (degree) IT (mV) IS (mV) I=IT-IS 1 0 2 5 3 10 .. .. .. .. .. 360 Part B: θI = Angle of incidence Table II S. No. θI (degree) IT (mV) IS (mv) I=IT-IS 1 10 2 15 3 20 4 25 5 30 6 35 7 40 8 45 9 50 10 52 11 54 12 56 13 58 14 60 15 65 16 70 17 75 18 80 Analysis: 1. In Part A, plot I vs. θ and verify eqn. (1). 1. In Part B, plot I vs. θI. Find Brewster angle from the minima of the graph. Estimate uncertainty in the Brewster angle. For calculating error in θB i.e. ∆θ B from graph, use the following concept: 159
  • 160. ∆θ B = ∆θ I min + ∆θ (∆I ) , where ∆I is the least count in I measuring instrument. Photodiode µA Fig. 3 Results: Brewster’ s angle for glass = … … … … … … … … … … . (Two graph papers required). Reference: F. A. Jenkins and H. F. White, “ Fundamentals of Optics” (McGraw Hill, 1981), Chapter 24. 160